Provided by: s-nail_14.9.15-1_amd64 bug

NAME

       S-nail [v14.9.15] — send and receive Internet mail

SYNOPSIS

       s-nail  [-DdEFinv~#]  [-:  spec]  [-A  account]  [:-a  attachment:]  [:-b bcc-addr:] [:-C "field: body":]
              [:-c cc-addr:] [-M type | -m file | -q file | -t] [-r from-addr] [:-S var[=value]:]  [-s  subject]
              [:-T "field: addr":] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [-.] :to-addr: [-- :mta-option:]

       s-nail  [-DdEeHiNnRv~#]  [-:  spec]  [-A  account]  [:-C  "field: body":]  [-L  spec] [-r from-addr] [:-S
              var[=value]:] [-u user] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [-- :mta-option:]
       s-nail [-DdEeHiNnRv~#] [-: spec] [-A account] [:-C "field: body":]  -f  [-L  spec]  [-r  from-addr]  [:-S
              var[=value]:] [:-X cmd:] [:-Y cmd:] [file] [-- :mta-option:]

       s-nail -h | --help
       s-nail -V | --version

DESCRIPTION

             Note:   S-nail   (S-nail)   will   see   major  changes  in  v15.0  (circa  2020).   Some  backward
             incompatibilities cannot be avoided.  “COMMANDS” change  to  “Shell-style  argument  quoting”,  and
             shell metacharacters will become (more) meaningful.  Some commands accept new syntax today via wysh
             (“Command  modifiers”).   Behaviour is flagged [v15-compat] and [no v15-compat], setting v15-compat
             (“INTERNAL VARIABLES”) will choose new behaviour when applicable; giving it a value makes  wysh  an
             implied default.  [Obsolete] flags what will vanish.  Using -d or -v enables obsoletion warnings.

             Warning! v15-compat (with value) will be a default in v14.10.0!

       S-nail  provides  a  simple  and  friendly environment for sending and receiving mail.  It is intended to
       provide the functionality of the POSIX mailx(1) command,  but  is  MIME  capable  and  optionally  offers
       extensions  for line editing, S/MIME, SMTP and POP3, among others.  S-nail divides incoming mail into its
       constituent messages and allows the user to deal with them in any order.  It offers many  “COMMANDS”  and
       “INTERNAL  VARIABLES”  for  manipulating  messages and sending mail.  It provides the user simple editing
       capabilities to ease the composition of outgoing messages, and increasingly powerful  and  reliable  non-
       interactive scripting capabilities.

   Options
       -: spec, --resource-files=..
                 Explicitly  control  which of the “Resource files” shall be sourced (loaded): if the letter ‘s’
                 is (case-insensitively) part of the spec then the system wide s-nail.rc  is  sourced,  likewise
                 the letter ‘u’ controls sourcing of the user's personal ~/.mailrc file, whereas the letters ‘-’
                 and  ‘/’  explicitly forbid sourcing of any resource files.  Scripts should use this option: to
                 avoid environmental noise they should “detach” from any  configuration  and  create  a  script-
                 specific  environment,  setting  any  of  the  desired  “INTERNAL VARIABLES” via -S and running
                 configurating commands via -X.  This option overrides -n.

       -A name, --account=..
                 Executes an account command for the given user email account  name  after  program  startup  is
                 complete  (all  resource files are loaded, any -S setting is being established, but -X commands
                 have not been evaluated yet).  Being a special incarnation of defined macros for the purpose of
                 bundling longer-lived settings, activating such an email account also switches to the  accounts
                 “primary system mailbox” (most likely the inbox).  If the operation fails the program will exit
                 if it is used non-interactively, or if any of errexit or posix are set.

       -a file[=input-charset[#output-charset]], --attach=..
                 Attach  file  to  the  message  (for compose mode opportunities refer to ~@ and ~^).  “Filename
                 transformations” (also see file) will  be  performed,  except  that  shell  variables  are  not
                 expanded.   Shall  file not be accessible but contain a ‘=’ character, then anything before the
                 last ‘=’ will be used as the filename, anything thereafter as a character set specification.

                 If an input character set is specified, but no output  character  set,  then  the  given  input
                 character set is fixed as-is, and no conversion will be applied; giving the empty string or the
                 special  string  hyphen-minus  ‘-’  will  be  treated  as if ttycharset has been specified (the
                 default).

                 If an output character set has also been given then the conversion will be performed exactly as
                 specified and on-the-fly, not considering the file type and content.  As an exception the empty
                 string or hyphen-minus ‘-’, select the default conversion algorithm (see “Character sets”):  no
                 conversion  is  performed on-the-fly, file and its contents will be MIME-classified (“HTML mail
                 and MIME attachments, The mime.types files”); Only this mode is supported without  support  for
                 character set conversions (features does not mention ‘+iconv’).

       -B        ([Obsolete]:  S-nail  will always use line-buffered output, to gain line-buffered input even in
                 batch mode enable batch mode via -#.)

       -b addr, --bcc=..
                 Send a blind carbon copy to recipient addr, if the setting of expandaddr, one of the  “INTERNAL
                 VARIABLES”,  allows;  the  ‘shquote’  expandaddr  flag  is  supported.   The option may be used
                 multiple times.  Also see the section “On sending mail, and non-interactive mode”.

       -C "field: body", --custom-header=..
                 Create a custom header which persists for an entire session.  A custom header consists  of  the
                 field  name followed by a colon ‘:’ and the field content body, e.g., ‘-C "Blah: Neminem laede;
                 imo omnes, quantum potes, juva"’.  Standard header field names cannot be overwritten by  custom
                 headers.   Runtime  adjustable  custom headers are available via the variable customhdr, and in
                 compose mode ~^, one of the “COMMAND ESCAPES”, as well as digmsg  are  the  most  flexible  and
                 powerful options to manage message headers.  This option may be used multiple times.

       -c addr, --cc=..
                 Just like -b, except it places the argument in the list of carbon copies.

       -D, --disconnected
                 ([Option]) Startup with disconnected set.

       -d, --debug
                 Almost enable a sandbox mode with the internal variable debug; the same can be achieved via ‘-S
                 debug’ or ‘set debug’.

       -E, --discard-empty-messages
                 set skipemptybody and thus discard messages with an empty message part body.

       -e, --check-and-exit
                 Just check if mail is present (in the system inbox or the one specified via -f): if yes, return
                 an  exit  status of zero, a non-zero value otherwise.  To restrict the set of mails to consider
                 in this evaluation a message specification can be added with the option -L.  Quickrun: does not
                 open an interactive session.

       -F        Save the message to send in a file named after the local part of the first recipient's  address
                 (instead of in record).

       -f, --file
                 Read  in  the  contents  of  the  user's  “secondary  mailbox” MBOX (or the specified file) for
                 processing; when S-nail is quit, it writes undeleted messages back to this file (but  be  aware
                 of  the  hold  option).   The  optional  file  argument  will  undergo  some  special “Filename
                 transformations” (as via file).  Note that file is not an argument  to  the  flag  -f,  but  is
                 instead  taken  from  the command line after option processing has been completed.  In order to
                 use  a  file  that  starts  with  a  hyphen-minus,  prefix  with  a  relative   path,   as   in
                 ‘./-hyphenbox.mbox’.

       -H, --header-summary
                 Display  a  summary  of  headers  for  the  given  file  (depending on -u, inbox or MAIL, or as
                 specified via -f), then exit.  A configurable summary view is  available  via  the  option  -L.
                 This mode does not honour showlast.  Quickrun: does not open an interactive session.

       -h, --help
                 Show a brief usage summary; use --long-help for a list long options.

       -i        set ignore to ignore tty interrupt signals.

       -L spec, --header-search=..
                 Display a summary of headers of all messages that match the given spec in the file found by the
                 same  algorithm used by -H, then exit.  See the section “Specifying messages” for the format of
                 spec.  This mode does not honour showlast.

                 If the -e option has been given in addition no header summary  is  produced,  but  S-nail  will
                 instead indicate via its exit status whether spec matched any messages (‘0’) or not (‘1’); note
                 that  any  verbose  output  is  suppressed  in this mode and must instead be enabled explicitly
                 (e.g., by using the option -v).  Quickrun: does not open an interactive session.

       -M type   Special send mode that will flag standard input with the MIME ‘Content-Type:’ set to the  given
                 known  type  (“HTML  mail  and  MIME attachments, The mime.types files”) and use it as the main
                 message body.  [v15  behaviour  may  differ]  Using  this  option  will  bypass  processing  of
                 message-inject-head and message-inject-tail.  Also see -q, -m, -t.

       -m file   Special  send  mode  that will MIME classify the specified file, and use it as the main message
                 body.   [v15  behaviour  may  differ]   Using   this   option   will   bypass   processing   of
                 message-inject-head and message-inject-tail.  Also see -q, -M, -t.

       -N, --no-header-summary
                 inhibit the initial display of message headers when reading mail or editing a mailbox folder by
                 calling unset for the internal variable header.

       -n        Standard  flag  that  inhibits  reading  the system wide s-nail.rc upon startup.  The option -:
                 allows more control over the startup sequence; also see “Resource files”.

       -q file, --quote-file=..
                 Special send mode that will initialize the message body with  the  contents  of  the  specified
                 file, which may be standard input ‘-’ only in non-interactive context.  Also see -M, -m, -t.

       -R, --read-only
                 Any mailbox folder aka file opened will be in read-only mode.

       -r from-addr, --from-address=..
                 Whereas  the  source  address  that  appears  in the from header of a message (or in the sender
                 header if the former contains multiple addresses) is honoured by the built-in  SMTP  transport,
                 it is not used by a file-based mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) for the RFC 5321 reverse-path used for
                 relaying  and  delegating  a  message  to  its destination(s), for delivery errors etc., but it
                 instead uses the local identity of the initiating user.

                 When this command line option is used the given single addressee from-addr will be assigned  to
                 the internal variable from, but in addition the command line option -f from-addr will be passed
                 to  a  file-based  mta  whenever  a  message  is sent.  Shall from-addr include a user name the
                 address components will be separated and the name part will  be  passed  to  a  file-based  mta
                 individually  via  -F  name.   Even  though  not  a  recipient the ‘shquote’ expandaddr flag is
                 supported.

                 If an empty string is passed as from-addr then the content of the variable from  (or,  if  that
                 contains  multiple  addresses, sender) will be evaluated and used for this purpose whenever the
                 file-based mta is contacted.  By default, without -r that is, neither -f nor  -F  command  line
                 options  are used when contacting a file-based MTA, unless this automatic deduction is enforced
                 by seting the internal variable r-option-implicit.

                 Remarks: many default installations and sites disallow overriding the local user identity  like
                 this  unless  either  the  MTA has been configured accordingly or the user is member of a group
                 with special privileges.  Passing an invalid address will cause an error.

       -S var[=value], --set=..
                 set (or, with a prefix string ‘no’, as documented in “INTERNAL VARIABLES”, unset) variable  and
                 optionally  assign  value,  if  supported;  [v15 behaviour may differ] the entire expression is
                 evaluated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see “Shell-style argument  quoting”)  if
                 the  internal  variable v15-compat is set.  If the operation fails the program will exit if any
                 of errexit or posix are set.  Settings  established  via  -S  cannot  be  changed  from  within
                 “Resource  files”  or an account switch initiated by -A.  They will become mutable again before
                 commands registered via -X are executed.

       -s subject, --subject=..
                 Specify the subject of the message to be sent.  Newline (NL) and carriage-return (CR) bytes are
                 invalid and will be normalized to space (SP) characters.

       -T "field: addr", --target=..
                 Add addr to the list of receivers targeted by field, for now supported are  only  ‘bcc’,  ‘cc’,
                 ‘fcc’,  and  ‘to’.   Field and body (address) are separated by a colon ‘:’ and optionally blank
                 (space, tabulator) characters.  The ‘shquote’ expandaddr flag is  supported.   addr  is  parsed
                 like a message header address line, as if it would be part of a template message fed in via -t,
                 and the same modifier suffix is supported.  This option may be used multiple times.

       -t, --template
                 The  text  message given (on standard input) is expected to contain, separated from the message
                 body by an empty line, one or multiple plain text message headers.  [v15 behaviour may  differ]
                 Readily  prepared  MIME  mail messages cannot be passed.  Headers can span multiple consecutive
                 lines if follow lines start with any amount of whitespace.  A line  starting  with  the  number
                 sign  ‘#’  in  the  first  column  is ignored.  Message recipients can be given via the message
                 headers ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’, ‘Bcc:’ (the ‘?single’ modifier enforces treatment as a single  addressee,
                 e.g.,  ‘To?single:  exa, <m@ple>’) or ‘Fcc:’, they will be added to any recipients specified on
                 the command line, and are likewise subject to expandaddr validity checks.  If a message subject
                 is specified via ‘Subject:’ then it will be used in favour of one given on the command line.

                 More optional headers are  ‘Reply-To:’  (possibly  overriding  reply-to),  ‘Sender:’  (sender),
                 ‘From:’   (from  and  /  or  option  -r).   ‘Message-ID:’,  ‘In-Reply-To:’,  ‘References:’  and
                 ‘Mail-Followup-To:’, by default created automatically dependent on  message  context,  will  be
                 used  if  specified  (a  special address massage will however still occur for the latter).  Any
                 other custom header field (also see -C, customhdr and ~^) is passed through entirely unchanged,
                 and in conjunction with the options -~ or -# it is possible to embed “COMMAND  ESCAPES”.   Also
                 see -M, -m, -q.

       -u user, --inbox-of=..
                 Initially  read  the  “primary  system  mailbox”  of  user,  appropriate  privileges  presumed;
                 effectively identical to ‘-f %user’.

       -V, --version
                 Show S-nails version and exit.  The command version will also show the  list  of  features:  ‘$
                 s-nail -:/ -Xversion -Xx’.

       -v, --verbose
                 setting  the  internal variable verbose enables display of some informational context messages.
                 (Will increase the level of verbosity when used multiple times.)

       -X cmd, --startup-cmd=..
                 Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument) cmd to a list of commands to  be  executed
                 before  normal operation starts.  The commands will be evaluated as a unit, just as via source.
                 Correlates with -# and errexit.

       -Y cmd, --cmd=..
                 Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument) cmd to a list of commands to  be  executed
                 after  normal  operation has started.  The commands will be evaluated successively in the given
                 order, and as if given on the program's standard input — before interactive prompting begins in
                 interactive mode, after standard input has been consumed otherwise.

       -~, --enable-cmd-escapes
                 Enable “COMMAND ESCAPES” in compose mode even in non-interactive use cases.  This can  be  used
                 to, e.g., automatically format the composed message text before sending the message:

                       $ ( echo 'line    one. Word.     Word2.';\
                           echo '~| /usr/bin/fmt -tuw66' ) |\
                         LC_ALL=C s-nail -d~:/ -Sttycharset=utf-8 bob@exam.ple

       -#, --batch-mode
                 Enables  batch  mode:  standard  input is made line buffered, the complete set of (interactive)
                 commands is available, processing of “COMMAND ESCAPES” is enabled in compose mode, and  diverse
                 “INTERNAL VARIABLES” are adjusted for batch necessities, exactly as if done via -S: emptystart,
                 noerrexit,  noheader, noposix, quiet, sendwait, typescript-mode as well as MAIL, MBOX and inbox
                 (the latter three to /dev/null).  Also, the values of COLUMNS and  LINES  are  looked  up,  and
                 acted upon.  The following prepares an email message in a batched dry run:

                       $ LC_ALL=C printf 'm bob\n~s ubject\nText\n~.\nx\n' |\
                         LC_ALL=C s-nail -d#:/ -X'alias bob bob@exam.ple'

       -., --end-options
                 This  flag  forces  termination  of  option  processing  in order to prevent “option injection”
                 (attacks).  It also forcefully puts S-nail into send mode,  see  “On  sending  mail,  and  non-
                 interactive mode”.

       All  given to-addr arguments and all receivers established via -b and -c as well as -T are subject to the
       checks established by expandaddr, one of the “INTERNAL VARIABLES”; they all support the  flag  ‘shquote’.
       If  the  setting  of expandargv allows their recognition all mta-option arguments given at the end of the
       command line after a ‘--’ separator will be passed through to a file-based mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent)  and
       persist for the entire session.  expandargv constraints do not apply to the content of mta-arguments.

   A starter
       S-nail  is a direct descendant of BSD Mail, itself a successor to the Research Unix mail which “was there
       from the start” according to “HISTORY”.  It thus represents the  user  side  of  the  Unix  mail  system,
       whereas  the system side (Mail-Transfer-Agent, MTA) was traditionally taken by sendmail(8), and most MTAs
       provide a binary of this name for compatibility purposes.  If the [Option]al SMTP mta is included in  the
       features of S-nail then the system side is not a mandatory precondition for mail delivery.

       Because  S-nail  strives for compliance with POSIX mailx(1) it is likely that some configuration settings
       have to be adjusted before using it is a smooth experience.  (Rather complete configuration examples  can
       be  found  in  the  section  “EXAMPLES”.)   The  provided  global s-nail.rc (one of the “Resource files”)
       template bends those standard imposed settings of the  “INTERNAL  VARIABLES”  a  bit  towards  more  user
       friendliness and safety, however.

       For  example,  it  sets  hold  and  keepsave in order to suppress the automatic moving of messages to the
       “secondary mailbox” MBOX that would otherwise occur (see “Message states”), and keep to not remove  empty
       system MBOX mailbox files (or all empty such files if posix aka POSIXLY_CORRECT mode has been enabled) to
       avoid mangling of file permissions when files eventually get recreated.

       To  enter  interactive mode even if the initial mailbox is empty it sets emptystart, editheaders to allow
       editing of headers as well as fullnames to not strip down addresses in compose mode, and quote to include
       the message that is being responded to when replying, which is indented  by  an  indentprefix  that  also
       deviates from standard imposed settings.  mime-counter-evidence is fully enabled, too.

       Some  random  remarks.   The  file  mode  creation mask can be managed explicitly via the variable umask.
       Files and shell pipe output can be sourced for evaluation, also during startup from within the  “Resource
       files”.

   On sending mail, and non-interactive mode
       To send a message to one or more people, using a local or built-in mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) transport to
       actually  deliver the generated mail message, S-nail can be invoked with arguments which are the names of
       people to whom the mail will be sent, and the command line options -b and -c can be used to  add  (blind)
       carbon copy receivers:

             # Via test MTA
             $ echo Hello, world | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s test $LOGNAME

             # Via sendmail(1) MTA
             $ </dev/null s-nail -:/ -s test $LOGNAME

             # Debug dry-run mode:
             $ </dev/null LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ \
                -Sttycharset=utf8 -Sfullnames \
                -b bcc@exam.ple -c cc@exam.ple -. \
                '(Lovely) Bob <bob@exam.ple>' eric@exam.ple

             # With SMTP (no real sending due to -d debug dry-run)
             $ LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
                 -S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=none \
                 -S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
                 -a /etc/mail.rc -. \
                 eric@exam.ple < /tmp/letter.txt

       If  standard  input is a terminal rather than the message to be sent, the user is expected to type in the
       message contents.  In this compose mode S-nail treats lines beginning with the character  ‘~’  special  –
       these  are  so-called  “COMMAND ESCAPES”, which can be used to read in files, process shell commands, add
       and edit attachments and more; e.g., ~v or ~e will start the VISUAL text EDITOR, respectively, to  revise
       the  message  in  its  current  state,  ~h allows editing of the most important message headers, with the
       potent ~^ custom headers can be created, for example (more specifically  than  with  -C  and  customhdr).
       [Option]ally ~? gives an overview of most other available command escapes.

       The  command  escape  ~.  (see  there)  will call hooks, insert automatic injections and receivers, leave
       compose mode and send the message once it is completed.  Aborting letter  composition  is  possible  with
       either  of  ~x or ~q, the latter of which will save the message in the file denoted by DEAD unless nosave
       is set.  And unless ignoreeof is set the effect of ~. can also be achieved by typing  end-of-transmission
       (EOT) via ‘control-D’ (‘^D’) at the beginning of an empty line, and ~q is always reachable by typing end-
       of-text (ETX) twice via ‘control-C’ (‘^C’).

       A  number of “ENVIRONMENT” and “INTERNAL VARIABLES” can be used to alter default behavior.  setting (also
       via -S) editalong will automatically startup an editor when compose  mode  is  entered,  and  editing  of
       headers  additionally  to  plain  body content can be enabled via editheaders: [v15 behaviour may differ]
       some, but not all headers can be created, edited or deleted in an editor, then.  askcc  and  askbcc  will
       cause  the  user  to  be  prompted  actively  for  (blind) carbon-copy recipients, respectively, and (the
       default) asksend will request confirmation whether the message shall be sent.

       The envelope sender address is defined by from,  explicitly  defining  an  originating  hostname  may  be
       desirable,  especially  with  the  built-in  SMTP Mail-Transfer-Agent mta.  “Character sets” for outgoing
       message and MIME part content are configurable via sendcharsets, whereas input data is assumed to  be  in
       ttycharset.   Message  data  will be passed over the wire in a mime-encoding.  MIME parts aka attachments
       need to be assigned a mimetype, usually taken out of “The mime.types  files”.   Saving  a  copy  of  sent
       messages  in  a record mailbox may be desirable – as for most mailbox file targets the value will undergo
       “Filename  transformations”.   Some  introductional  -d  or  debug  sandbox  dry-run  tests  will   prove
       correctness.

       Message recipients are subject to alternates filtering, and may not only be email addresses, but can also
       be names of mailboxes and even complete shell command pipe specifications.  If the variable expandaddr is
       not set then only email addresses like ‘bob@exam.ple’ and plain user names (including MTA aliases) may be
       used,  other  types  will  be  filtered  out, giving a warning message.  expandaddr indeed allows further
       control over and adjustments of message recipients, e.g., user names can be expanded to network addresses
       by specifying ‘namehostex’.  A network address that contains no domain-, but  only  a  valid  local  user
       ‘<name>’ in angle brackets will be automatically expanded to a valid address when hostname is not set, or
       set  to  a non-empty value; setting it to the empty value instructs S-nail that the used mta will perform
       the necessary expansion.   The  command  addrcodec  may  help  to  generate  standard  compliant  network
       addresses.

       If  the variable expandaddr is set then an extended set of recipient addresses will be accepted: Any name
       that starts with a vertical bar ‘|’ character specifies a command pipe – the command string following the
       ‘|’ is executed and the message is sent to its standard input; Likewise, any name that consists  only  of
       hyphen-minus  ‘-’  or starts with the character solidus ‘/’ or the character sequence dot solidus ‘./’ is
       treated as a file, regardless of the remaining content.  Any other name which contains  a  commercial  at
       ‘@’  character  is  a  network  address;  Any other name which starts with a plus sign ‘+’ character is a
       mailbox name; Any other name which contains a solidus ‘/’  character  but  no  exclamation  mark  ‘!’  or
       percent sign ‘%’ character before is also a mailbox name; What remains is treated as a network address.

             $ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test ./mbox.mbox
             $ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test '|cat >> ./mbox.mbox'
             $ echo safe | LC_ALL=C \
                 s-nail -:/ -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
                   --set mime-force-sendout \
                   -Sexpandaddr=fail,-all,+addr,failinvaddr -s test \
                   -. bob@exam.ple

       To  create  file-carbon-copies  the special recipient header ‘Fcc:’ may be used as often as desired.  Its
       entire value (or body in standard terms) is interpreted as a file target, after having  been  subject  to
       “Filename  transformations”.   Beside  using the command escape ~^ (to create a ‘Fcc’ header) this is the
       only way to create a file-carbon-copy without introducing an ambiguity regarding  the  interpretation  of
       the  address,  e.g.,  to  use  file  names  with leading vertical bars or commercial ats.  Like all other
       recipients ‘Fcc:’ is subject to the checks of expandaddr.  Any local  file  and  pipe  command  addressee
       honours the setting of mbox-fcc-and-pcc.

       It  is  possible  to create personal distribution lists via the alias command, so that, for instance, the
       user can send mail to ‘cohorts’ and have it go to a group of people.  Different to the alias mechanism of
       most local mtas, often documented in aliases(5) and subject  to  the  ‘name’  constraint  of  expandaddr,
       personal  aliases  will  be  expanded  by  S-nail before the message is sent.  They are thus a convenient
       alternative to specifying each addressee by itself, correlate with the active set of alternates, and  are
       subject  to metoo filtering.  [Option]ally MTA aliases can be expanded before sending messages by setting
       mta-aliases.

             ? alias  cohorts  bill jkf mark kridle@ucbcory ~/cohorts.mbox
             ? alias  mark  mark@exam.ple
             ? set mta-aliases=/etc/aliases

       For the purpose of arranging a complete environment of settings that can be switched  to  with  a  single
       command  or  command  line  option  there  are accounts.  Alternatively it is also possible to use a flat
       configuration, making use of so-called variable chains which automatically  pick  ‘USER@HOST’  or  ‘HOST’
       context-dependent  variable  variants:  for  example  addressing  ‘File  pop3://yaa@exam.ple’  would find
       pop3-no-apop-yaa@exam.ple, pop3-no-apop-exam.ple and pop3-no-apop in  order.   See  “On  URL  syntax  and
       credential lookup” and “INTERNAL VARIABLES”.

       The  compose  mode hooks on-compose-enter, on-compose-splice, on-compose-leave and on-compose-cleanup may
       be set to defined macros and provide reliable and increasingly powerful mechanisms to  perform  automated
       message   adjustments   dependent  on  message  context,  for  example  addition  of  message  signatures
       (message-inject-head, message-inject-tail) or creation of additional  receiver  lists  (also  by  setting
       autocc,  autobcc).  To achieve that the command digmsg may be used in order to query and adjust status of
       message(s).  The splice hook can also make use of “COMMAND ESCAPES”.  ([v15  behaviour  may  differ]  The
       compose  mode  hooks work for forward, mail, reply and variants; resend and Resend only provide the hooks
       on-resend-enter and on-resend-cleanup, which are pretty restricted due to the nature of the operation.)

       To avoid environmental noise scripts should “detach” S-nail from any configuration  files  and  create  a
       script-local  environment,  ideally with the command line options -: to disable any configuration file in
       conjunction with repetitions of -S to specify variables:

             $ env LC_ALL=C s-nail -:/ \
                 -Sv15-compat \
                 -Sttycharset=utf-8 -Smime-force-sendout \
                 -Sexpandaddr=fail,-all,failinvaddr \
                 -S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=login \
                 -S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
                 -s 'Subject to go' -a attachment_file \
                 -Sfullnames -. \
                 'Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>' rec2@exam.ple \
                 < content_file

       As shown, scripts can “fake” a locale environment, the above specifies  the  all-compatible  7-bit  clean
       LC_ALL  “C”,  but  will  nonetheless  take  and  send  UTF-8 in the message text by using ttycharset.  If
       character set conversion is compiled in (features includes  the  term  ‘+iconv’)  invalid  (according  to
       ttycharset) character input data would normally cause errors; setting mime-force-sendout will instead, as
       a  last resort, classify the input as binary data, and therefore allow message creation to be successful.
       (Such  content  can  then  be  inspected  either  by   installing   a   pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE   handler   for
       ‘application/octet-stream’, or possibly automatically through mime-counter-evidence).

       In  interactive  mode,  which is introduced in the next section, messages can be sent by calling the mail
       command with a list of recipient addresses:

             $ s-nail -d -Squiet -Semptystart
             "/var/spool/mail/user": 0 messages
             ? mail "Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>", rec2@exam.ple
             ...
             ? # Will do the right thing (tm)
             ? m rec1@exam.ple rec2@exam.ple

   On reading mail, and interactive mode
       When invoked without addressees S-nail enters interactive mode in which mails may  be  read.   When  used
       like  that the user's system inbox (for more on mailbox types please see the command file) is read in and
       a one line header of each message therein is displayed if the variable header is set.  The  visual  style
       of  this  summary  of  headers  can  be  adjusted  through the variable headline and the possible sorting
       criterion via autosort.  Scrolling through screenfuls of headers can be performed with the command z.  If
       the initially opened mailbox is empty S-nail will instead exit immediately (after displaying  a  message)
       unless the variable emptystart is set.

       At  the  prompt the command list will give a listing of all available commands and help will [Option]ally
       give a summary of some common ones.  If the [Option]al documentation strings are available (see features)
       one can type ‘help X’ (or ‘?X’) and see the actual expansion of  ‘X’  and  what  its  purpose  is,  i.e.,
       commands  can  be abbreviated (note that POSIX defines some abbreviations, so that the alphabetical order
       of commands does not necessarily relate to the abbreviations; it is however possible to define overwrites
       with commandalias).  These commands can also produce a more verbose output.

       Messages are given numbers (starting at 1) which uniquely identify messages; the current  message  –  the
       “dot”  –  will  either be the first new message, or the first unread message, or the first message of the
       mailbox; the internal variable showlast will instead cause usage of the last message  for  this  purpose.
       The  command headers will display a screenful of header summaries containing the “dot”, whereas from will
       display only the summaries of the given messages, defaulting to the “dot”.

       Message content can be displayed with the command  type  (‘t’,  alias  print).   Here  the  variable  crt
       controls whether and when S-nail will use the configured PAGER for display instead of directly writing to
       the  user terminal screen, the sole difference to the command more, which will always use the PAGER.  The
       command top will instead only show the first toplines of a message (maybe even compressed  if  topsqueeze
       is set).  Message display experience may improve by setting and adjusting mime-counter-evidence, and also
       see “HTML mail and MIME attachments”.

       By  default the current message (“dot”) is displayed, but like with many other commands it is possible to
       give a fancy message specification (see “Specifying messages”),  e.g.,  ‘t:u’  will  display  all  unread
       messages,  ‘t.’  will  display  the  “dot”, ‘t 1 5’ will type the messages 1 and 5, ‘t 1-5’ will type the
       messages 1 through 5, and ‘t-’ and ‘t+’ will display the previous and  the  next  message,  respectively.
       The command search (a more substantial alias for from) will display a header summary of the given message
       specification list instead of their content, e.g., the following will search for subjects:

             ? from '@Some subject to search for'

       In  the  default  setup  all  header  fields  of  a  message  will  be typed, but fields can be white- or
       blacklisted for a variety of applications by using  the  command  headerpick,  e.g.,  to  restrict  their
       display  to  a  very  restricted  set for type: ‘headerpick type retain from to cc subject’.  In order to
       display all header fields of a message regardless of currently active ignore or  retain  lists,  use  the
       commands  Type  and  Top;  Show  will  show  the  raw message content.  Note that historically the global
       s-nail.rc not only adjusts the list of displayed headers, but also sets crt.  ([v15 behaviour may differ]
       A yet somewhat restricted) Reliable scriptable message inspection is available via digmsg.

       Dependent upon the configuration a line editor (see the section “On terminal control  and  line  editor”)
       aims  at making the user experience with the many “COMMANDS” a bit nicer.  When reading the system inbox,
       or when -f (or file) specified a mailbox explicitly prefixed with the special ‘%:’ modifier (to propagate
       it to a “primary system mailbox”), then messages which have been  read  (see “Message  states”)  will  be
       automatically  moved  to a “secondary mailbox”, the user's MBOX file, when the mailbox is left, either by
       changing the active mailbox or by quitting S-nail – this automatic moving from a system- or  primary-  to
       the  secondary  mailbox  is not performed when the variable hold is set.  Messages can also be explicitly
       moved to other mailboxes, whereas copy keeps the original message.  write can be used to write  out  data
       content of specific parts of messages.

       After  examining  a  message  the user can reply ‘r’ to the sender and all recipients (which will also be
       placed in ‘To:’ unless recipients-in-cc is set), or Reply ‘R’ exclusively to the sender(s).  The  command
       Lreply  knows  how  to apply a special addressee massage, see “Mailing lists”.  Dependent on the presence
       and value of quote the message being replied to will be included in a quoted form.  forwarding a  message
       will  allow editing the new message: the original message will be contained in the message body, adjusted
       according to headerpick.  It is possible to resend or Resend messages: the former will add  a  series  of
       ‘Resent-’  headers,  whereas  the  latter  will  not;  different to newly created messages editing is not
       possible and no copy will be saved even with record unless the additional variable record-resent is  set.
       When  sending,  replying  or  forwarding messages comments and full names will be stripped from recipient
       addresses unless the internal variable fullnames is set.

       Of course messages can be delete ‘d’, and they can spring into existence again via undelete, or when  the
       S-nail session is ended via the exit or xit commands to perform a quick program termation.  To end a mail
       processing  session  regulary  and  perform a full program exit one may issue the command quit.  It will,
       among others, move read messages to the “secondary mailbox” MBOX as necessary, discard  deleted  messages
       in  the  current mailbox, and update the [Option]al (see features) line editor history-file.  By the way,
       whenever the main event loop is about to look out for the next  input  line  it  will  trigger  the  hook
       on-main-loop-tick.

   HTML mail and MIME attachments
       Messages which are HTML-only become more and more common, and of course many messages come bundled with a
       bouquet  of MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) parts.  To get a notion of MIME types S-nail has
       a default set of types built-in, onto which the content of “The  mime.types  files”  will  be  added  (as
       configured  and  allowed  by  mimetypes-load-control).  Types can also become registered with the command
       mimetype.  To improve interaction with faulty MIME part declarations which are often  seen  in  real-life
       messages,  setting  mime-counter-evidence  will  allow  verification of the given assertion, and possible
       provision of an alternative, better MIME type.

       Whereas S-nail [Option]ally supports a simple HTML-to-text filter for displaying HTML messages (indicated
       by ‘+filter-html-tagsoup’ in features), it cannot  handle  MIME  types  other  than  plain  text  itself.
       Instead  programs  need  to become registered to deal with specific MIME types or file extensions.  These
       programs may either prepare plain text versions of their input in order to  enable  S-nail  to  integrate
       their  output  neatlessly  in  its  own  message visualization (a mode which is called copiousoutput), or
       display the content themselves, for example in an external graphical window: such handlers will  only  be
       considered by and for the command mimeview.

       To install a handler program for a specific MIME type an according pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE variable needs to be
       set; to instead define a handler for a specific file extension the respective pipe-EXTENSION variable can
       be  used – these handlers take precedence.  [Option]ally S-nail supports mail user agent configuration as
       defined in RFC 1524; this mechanism (see “The Mailcap files”)  will  be  queried  for  display  or  quote
       handlers if none of the former two did; it will be the sole source for handlers of other purpose.  A last
       source  for  handlers  is  the MIME type definition itself, if a type-marker has been registered with the
       command mimetype, which many of the built-in MIME types do.

       For example, to display a HTML message inline (converted to a more fancy plain text  representation  than
       the  built-in  filter  is capable to produce) with either of the text-mode browsers lynx(1) or elinks(1),
       teach S-nail about MathML documents and make it display them as plain text, and to open  PDF  attachments
       in an external PDF viewer, asynchronously and with some other magic attached:

             ? if [ "$features" !% +filter-html-tagsoup ]
             ?   #set pipe-text/html='?* elinks -force-html -dump 1'
             ?   set pipe-text/html='?* lynx -stdin -dump -force_html'
             ?   # Display HTML as plain text instead
             ?   #set pipe-text/html=?
             ? endif
             ? mimetype ? application/mathml+xml mathml
             ? wysh set pipe-application/pdf='?&=? \
                 trap "rm -f \"${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}\"" EXIT;\
                 trap "trap \"\" INT QUIT TERM; exit 1" INT QUIT TERM;\
                 mupdf "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}"'

   Mailing lists
       Known  or subscribed-to mailing lists may be flagged in the summary of headers (headline format character
       ‘%L’), and will gain special treatment when sending mails: the variable  followup-to-honour  will  ensure
       that  a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is honoured when a message is being replied to (reply and Lreply), and
       followup-to controls creation of this header when creating mails, if  the  necessary  user  setup  (from,
       sender);  is  available; then, it may also be created automatically, e.g., when list-replying via Lreply,
       when reply is used and the messages ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ is honoured etc.

       The commands mlist and mlsubscribe manage S-nails notion of which addresses are mailing lists.  With  the
       [Option]al regular expression support any such address which contains magic regular expression characters
       (‘^[]*+?|$’;  see  re_format(7)  or  regex(7), dependent on the host system) will be compiled and used as
       one, possibly matching many addresses.

             ? set followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes \
                 reply-to-honour=ask-yes
             ? mlist a1@b1.c1 a2@b2.c2 '.*@lists\.c3$'
             ? mlsubscribe a4@b4.c4 exact@lists.c3

       Known and subscribed lists differ in that for the latter the users address is not  part  of  a  generated
       ‘Mail-Followup-To:’.   There are exceptions, for example if multiple lists are addressed and not all have
       the subscription attribute.  When replying to  a  message  its  list  address  (‘List-Post:’  header)  is
       automatically  and  temporarily  treated like a known mlist; dependent on the variable reply-to-honour an
       existing ‘Reply-To:’ is used instead (if it is a single address on the same domain  as  ‘List-Post:’)  in
       order to accept a list administrator's wish that is supposed to have been manifested like that.

       For  convenience  and  compatibility  with  mail  programs  that do not honour the non-standard M-F-T, an
       automatic user entry in the carbon-copy ‘Cc:’ address list of generated message can be created by setting
       followup-to-add-cc.  This entry will be added whenever the user will be placed in the ‘Mail-Followup-To:’
       list, and is not a regular addressee already.

   Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME
       [Option] S/MIME provides two central mechanisms:  message  signing  and  message  encryption.   A  signed
       message  contains  some  data  in  addition to the regular text.  The data can be used to verify that the
       message has been sent using a valid certificate, that the sender address matches that in the certificate,
       and that the message text has not been altered.  Signing a message does not change its regular  text;  it
       can  be  read regardless of whether the recipients software is able to handle S/MIME.  It is thus usually
       possible to sign all outgoing messages if so desired.

       Encryption, in contrast, makes the message text invisible for all people except those who have access  to
       the  secret  decryption key.  To encrypt a message, the specific recipients public encryption key must be
       known.  It is therefore not possible to send encrypted mail to people unless their key has been retrieved
       from either previous communication or public key directories.  Because signing is performed with  private
       keys, and encryption with public keys, messages should always be signed before becoming encrypted.

       A  central  concept to S/MIME is that of the certification authority (CA).  A CA is a trusted institution
       that issues certificates.  For each of these certificates it can be verified that  it  really  originates
       from  the  CA,  provided  that the CA's own certificate is previously known.  A set of CA certificates is
       usually delivered and installed together with the cryptographical library  that  is  used  on  the  local
       system.  Therefore reasonable security for S/MIME on the Internet is provided if the source that provides
       that  library  installation  is  trusted.   It  is  also  possible  to  use  a  specific  pool of trusted
       certificates.  If this is desired,  smime-ca-no-defaults  should  be  set  to  avoid  using  the  default
       certificate  pool,  and  smime-ca-file  and/or  smime-ca-dir  should  be  pointed  to  a  trusted pool of
       certificates.  A certificate cannot be more secure than the method its CA certificate has been  retrieved
       with.

       This  trusted pool of certificates is used by the command verify to ensure that the given S/MIME messages
       can be trusted.  If so, verified sender certificates that were embedded in signed messages can  be  saved
       locally  with  the  command  certsave,  and  used  by  S-nail to encrypt further communication with these
       senders:

             ? certsave FILENAME
             ? set smime-encrypt-USER@HOST=FILENAME \
                 smime-cipher-USER@HOST=AES256

       To sign outgoing messages, in order to allow receivers to verify the origin of these messages, a personal
       S/MIME certificate is required.  S-nail supports password-protected personal certificates (and keys), see
       smime-sign-cert.  The section “On URL syntax and credential lookup” gives an  overview  of  the  possible
       sources of user credentials, and “S/MIME step by step” shows examplarily how a private S/MIME certificate
       can  be obtained.  In general, if such a private key plus certificate “pair” is available, all that needs
       to be done is to set some variables:

             ? set smime-sign-cert=ME@exam.ple.paired \
                 smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
                 smime-sign

       Variables  of  interest  for  S/MIME  in  general  are   smime-ca-dir,   smime-ca-file,   smime-ca-flags,
       smime-ca-no-defaults,  smime-crl-dir,  smime-crl-file.   For  S/MIME  signing of interest are smime-sign,
       smime-sign-cert, smime-sign-include-certs and smime-sign-digest.  Additional variables  of  interest  for
       S/MIME  en- and decryption: smime-cipher and smime-encrypt-USER@HOST.  S/MIME is available if ‘+smime’ is
       included in features.

       [v15 behaviour may differ] Note that neither S/MIME signing nor encryption applies to message subjects or
       other header fields yet.  Thus they may not contain sensitive information  for  encrypted  messages,  and
       cannot  be  trusted  even  if the message content has been verified.  When sending signed messages, it is
       recommended to repeat any important header information in the message text.

   On URL syntax and credential lookup
       [v15-compat] For accessing protocol-specific resources usage of Uniform Resource Locators (URL, RFC 3986)
       has become omnipresent.  S-nail expects and understands URLs in a “normalized” variant which is not  used
       in  data  exchange, but only meant as a compact, easy-to-use way of defining and representing information
       in a well-known notation; as such they do not conform to any real standard.  Optional parts are placed in
       brackets ‘[]’, optional either because there also exist other ways to define the information in question,
       or because the part is protocol-specific, e.g., ‘/path’ is used by the [Option]al Maildir file  type  and
       the  IMAP  protocol,  but  not by POP3.  If as part of the URL any of ‘USER’ and ‘PASSWORD’ is specified,
       then the URL percent encoded form must be used (RFC 3986; the command urlcodec can be used to perform the
       encoding):

             PROTOCOL://[USER[:PASSWORD]@]server[:port][/path]

       Many internal variables of S-nail exist in multiple versions, called variable chains for the rest of this
       document: the plain ‘variable’ as well as ‘variable-HOST’ and ‘variable-USER@HOST’.  Here  ‘HOST’  indeed
       means  ‘server:port’  if  a  ‘port’  had been specified in the respective URL, otherwise it refers to the
       plain ‘server’.  Also, ‘USER’ is not truly the ‘USER’ that had been  found  when  doing  the  user  chain
       lookup  as  is  described  below, i.e., this ‘USER’ will never be in URL percent encoded form, whether it
       came from an URL or not; i.e., variable chain name extensions of “INTERNAL VARIABLES”  must  not  be  URL
       percent encoded.

       For  example,  whether  an  hypothetical  URL ‘smtp://hey%3Ayou@our.house’ had been given that includes a
       user, or whether the URL was ‘smtp://our.house’ and the user had been found differently,  to  lookup  the
       variable  chain smtp-use-starttls S-nail first looks for whether ‘smtp-use-starttls-hey:you@our.house’ is
       defined, then whether ‘smtp-use-starttls-our.house’ exists before finally ending up looking at the  plain
       variable itself.

       S-nail  obeys  the  following  logic  scheme when dealing with the necessary credential information of an
       account:

          A user is always required.  If no ‘USER’ has been given in the URL the variables user-HOST  and  user
           are looked up.  If no such variable(s) can be found then S-nail will, when enforced by the [Option]al
           variables  netrc-lookup-HOST  or  netrc-lookup,  search  “The  .netrc  file” of the user for a ‘HOST’
           specific entry which provides a ‘login’ name: this lookup  will  only  succeed  if  unambiguous  (one
           possible matching entry for ‘HOST’).

           If there is still no ‘USER’ then S-nail will fall back to the user who is supposed to run S-nail, the
           identity  of  which  has  been  fixated  during S-nail startup and is known to be a valid user on the
           current host.

          Authentication:   unless   otherwise   noted   this   will   lookup   the    PROTOCOL-auth-USER@HOST,
           PROTOCOL-auth-HOST,  PROTOCOL-auth variable chain, falling back to a protocol-specific default should
           this have no success.

          If no ‘PASSWORD’ has been given in the URL, then if the ‘USER’ has been found through the  [Option]al
           netrc-lookup  that  may  have  already  provided  the  password,  too.   Otherwise the variable chain
           password-USER@HOST, password-HOST, password is looked up and used if existent.

           Afterwards  the  complete  [Option]al  variable  chain   netrc-lookup-USER@HOST,   netrc-lookup-HOST,
           netrc-lookup  is  looked  up.  If set, the netrc cache is searched for a password only (multiple user
           accounts for a single machine may exist as  well  as  a  fallback  entry  without  user  but  with  a
           password).

           If  at  that  point  there is still no password available, but the (protocols') chosen authentication
           type requires a password, then in interactive mode the user will be prompted on the terminal.

       Note: S/MIME verification works relative to the  values  found  in  the  ‘From:’  (or  ‘Sender:’)  header
       field(s),  which  means  that  the  values  of  smime-sign, smime-sign-cert, smime-sign-include-certs and
       smime-sign-digest will not be looked up using the ‘USER’ and ‘HOST’ chains from above but instead use the
       corresponding values from the message that is being worked on.  In unusual cases multiple  and  different
       ‘USER’  and  ‘HOST’ combinations may therefore be involved – on the other hand those unusual cases become
       possible.  The usual case is as short as:

             set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@HOST smtp-use-starttls \
                 smime-sign smime-sign-cert=+smime.pair

       The section “EXAMPLES” contains complete example configurations.

   Encrypted network communication
       [Option] SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) aka its successor TLS (Transport Layer Security) are protocols  which
       aid  in  securing  communication  by  providing  a  safely initiated and encrypted network connection.  A
       central concept of TLS is that of certificates: as part of each  network  connection  setup  a  (set  of)
       certificates  will  be  exchanged,  and  by  using  those  the  identity  of  the  network  peer  can  be
       cryptographically verified; if possible the TLS/SNI (ServerNameIndication) extension will be  enabled  in
       order  to  allow  servers  fine-grained  control  over the certificates being used.  TLS works by using a
       locally installed pool of trusted certificates, and  verifying  the  connection  peer  succeeds  if  that
       provides a certificate which has been issued or is trusted by any certificate in the trusted local pool.

       The  local  pool of trusted so-called CA (Certification Authority) certificates is usually delivered with
       the used TLS library, and will be selected automatically.  It is also possible to use a specific pool  of
       trusted  certificates.   If  this is desired, tls-ca-no-defaults should be set to avoid using the default
       certificate pool, and tls-ca-file and/or (with special preparation) tls-ca-dir should  be  pointed  to  a
       trusted pool of certificates.  A certificate cannot be more secure than the method its CA certificate has
       been  retrieved  with.   For  inspection  or  other  purposes,  the certificate of a server (as seen when
       connecting to it) can be fetched like this:

             $ </dev/null openssl s_client -showcerts -connect \
                 the-server.example:pop3s 2>&1 | tee log.txt

       S-nail also supports a mode of operation in which certificates are not at all  matched  against  a  local
       pool  of  CA  certificates.  Instead a message digest will be calculated for the certificate presented by
       the connection peer, and be compared against tls-fingerprint (a variable chain that picks up  ‘USER@HOST’
       or  ‘HOST’ context-dependent variable variants), and the connection will succeed if the calculated digest
       equals  the  expected  one.   The   used   message   digest   can   be   configured   via   (the   chain)
       tls-fingerprint-digest.  The command tls may be helpful.

       It  depends  on  the  used  protocol whether encrypted communication is possible, and which configuration
       steps have to be taken to enable it.  Some protocols, e.g., POP3S, are implicitly encrypted, others, like
       POP3, can upgrade a plain text connection if so requested.  For example, to  use  the  ‘STLS’  that  POP3
       offers  (a  member  of)  the  variable  (chain)  pop3-use-starttls  needs to be set, with convenience via
       shortcut:

             shortcut encpop1 pop3s://pop1.exam.ple

             shortcut encpop2 pop3://pop2.exam.ple
             set pop3-use-starttls-pop2.exam.ple

             set mta=smtps://smtp.exam.ple:465
             set mta=smtp://smtp.exam.ple smtp-use-starttls

       Normally that is all there is to do, given that TLS libraries try to provide  safe  defaults,  plenty  of
       knobs  however exist to adjust settings.  For example certificate verification settings can be fine-tuned
       via tls-ca-flags, and the TLS configuration basics are accessible via tls-config-pairs,  for  example  to
       specify the allowed protocols or cipher lists that a communication channel may use.  In the past hints on
       how  to  restrict  the  set of protocols to highly secure ones were indicated, but as of the time of this
       writing the list of protocols or ciphers may need to become relaxed in order to be  able  to  connect  to
       some  servers;  the  following  example allows connecting to a “Lion” that uses OpenSSL 0.9.8za from June
       2014 (refer to “INTERNAL VARIABLES” for more on variable chains):

             wysh set tls-config-pairs-lion@exam.ple='MinProtocol=TLSv1.1,\
                 CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:\
                   ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA:\
                   DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:@STRENGTH'

       The OpenSSL program ciphers(1) can be used and should be referred to when creating a custom cipher  list.
       Variables  of  interest for TLS in general are tls-ca-dir, tls-ca-file, tls-ca-flags, tls-ca-no-defaults,
       tls-config-file, tls-config-module, tls-config-pairs, tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file, tls-rand-file as well as
       tls-verify.  Also see tls-features.  TLS is available if ‘+tls’ is included in features.

   Character sets
       [Option] S-nail detects the character set of the terminal by using mechanisms that are controlled by  the
       LC_CTYPE  environment  variable (in fact LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, LANG, in that order, see there).  The internal
       variable ttycharset will be set to the detected terminal character set accordingly, and will thus show up
       in the output of commands like, e.g., set and varshow.

       However, the user may give ttycharset a value during startup, making  it  possible  to  send  mail  in  a
       completely  “faked”  locale  environment,  an  option which can be used to generate and send, e.g., 8-bit
       UTF-8 input data in a pure 7-bit US-ASCII ‘LC_ALL=C’ environment (an example of this can be found in  the
       section “On sending mail, and non-interactive mode”).  Changing the value does not mean much beside that,
       because  several  aspects  of the real character set are implied by the locale environment of the system,
       which stays unaffected by ttycharset.

       Messages and attachments which  consist  of  7-bit  clean  data  will  be  classified  as  consisting  of
       charset-7bit  character data.  This is a problem if the ttycharset character set is a multibyte character
       set that is also 7-bit clean.  For example, the Japanese character set ISO-2022-JP  is  7-bit  clean  but
       capable  to  encode  the rich set of Japanese Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters: in order to notify
       receivers of this character set the mail  message  must  be  MIME  encoded  so  that  the  character  set
       ISO-2022-JP  can  be  advertised!  To achieve this, the variable charset-7bit must be set to ISO-2022-JP.
       (Today a better approach regarding email is the usage of UTF-8, which uses 8-bit bytes  for  non-US-ASCII
       data.)

       If  the [Option]al character set conversion capabilities are not available (features does not include the
       term ‘+iconv’), then ttycharset will be the only supported character set, it is simply  assumed  that  it
       can  be used to exchange 8-bit messages (over the wire an intermediate, configurable mime-encoding may be
       applied), and the rest of this section does not apply; it may however still be  necessary  to  explicitly
       set  it  if automatic detection fails, since in that case it defaults to LATIN1 aka ISO-8859-1 unless the
       operating system environment is known to always and exclusively support UTF-8 locales.

       [Option] When reading messages, their text is converted into ttycharset as necessary in order to  display
       them on the user's terminal.  Unprintable characters and invalid byte sequences are detected and replaced
       by  proper  substitution characters.  Character set mappings for source character sets can be established
       with the command charsetalias, which may be handy to work around faulty character set  catalogues  (e.g.,
       to  add  a missing LATIN1 to ISO-8859-1 mapping), or to enforce treatment of one character set as another
       one (e.g., to interpret LATIN1 as CP1252).  Also see charset-unknown-8bit  to  deal  with  another  hairy
       aspect of message interpretation.

       When sending messages their parts and attachments are classified.  Whereas no character set conversion is
       performed  on  those  parts which appear to be binary data, the character set being used must be declared
       within the MIME header of an outgoing text part if it contains characters that do not conform to the  set
       of  characters  that  are  allowed by the email standards.  Permissible values for character sets used in
       outgoing messages can be declared using the sendcharsets variable,  and  charset-8bit,  which  defines  a
       catch-all last-resort fallback character set that is implicitly appended to the list of character sets in
       sendcharsets.

       When  replying  to a message and the variable reply-in-same-charset is set, then the character set of the
       message being replied to is tried first (still being a subject of charsetalias).  And it is also possible
       to make S-nail work even more closely related to the current locale setting automatically  by  using  the
       variable sendcharsets-else-ttycharset, please see there for more information.

       All  the  specified  character  sets  are  tried in order unless the conversion of the part or attachment
       succeeds.  If none of the tried (8-bit) character sets is capable to represent the content of the part or
       attachment, then the message will not be send and its text will optionally be saved in DEAD.  If that  is
       not  acceptable,  the variable mime-force-sendout can be set in order to force sending of non-convertible
       text as ‘application/octet-stream’ classified binary content instead; like this receivers still have  the
       option to inspect message content (for example by setting mime-counter-evidence).

       In  general,  if  a  message  saying “cannot convert from a to b” appears, either some characters are not
       appropriate for the currently selected  (terminal)  character  set,  or  the  needed  conversion  is  not
       supported by the system.  In the first case, it is necessary to set an appropriate LC_CTYPE locale and/or
       the  variable  ttycharset.  The best results are usually achieved when S-nail is run in a UTF-8 locale on
       an UTF-8 capable terminal, in which case the full Unicode spectrum of characters is available.   In  this
       setup  characters  from various countries can be displayed, while it is still possible to use more simple
       character sets for sending to retain maximum compatibility with older mail clients.

       On the other hand the POSIX standard defines a locale-independent 7-bit  “portable  character  set”  that
       should  be  used  when  overall  portability is an issue, the even more restricted subset named “portable
       filename character set” consists of A-Z, a-z, 0-9, period ‘.’, underscore ‘_’ and hyphen-minus ‘-’.

   Message states
       S-nail differentiates in between several message states; the current  state  will  be  reflected  in  the
       summary of headers if the attrlist of the configured headline allows, and “Specifying messages” dependent
       on  their  state  is  possible.   When  operating  on  the  system inbox, or in any other “primary system
       mailbox”, special actions, like the automatic moving of messages to the “secondary mailbox” MBOX, may  be
       applied  when  the  mailbox  is left (also implicitly by program termination, unless the command exit was
       used) – however, because this may be irritating to users which  are  used  to  “more  modern”  mail-user-
       agents,  the provided global s-nail.rc template sets the internal hold and keepsave variables in order to
       suppress this behaviour.

       ‘new’     Message has neither been viewed nor moved to any other state.  Such messages are retained  even
                 in the “primary system mailbox”.

       ‘unread’  Message  has  neither  been  viewed  nor  moved to any other state, but the message was present
                 already when the mailbox has been opened last: Such messages are retained even in the  “primary
                 system mailbox”.

       ‘read’    The  message  has  been processed by one of the following commands: ~f, ~m, ~F, ~M, copy, mbox,
                 next, pipe, Print, print, top, Type, type, undelete.  The commands dp and dt will always try to
                 automatically “step” and type the “next” logical message, and may thus mark  multiple  messages
                 as read, the delete command will do so if the internal variable autoprint is set.

                 Except  when  the exit command is used, messages that are in a “primary system mailbox” and are
                 in ‘read’ state when the mailbox is left will be saved in the “secondary mailbox”  MBOX  unless
                 the internal variable hold it set.

       ‘deleted’ The message has been processed by one of the following commands: delete, dp, dt.  Only undelete
                 can be used to access such messages.

       ‘preserved’  The  message has been processed by a preserve command and it will be retained in its current
                 location.

       ‘saved’   The message has been processed by one of the following commands: save or  write.   Unless  when
                 the  exit  command  is used, messages that are in a “primary system mailbox” and are in ‘saved’
                 state when the mailbox is left will be deleted; they will be saved in the  “secondary  mailbox”
                 MBOX when the internal variable keepsave is set.

       In  addition  to these message states, flags which otherwise have no technical meaning in the mail system
       except allowing special ways of addressing them when “Specifying messages” can be set on messages.  These
       flags are saved with messages and are thus persistent, and are portable between  a  set  of  widely  used
       MUAs.

       answered  Mark messages as having been answered.

       draft     Mark messages as being a draft.

       flag      Mark messages which need special attention.

   Specifying messages
       [Only  new quoting rules] Commands which take “Message list arguments”, such as from aka search, type and
       delete, can be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply to a number  of  messages  at  once.
       Thus  ‘delete  1  2’ deletes messages 1 and 2, whereas ‘delete 1-5’ will delete the messages 1 through 5.
       In sorted or threaded mode (see the sort command), ‘delete 1-5’ will delete the messages that are located
       between (and including) messages 1 through 5 in the  sorted/threaded  order,  as  shown  in  the  headers
       summary.  The following special message names exist:

       .         The current message, the so-called “dot”.

       ;         The message that was previously the current message; needs to be quoted.

       ,         The parent message of the current message, that is the message with the Message-ID given in the
                 ‘In-Reply-To:’ field or the last entry of the ‘References:’ field of the current message.

       -         The  previous  undeleted  message, or the previous deleted message for the undelete command; In
                 sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the previous such message in the according order.

       +         The next undeleted message, or the next deleted message for the undelete command; In sorted  or
                 ‘thread’ed mode, the next such message in the according order.

       ^         The  first  undeleted message, or the first deleted message for the undelete command; In sorted
                 or ‘thread’ed mode, the first such message in the according order.

       $         The last message; In sorted or ‘thread’ed mode, the last such message in the  according  order.
                 Needs to be quoted.

       &x        In  ‘thread’ed  sort  mode,  selects the message addressed with x, where x is any other message
                 specification, and all messages from the thread that begins at it.  Otherwise it  is  identical
                 to x.  If x is omitted, the thread beginning with the current message is selected.

       *         All messages.

       `         All  messages that were included in the “Message list arguments” of the previous command; needs
                 to be quoted.

       x-y       An inclusive range of message numbers.  Selectors that may also be used  as  endpoints  include
                 any of .;-+^$.

       address   A  case-insensitive “any substring matches” search against the ‘From:’ header, which will match
                 addresses (too) even if showname is set (and POSIX says “any  address  as  shown  in  a  header
                 summary  shall  be  matchable  in this form”); However, if the allnet variable is set, only the
                 local part of the address is evaluated for the comparison, not ignoring case, and  the  setting
                 of  showname  is completely ignored.  For finer control and match boundaries use the ‘@’ search
                 expression.

       /string   All messages that contain string in the subject field (case ignored according to locale).   See
                 also   the  searchheaders  variable.   If  string  is  empty,  the  string  from  the  previous
                 specification of that type is used again.

       [@name-list]@expr
                 All messages that contain the given case-insensitive  search  expression;   If  the  [Option]al
                 regular expression support is available expr will be interpreted as (an extended) one if any of
                 the  “magic regular expression characters” is seen.  If the optional @name-list part is missing
                 the search is restricted to the subject field body, but otherwise name-list specifies a  comma-
                 separated list of header fields to search, e.g.,

                       '@to,from,cc@Someone i ought to know'

                 In  order to search for a string that includes a ‘@’ (commercial at) character the name-list is
                 effectively non-optional, but may be given as the empty  string.   Also,  specifying  an  empty
                 search expression will effectively test for existence of the given header fields.  Some special
                 header  fields  may  be  abbreviated: ‘f’, ‘t’, ‘c’, ‘b’ and ‘s’ will match ‘From’, ‘To’, ‘Cc’,
                 ‘Bcc’ and ‘Subject’, respectively and case-insensitively.  [Option]ally, and  just  like  expr,
                 name-list  will be interpreted as (an extended) regular expression if any of the “magic regular
                 expression characters” is seen.

                 The special names ‘header’ or ‘<’ can be used to search  in  (all  of)  the  header(s)  of  the
                 message,  and the special names ‘body’ or ‘>’ and ‘text’ or ‘=’ will perform full text searches
                 – whereas the former searches only the body, the latter also searches the message header  ([v15
                 behaviour  may  differ]  this  mode yet brute force searches over the entire decoded content of
                 messages, including administrativa strings).

                 This specification performs full text comparison, but even with regular expression  support  it
                 is  almost  impossible to write a search expression that safely matches only a specific address
                 domain.  To request that the body content of the header is treated as a list of addresses,  and
                 to  strip  those  down  to the plain email address which the search expression is to be matched
                 against, prefix the effective name-list with a tilde ‘~’:

                       '@~f,c@@a\.safe\.domain\.match$'

       :c        All messages of state or with matching condition ‘c’, where ‘c’  is  one  or  multiple  of  the
                 following colon modifiers:

                 a         answered messages (cf. the variable markanswered).
                 d         ‘deleted’ messages (for the undelete and from commands only).
                 f         flagged messages.
                 L         Messages with receivers that match mlsubscribed addresses.
                 l         Messages with receivers that match mlisted addresses.
                 n         ‘new’ messages.
                 o         Old messages (any not in state ‘read’ or ‘new’).
                 r         ‘read’ messages.
                 S         [Option] Messages with unsure spam classification (see “Handling spam”).
                 s         [Option] Messages classified as spam.
                 t         Messages marked as draft.
                 u         ‘unread’ messages.

       [Option]  IMAP-style  SEARCH expressions may also be used.  These consist of keywords and criterions, and
       because “Message list arguments” are split into tokens according to “Shell-style argument quoting” it  is
       necessary  to  quote the entire IMAP search expression in order to ensure that it remains a single token.
       This addressing mode is available with all types of mailbox  folders;  S-nail  will  perform  the  search
       locally  as  necessary.   Strings must be enclosed by double quotes ‘"’ in their entirety if they contain
       whitespace or parentheses; within the quotes, only  reverse  solidus  ‘\’  is  recognized  as  an  escape
       character.  All string searches are case-insensitive.  When the description indicates that the “envelope”
       representation  of  an address field is used, this means that the search string is checked against both a
       list constructed as

             '("name" "source" "local-part" "domain-part")'

       for each address, and the addresses without real names from the respective header  field.   These  search
       expressions can be nested using parentheses, see below for examples.

       (criterion)
                 All messages that satisfy the given criterion.
       (criterion1 criterion2 ... criterionN)
                 All messages that satisfy all of the given criteria.
       (or criterion1 criterion2)
                 All  messages  that satisfy either criterion1 or criterion2, or both.  To connect more than two
                 criteria using ‘or’ specifications have to be nested using additional parentheses, as with ‘(or
                 a (or b c))’, since ‘(or a b c)’ really means ‘((a or b) and c)’.  For a simple ‘or’  operation
                 of  independent criteria on the lowest nesting level, it is possible to achieve similar effects
                 by using three separate criteria, as with ‘(a) (b) (c)’.
       (not criterion)
                 All messages that do not satisfy criterion.
       (bcc "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘Bcc:’ field.
       (cc "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘Cc:’ field.
       (from "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘From:’ field.
       (subject "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the ‘Subject:’ field.
       (to "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the envelope representation of the ‘To:’ field.
       (header name "string")
                 All messages that contain string in the specified ‘Name:’ field.
       (body "string")
                 All messages that contain string in their body.
       (text "string")
                 All messages that contain string in their header or body.
       (larger size)
                 All messages that are larger than size (in bytes).
       (smaller size)
                 All messages that are smaller than size (in bytes).
       (before date)
                 All messages that were received before date, which must be in the form  ‘d[d]-mon-yyyy’,  where
                 ‘d’  denotes the day of the month as one or two digits, ‘mon’ is the name of the month – one of
                 ‘Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec’, and ‘yyyy’ is the year as four digits, e.g.,
                 ‘28-Dec-2012’.
       (on date)
                 All messages that were received on the specified date.
       (since date)
                 All messages that were received since the specified date.
       (sentbefore date)
                 All messages that were sent on the specified date.
       (senton date)
                 All messages that were sent on the specified date.
       (sentsince date)
                 All messages that were sent since the specified date.
       ()        The same criterion as for the previous search.  This specification cannot be used  as  part  of
                 another  criterion.  If the previous command line contained more than one independent criterion
                 then the last of those criteria is used.

   On terminal control and line editor
       [Option] Terminal control will be realized through one of the standard Unix libraries, either the Termcap
       Access Library (libtermcap, -ltermcap), or, alternatively, the Terminal Information Library (libterminfo,
       -lterminfo), both of which will be initialized to work with  the  environment  variable  TERM.   Terminal
       control  will enhance or enable interactive usage aspects, e.g., “Coloured display”, and extend behaviour
       of the Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE), which may learn the byte-sequences of keys like the cursor- and function-
       keys.

       The internal variable termcap can be used to overwrite  settings  or  to  learn  (correct(ed))  keycodes.
       Actual library interaction can be disabled completely by setting termcap-disable; termcap will be queried
       regardless,  which  is  true even if the [Option]al library support has not been enabled at configuration
       time as long as some other [Option] which (may)  query  terminal  control  sequences  has  been  enabled.
       S-nail  can  be  told  to  enter  an  alternative  exclusive  screen,  the  so-called ca-mode, by setting
       termcap-ca-mode; this requires sufficient terminal support, and the used  PAGER  may  also  need  special
       configuration, dependent on the value of crt.

       [Option]  The  built-in Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE) should work in all environments which comply to the ISO C
       standard ISO/IEC 9899/AMD1:1995 (“ISO C90, Amendment 1”), and will support wide glyphs if  possible  (the
       necessary functionality had been removed from ISO C, but was included in X/Open Portability Guide Issue 4
       (“XPG4”)).   Usage  of a line editor in interactive mode can be prevented by setting line-editor-disable.
       Especially if the [Option]al terminal control support is missing setting entries in the internal variable
       termcap will help shall the MLE misbehave, see there for more.  The MLE  can  support  a  little  bit  of
       colour.

       [Option]  If  the  history  feature  is  available then input from line editor prompts will be saved in a
       history list that can be searched in and be expanded from.  Such saving can  be  prevented  by  prefixing
       input  with any amount of whitespace.  Aspects of history, like allowed content and maximum size, as well
       as whether  history  shall  be  saved  persistently,  can  be  configured  with  the  internal  variables
       history-file,  history-gabby,  history-gabby-persist  and history-size.  There also exists the macro hook
       on-history-addition which can be used to apply fine control on what enters history.

       The MLE supports a set of editing and control commands.  By default (as) many (as possible) of these will
       be assigned to a set of single-letter control codes, which should  work  on  any  terminal  (and  can  be
       generated  by  holding  the  “control”  key while pressing the key of desire, e.g., ‘control-D’).  If the
       [Option]al bind command is available then the MLE commands can also be accessed freely by  assigning  the
       command  name,  which is shown in parenthesis in the list below, to any desired key-sequence, and the MLE
       will instead and also use bind to establish its built-in key bindings (more of  them  if  the  [Option]al
       terminal  control  is  available),  an  action  which  can  then  be  suppressed  completely  by  setting
       line-editor-no-defaults.  “Shell-style argument quoting” notation is used in the following;  combinations
       not mentioned either cause job control signals or do not generate a (unique) keycode:

       ‘\cA’     Go to the start of the line (mle-go-home).
       ‘\cB’     Move the cursor backward one character (mle-go-bwd).
       ‘\cC’     raise(3) ‘SIGINT’ (mle-raise-int).
       ‘\cD’     Forward  delete  the  character under the cursor; quits S-nail if used on the empty line unless
                 the internal variable ignoreeof is set (mle-del-fwd).
       ‘\cE’     Go to the end of the line (mle-go-end).
       ‘\cF’     Move the cursor forward one character (mle-go-fwd).
       ‘\cG’     Cancel current operation, full reset.  If there  is  an  active  history  search  or  tabulator
                 expansion then this command will first reset that, reverting to the former line content; thus a
                 second reset is needed for a full reset in this case (mle-reset).
       ‘\cH’     Backspace: backward delete one character (mle-del-bwd).
       ‘\cI’     [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Horizontal  tabulator:  try  to expand the word before the cursor,
                 supporting  the  usual  “Filename  transformations”  (mle-complete;   this   is   affected   by
                 mle-quote-rndtrip and line-editor-cpl-word-breaks).
       ‘\cJ’     Newline: commit the current line (mle-commit).
       ‘\cK’     Cut all characters from the cursor to the end of the line (mle-snarf-end).
       ‘\cL’     Repaint the line (mle-repaint).
       ‘\cN’     [Option] Go to the next history entry (mle-hist-fwd).
       ‘\cO’     ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command dt.
       ‘\cP’     [Option] Go to the previous history entry (mle-hist-bwd).
       ‘\cQ’     Toggle  roundtrip  mode  shell  quotes,  where  produced, on and off (mle-quote-rndtrip).  This
                 setting is temporary, and will be forgotten once  the  command  line  is  committed;  also  see
                 shcodec.
       ‘\cR’     [Option]   Complete   the   current   line   from   (the   remaining)   older  history  entries
                 (mle-hist-srch-bwd).
       ‘\cS’     [Option]  Complete  the   current   line   from   (the   remaining)   newer   history   entries
                 (mle-hist-srch-fwd).
       ‘\cT’     Paste the snarf buffer (mle-paste).
       ‘\cU’     The same as ‘\cA’ followed by ‘\cK’ (mle-snarf-line).
       ‘\cV’     Prompts  for  a Unicode character (hexadecimal number without prefix, see vexpr) to be inserted
                 (mle-prompt-char).  Note this command needs to be assigned to a single-letter control  code  in
                 order  to  become  recognized  and  executed during input of a key-sequence (only three single-
                 letter control codes can be used for that shortcut purpose); this control code is then special-
                 treated and  thus  cannot  be  part  of  any  other  sequence  (because  it  will  trigger  the
                 mle-prompt-char function immediately).
       ‘\cW’     Cut  the  characters  from  the  one  preceding  the  cursor  to  the  preceding  word boundary
                 (mle-snarf-word-bwd).
       ‘\cX’     Move the cursor forward one word boundary (mle-go-word-fwd).
       ‘\cY’     Move the cursor backward one word boundary (mle-go-word-bwd).
       ‘\cZ’     raise(3) ‘SIGTSTP’ (mle-raise-tstp).
       ‘\c[’     Escape: reset a possibly used multibyte  character  input  state  machine  and  [Option]ally  a
                 lingering, incomplete key binding (mle-cancel).  This command needs to be assigned to a single-
                 letter  control  code in order to become recognized and executed during input of a key-sequence
                 (only three single-letter control codes can be used for that shortcut purpose).   This  control
                 code  may  also  be  part  of  a  multi-byte sequence, but if a sequence is active and the very
                 control code is currently also an expected input, then the active sequence takes precedence and
                 will consume the control code.
       ‘\c\’     ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z+’.
       ‘\c]’     ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z$’.
       ‘\c^’     ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command ‘z0’.
       ‘\c_’     Cut  the  characters  from  the  one  after  the  cursor  to  the  succeeding   word   boundary
                 (mle-snarf-word-fwd).
       ‘\c?’     Backspace: mle-del-bwd.
       –         mle-bell: ring the audible bell.
       –         [Option] mle-clear-screen: move the cursor home and clear the screen.
       –         mle-fullreset: different to mle-reset this will immediately reset a possibly active search etc.
       –         mle-go-screen-bwd: move the cursor backward one screen width.
       –         mle-go-screen-fwd: move the cursor forward one screen width.
       –         mle-raise-quit: raise(3) ‘SIGQUIT’.

   Coloured display
       [Option]  S-nail can be configured to support a coloured display and font attributes by emitting ANSI aka
       ISO 6429 SGR (select graphic rendition) escape sequences.  Usage of colours and  font  attributes  solely
       depends  upon  the  capability  of the detected terminal type that is defined by the environment variable
       TERM and which can be fine-tuned by the user via the internal variable termcap.

       On top of what S-nail knows about the terminal the boolean  variable  colour-pager  defines  whether  the
       actually  applicable colour and font attribute sequences should also be generated when output is going to
       be paged through the external program defined by the environment variable PAGER (also see crt).  This  is
       not  enabled  by  default  because different pager programs need different command line switches or other
       configuration in order to support those sequences.  S-nail however knows about some  widely  used  pagers
       and  in  a clean environment it is often enough to simply set colour-pager; please refer to that variable
       for more on this topic.

       Colours and font attributes can be managed with the multiplexer command colour, and uncolour can be  used
       to  remove  mappings of a given colour type.  If the variable colour-disable is set then any active usage
       of colour and font attribute sequences  is  suppressed  without  affecting  possibly  established  colour
       mappings.  Since colours are available if any of the standard I/O descriptors it opened on a terminal, it
       might  make sense to conditionalize the colour setup by encapsulating it with if (‘terminal’ indeed means
       “interactive”):

             if terminal && [ "$features" =% +colour ]
               colour iso view-msginfo ft=bold,fg=green
               colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=red (from|subject) # regex
               colour iso view-header fg=red

               uncolour iso view-header from,subject
               colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=magenta,bg=cyan
               colour 256 view-header ft=bold,fg=208,bg=230 "subject,from"
               colour mono view-header ft=bold
               colour mono view-header ft=bold,ft=reverse subject,from
             endif

   Handling spam
       [Option] S-nail can make use of several spam interfaces for the purpose of  identification  of,  and,  in
       general,  dealing  with  spam messages.  A precondition of most commands in order to function is that the
       spam-interface variable is set to one of the supported interfaces.  “Specifying messages” that have  been
       identified  as  spam  is  possible  via  their  (volatile)  ‘is-spam’  state  by  using the ‘:s’ and ‘:S’
       specifications, and their attrlist entries will be used when displaying the headline in  the  summary  of
       headers.

          spamrate  rates  the given messages and sets their ‘is-spam’ flag accordingly.  If the spam interface
           offers spam scores these can be shown in headline by using the format ‘%$’.

          spamham, spamspam and spamforget will interact with the Bayesian filter of the chosen  interface  and
           learn  the  given  messages  as  “ham” or “spam”, respectively; the last command can be used to cause
           “unlearning” of messages; it adheres to their current  ‘is-spam’  state  and  thus  reverts  previous
           teachings.

          spamclear  and  spamset  will  simply  set  and clear, respectively, the mentioned volatile ‘is-spam’
           message flag, without any interface interaction.

       The spamassassin(1) based spam-interface ‘spamc’ requires a running instance of the  spamd(1)  server  in
       order to function, started with the option --allow-tell shall Bayesian filter learning be possible.

             $ spamd -i localhost:2142 -i /tmp/.spamsock -d [-L] [-l]
             $ spamd --listen=localhost:2142 --listen=/tmp/.spamsock \
                 --daemonize [--local] [--allow-tell]

       Thereafter S-nail can make use of these interfaces:

             $ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
                 -Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
                 -Sspamc-arguments="-U /tmp/.spamsock" -Sspamc-user=
             or
             $ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
                 -Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
                 -Sspamc-arguments="-d localhost -p 2142" -Sspamc-user=

       Using  the  generic  filter  approach  allows  usage of programs like bogofilter(1).  Here is an example,
       requiring it to be accessible via PATH:

             $ s-nail -Sspam-interface=filter -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
                 -Sspamfilter-ham="bogofilter -n" \
                 -Sspamfilter-noham="bogofilter -N" \
                 -Sspamfilter-nospam="bogofilter -S" \
                 -Sspamfilter-rate="bogofilter -TTu 2>/dev/null" \
                 -Sspamfilter-spam="bogofilter -s" \
                 -Sspamfilter-rate-scanscore="1;^(.+)$"

       Because messages must exist on local storage  in  order  to  be  scored  (or  used  for  Bayesian  filter
       training),  it  is  possibly  a  good  idea  to  perform  the local spam check last.  Spam can be checked
       automatically when opening specific folders by setting  a  specialized  form  of  the  internal  variable
       folder-hook.

             define spamdelhook {
               # Server side DCC
               spamset (header x-dcc-brand-metrics "bulk")
               # Server-side spamassassin(1)
               spamset (header x-spam-flag "YES")
               del :s # TODO we HAVE to be able to do `spamrate :u ! :sS'
               move :S +maybe-spam
               spamrate :u
               del :s
               move :S +maybe-spam
             }
             set folder-hook-SOMEFOLDER=spamdelhook

       See   also   the   documentation   for   the   variables   spam-interface,  spam-maxsize,  spamc-command,
       spamc-arguments, spamc-user, spamfilter-ham,  spamfilter-noham,  spamfilter-nospam,  spamfilter-rate  and
       spamfilter-rate-scanscore.

COMMANDS

       S-nail  reads input in lines.  An unquoted reverse solidus ‘\’ at the end of a command line “escapes” the
       newline character: it is discarded and the next line of input is used  as  a  follow-up  line,  with  all
       leading whitespace removed; once an entire line is completed, the whitespace characters space, tabulator,
       newline as well as those defined by the variable ifs are removed from the beginning and end.  Placing any
       whitespace  characters at the beginning of a line will prevent a possible addition of the command line to
       the [Option]al history.

       The beginning of such input lines is then scanned for the name of a known command: command names  may  be
       abbreviated,  in  which  case  the  first  command  that matches the given prefix will be used.  “Command
       modifiers” may prefix a command in order to modify its behaviour.  A name may  also  be  a  commandalias,
       which  will become expanded until no more expansion is possible.  Once the command that shall be executed
       is known, the remains of the  input  line  will  be  interpreted  according  to  command-specific  rules,
       documented in the following.

       This  behaviour  is different to the sh(1)ell, which is a programming language with syntactic elements of
       clearly defined semantics, and therefore capable to sequentially expand and evaluate individual  elements
       of a line.  S-nail will never be able to handle ‘? set one=value two=$one’ in a single statement, because
       the variable assignment is performed by the command (set), not the language.

       The  command list can be used to show the list of all commands, either alphabetically sorted or in prefix
       search order (these do not match, also because the POSIX standard prescribes  a  set  of  abbreviations).
       [Option]ally  the  command  help (or ?), when given an argument, will show a documentation string for the
       command matching the expanded argument, as in ‘?t’, which should be a shorthand of  ‘?type’;  with  these
       documentation  strings both commands support a more verbose listing mode which includes the argument type
       of the command and other information which applies; a handy suggestion might thus be:

             ? define __xv {
               # Before v15: need to enable sh(1)ell-style on _entire_ line!
               localopts yes;wysh set verbose;ignerr eval "${@}";return ${?}
             }
             ? commandalias xv '\call __xv'
             ? xv help set

   Command modifiers
       Commands may be prefixed by one or multiple command modifiers.  Some command modifiers can be used with a
       restricted set of commands only, the verbose version of list will  ([Option]ally)  show  which  modifiers
       apply.

          The  modifier  reverse solidus \, to be placed first, prevents commandalias expansions on the remains
           of the line, e.g., ‘\echo’ will always evaluate the command echo, even if an  (command)alias  of  the
           same  name  exists.   commandalias content may itself contain further command modifiers, including an
           initial reverse solidus to prevent further expansions.

          The modifier ignerr indicates that any error generated by the following command should be ignored  by
           the  state  machine  and  not  cause a program exit with enabled errexit or for the standardized exit
           cases in posix mode.  ?, one of the “INTERNAL VARIABLES”, will be set to the real exit status of  the
           command regardless.

          local  will alter the called command to apply changes only temporarily, local to block-scope, and can
           thus only be used inside of a defined macro or an account  definition.   Specifying  it  implies  the
           modifier  wysh.   Block-scope  settings will not be inherited by macros deeper in the call chain, and
           will be garbage collected once the current block is left.  To record and unroll changes in the global
           scope use the command localopts.

          scope does yet not implement any functionality.

          u does yet not implement any functionality.

          Some commands support the vput modifier: if used, they expect the  name  of  a  variable,  which  can
           itself be a variable, i.e., shell expansion is applied, as their first argument, and will place their
           computation result in it instead of the default location (it is usually written to standard output).

           The  given  name will be tested for being a valid sh(1) variable name, and may therefore only consist
           of upper- and lowercase characters, digits, and the underscore; the hyphen-minus may  be  used  as  a
           non-portable  extension;  digits  may  not  be  used  as  first, hyphen-minus may not be used as last
           characters.  In addition the name may either not be one of the known “INTERNAL  VARIABLES”,  or  must
           otherwise  refer  to  a  writable  (non-boolean)  value  variable.  The actual put operation may fail
           nonetheless, e.g., if the variable expects a number argument only a number  will  be  accepted.   Any
           error  during these operations causes the command as such to fail, and the error number ! will be set
           to ^ERR-NOTSUP, the exit status ? should be set to ‘-1’, but some commands deviate from  the  latter,
           which is documented.

          Last,  but  not  least, the modifier wysh can be used for some old and established commands to choose
           the new “Shell-style argument quoting” rules over the traditional “Old-style argument quoting”.  This
           modifier is implied if v15-compat is set to a non-empty value.

   Old-style argument quoting
       [v15 behaviour may differ] This section documents the old, traditional style of quoting  non-message-list
       arguments  to  commands  which  expect this type of arguments: whereas still used by the majority of such
       commands, the new “Shell-style argument quoting” may be available even for those via  wysh,  one  of  the
       “Command  modifiers”.   Nonetheless care must be taken, because only new commands have been designed with
       all the capabilities of the new quoting rules in mind, which can, e.g., generate control characters.

                An argument  can  be  enclosed  between  paired  double-quotes  ‘"argument"’  or  single-quotes
                 ‘'argument'’;  any  whitespace,  shell word expansion, or reverse solidus characters (except as
                 described next) within the quotes are treated literally as part of  the  argument.   A  double-
                 quote  will  be  treated  literally  within single-quotes and vice versa.  Inside such a quoted
                 string the actually used quote character can be used nonetheless by escaping it with a  reverse
                 solidus ‘\’, as in ‘"y\"ou"’.

                An  argument  that  is  not  enclosed  in  quotes,  as  above,  can usually still contain space
                 characters if those spaces are reverse solidus escaped, as in ‘you\ are’.

                A reverse solidus outside of the enclosing quotes is discarded and the following  character  is
                 treated literally as part of the argument.

   Shell-style argument quoting
       sh(1)ell-style,  and  therefore  POSIX  standardized, argument parsing and quoting rules are used by most
       commands.  [v15 behaviour may differ] Most new commands only support these  new  rules  and  are  flagged
       [Only new quoting rules], some elder ones can use them with the command modifier wysh; in the future only
       this type of argument quoting will remain.

       A  command  line  is  parsed  from  left  to  right and an input token is completed whenever an unquoted,
       otherwise ignored, metacharacter is seen.  Metacharacters are vertical bar |, ampersand &,  semicolon  ;,
       as  well  as  all  characters  from the variable ifs, and / or space, tabulator, newline.  The additional
       metacharacters left and right parenthesis (, ) and less-than and greater-than signs <, > that  the  sh(1)
       supports  are not used, and are treated as ordinary characters: for one these characters are a vivid part
       of email addresses, and it seems highly unlikely that their function will become meaningful to S-nail.

             Compatibility note: [v15 behaviour may differ] Please note that even many new-style commands do not
             yet honour ifs to parse their arguments: whereas the sh(1)ell is a language with syntactic elements
             of clearly defined semantics, S-nail parses entire input lines and decides on  a  per-command  base
             what to do with the rest of the line.  This also means that whenever an unknown command is seen all
             that S-nail can do is cancellation of the processing of the remains of the line.

             It  also  often  depends  on an actual subcommand of a multiplexer command how the rest of the line
             should be treated, and until v15 we are not capable to perform this deep inspection  of  arguments.
             Nonetheless,  at  least  the following commands which work with positional parameters fully support
             ifs for an almost shell-compatible field splitting: call, call_if, read, vpospar, xcall.

       Any unquoted number sign ‘#’ at the beginning of a new token starts a comment that extends to the end  of
       the  line,  and  therefore  ends  argument  processing.   An unquoted dollar sign ‘$’ will cause variable
       expansion of the given name, which must be a valid sh(1)ell-style variable  name  (see  vput):  “INTERNAL
       VARIABLES”  as  well  as  “ENVIRONMENT”  (shell)  variables can be accessed through this mechanism, brace
       enclosing the name is supported (i.e., to subdivide a token).

       Whereas the metacharacters space, tabulator, newline only  complete  an  input  token,  vertical  bar  |,
       ampersand  &  and  semicolon  ;  also  act  as  control operators and perform control functions.  For now
       supported is semicolon ;, which terminates a single command, therefore sequencing the  command  line  and
       making  the  remainder of the line a subject to reevaluation.  With sequencing, multiple command argument
       types and quoting rules may therefore apply to a single line, which can become  problematic  before  v15:
       e.g., the first of the following will cause surprising results.

             ? echo one; set verbose; echo verbose=$verbose.
             ? echo one; wysh set verbose; echo verbose=$verbose.

       Quoting  is  a  mechanism  that will remove the special meaning of metacharacters and reserved words, and
       will prevent expansion.  There are four quoting mechanisms: the escape character, single-quotes,  double-
       quotes and dollar-single-quotes:

                The  literal  value of any character can be preserved by preceding it with the escape character
                 reverse solidus ‘\’.

                Arguments which are enclosed in ‘'single-quotes'’ retain their literal value.   A  single-quote
                 cannot occur within single-quotes.

                The  literal  value  of  all  characters  enclosed  in  ‘"double-quotes"’ is retained, with the
                 exception of dollar sign ‘$’, which will cause variable expansion, as above,  backquote  (grave
                 accent) ‘`’, (which not yet means anything special), reverse solidus ‘\’, which will escape any
                 of  the  characters  dollar  sign ‘$’ (to prevent variable expansion), backquote (grave accent)
                 ‘`’, double-quote ‘"’ (to prevent ending  the  quote)  and  reverse  solidus  ‘\’  (to  prevent
                 escaping,  i.e.,  to  embed  a  reverse  solidus  character  as-is), but has no special meaning
                 otherwise.

                Arguments enclosed in ‘$'dollar-single-quotes'’ extend normal single  quotes  in  that  reverse
                 solidus escape sequences are expanded as follows:

                 ‘\a’    bell control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BEL).
                 ‘\b’    backspace control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BS).
                 ‘\E’    escape control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 ESC).
                 ‘\e’    the same.
                 ‘\f’    form feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 FF).
                 ‘\n’    line feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 LF).
                 ‘\r’    carriage return control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 CR).
                 ‘\t’    horizontal tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 HT).
                 ‘\v’    vertical tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 VT).
                 ‘\\’    emits a reverse solidus character.
                 ‘\'’    single quote.
                 ‘\"’    double quote (escaping is optional).
                 ‘\NNN’  eight-bit  byte  with  the  octal  value  ‘NNN’ (one to three octal digits), optionally
                         prefixed by an additional ‘0’.  A 0 byte will suppress further output  for  the  quoted
                         argument.
                 ‘\xHH’  eight-bit  byte  with the hexadecimal value ‘HH’ (one or two hexadecimal characters, no
                         prefix, see vexpr).  A 0 byte will suppress further output for the quoted argument.
                 ‘\UHHHHHHHH’
                         the Unicode / ISO-10646 character with the hexadecimal codepoint value ‘HHHHHHHH’  (one
                         to eight hexadecimal characters) — note that Unicode defines the maximum codepoint ever
                         to  be supported as ‘0x10FFFF’ (in planes of ‘0xFFFF’ characters each).  This escape is
                         only supported in locales that support Unicode (see “Character sets”), in  other  cases
                         the  sequence will remain unexpanded unless the given code point is ASCII compatible or
                         (if the [Option]al character set conversion is available) can  be  represented  in  the
                         current  locale.   The  character  NUL  will  suppress  further  output  for the quoted
                         argument.
                 ‘\uHHHH’
                         Identical to ‘\UHHHHHHHH’ except it takes only one to four hexadecimal characters.
                 ‘\cX’   Emits the non-printable (ASCII and compatible) C0 control codes 0 (NUL) to 31 (US), and
                         127 (DEL).  Printable representations of ASCII control codes can be created by  mapping
                         them  to  a  different,  visible part of the ASCII character set.  Adding the number 64
                         achieves this for the codes 0 to 31, e.g., 7 (BEL): ‘7 +  64  =  71  =  G’.   The  real
                         operation  is  a bitwise logical XOR with 64 (bit 7 set, see vexpr), thus also covering
                         code 127 (DEL), which is mapped to 63 (question mark): ‘? vexpr ^ 127 64’.

                         Whereas historically circumflex notation has often been used for visualization purposes
                         of control codes, e.g., ‘^G’, the  reverse  solidus  notation  has  been  standardized:
                         ‘\cG’.   Some control codes also have standardized (ISO-10646, ISO C) aliases, as shown
                         above (e.g., ‘\a’, ‘\n’, ‘\t’): whenever such an alias  exists  it  will  be  used  for
                         display purposes.  The control code NUL (‘\c@’, a non-standard extension) will suppress
                         further  output  for  the  remains  of  the  token (which may extend beyond the current
                         quote), or, depending on the context, the remains of  all  arguments  for  the  current
                         command.
                 ‘\$NAME’
                         Non-standard  extension: expand the given variable name, as above.  Brace enclosing the
                         name is supported.
                 ‘\`{command}’
                         Not yet supported, just to raise awareness: Non-standard extension.

       Caveats:

             ? echo 'Quotes '${HOME}' and 'tokens" differ!"# no comment
             ? echo Quotes ${HOME} and tokens differ! # comment
             ? echo Don"'"t you worry$'\x21' The sun shines on us. $'\u263A'

   Message list arguments
       Many commands operate on message list  specifications,  as  documented  in  “Specifying  messages”.   The
       argument  input  is first split into individual tokens via “Shell-style argument quoting”, which are then
       interpreted as the mentioned specifications.  If no  explicit  message  list  has  been  specified,  many
       commands  will search for and use the next message forward that satisfies the commands' requirements, and
       if there are no messages forward of the current message, the search proceeds backwards; if there  are  no
       good  messages  at  all  to  be found, an error message is shown and the command is aborted.  The verbose
       output of the command list will indicate whether a command searches for a default message, or not.

   Raw data arguments for codec commands
       A special set of commands, which all have the string “codec” in their  name,  e.g.,  addrcodec,  shcodec,
       urlcodec, take raw string data as input, which means that the content of the command input line is passed
       completely  unexpanded  and  otherwise  unchanged:  like  this  the effect of the actual codec is visible
       without any noise of possible shell quoting rules etc., i.e., the user can input one-to-one  the  desired
       or  questionable  data.   To  gain  a level of expansion, the entire command line can be evaluated first,
       e.g.,

             ? vput shcodec res encode /usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt
             ? echo $res
             $'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
             ? shcodec d $res
             $'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
             ? eval shcodec d $res
             /usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt

   Filename transformations
       Filenames, where expected, and unless documented otherwise, are subsequently  subject  to  the  following
       filename transformations, in sequence:

                If the given name is a registered shortcut, it will be replaced with the expanded shortcut.

                The filename is matched against the following patterns or strings:

                 #      (Number sign) is expanded to the previous file.
                 %      (Percent  sign)  is replaced by the invoking user's primary system mailbox, which either
                        is the (itself expandable) inbox if that is  set,  the  standardized  absolute  pathname
                        indicated by MAIL if that is set, or a built-in compile-time default otherwise.
                 %user  Expands  to the primary system mailbox of user (and never the value of inbox, regardless
                        of its actual setting).
                 &      (Ampersand) is replaced with the invoking user's secondary mailbox, the MBOX.
                 +file  Refers to a file in the folder directory (if that variable is set).
                 %:filespec Expands to the same value as filespec, but has special meaning when used with, e.g.,
                        the command file: the file will be treated as a primary system  mailbox  by,  e.g.,  the
                        mbox and save commands, meaning that messages that have been read in the current session
                        will be moved to the MBOX mailbox instead of simply being flagged as read.

                Meta  expansions  may  be  applied  to  the resulting filename, as allowed by the operation and
                 applicable to the resulting access protocol (also see “On URL syntax and  credential  lookup”).
                 For the file-protocol, a leading tilde ‘~’ character will be replaced by the expansion of HOME,
                 except  when  followed by a valid user name, in which case the home directory of the given user
                 is used instead.

                 A shell expansion as if specified in double-quotes (see “Shell-style argument quoting”) may  be
                 applied,  so  that  any  occurrence  of  ‘$VARIABLE’ (or ‘${VARIABLE}’) will be replaced by the
                 expansion of the variable, if possible; “INTERNAL VARIABLES” as well as  “ENVIRONMENT”  (shell)
                 variables can be accessed through this mechanism.

                 Shell  pathname  wildcard  pattern  expansions  (glob(7)) may be applied as documented.  If the
                 fully expanded filename results in multiple pathnames and the command  is  expecting  only  one
                 file, an error results.

                 In interactive context, in order to allow simple value acceptance (via “ENTER”), arguments will
                 usually  be  displayed  in  a  properly  quoted  form, e.g., a file ‘diet\ is \curd.txt’ may be
                 displayed as ‘'diet\ is \curd.txt'’.

   Commands
       The following commands are available:

       !         Executes the SHELL command which  follows,  replacing  unescaped  exclamation  marks  with  the
                 previously  executed  command if the internal variable bang is set.  This command supports vput
                 as documented in “Command modifiers”, and manages the error number !.  A  0  or  positive  exit
                 status  ?  reflects the exit status of the command, negative ones that an error happened before
                 the command was executed, or that the program did not exit cleanly, but, e.g., due to a signal:
                 the error number is ^ERR-CHILD, then.

                 In conjunction with the vput modifier the following special cases exist: a negative exit status
                 occurs if the collected data could not be stored in the given variable, which is a  ^ERR-NOTSUP
                 error that should otherwise not occur.  ^ERR-CANCELED indicates that no temporary file could be
                 created  to  collect  the  command  output at first glance.  In case of catchable out-of-memory
                 situations ^ERR-NOMEM will occur and S-nail will try to store the empty string, just like  with
                 all other detected error conditions.

       #         The  comment-command  causes  the  entire  line  to  be ignored.  Note: this really is a normal
                 command which' purpose is to discard its arguments, not a  “comment-start”  indicating  special
                 character,  which  means  that,  e.g., trailing comments on a line are not possible (except for
                 commands which use “Shell-style argument quoting”).

       +         Goes to the next message in sequence and types it (like “ENTER”).

       -         Display the preceding message, or the n'th previous message if given a numeric argument n.

       =         Shows the message number of the current message (the “dot”) when used without  arguments,  that
                 of  the  given list otherwise.  Output numbers will be separated from each other with the first
                 character of ifs, and followed by the first character of if-ws, if that is not  empty  and  not
                 identical  to  the  first.   If that results in no separation at all a space character is used.
                 This command supports vput (see “Command modifiers”), and manages the error number !.

       ?         [Option] Show a brief summary of commands.  [Option] Given  an  argument  a  synopsis  for  the
                 command  in  question is shown instead; commands can be abbreviated in general and this command
                 can be used to see the full expansion of an abbreviation including  the  synopsis,  try,  e.g.,
                 ‘?h’,  ‘?hel’  and  ‘?help’  and  see  how  the output changes.  This mode also supports a more
                 verbose output, which will provide the information documented for list.

       |         A synonym for the pipe command.

       account, unaccount
                 (ac, una) Creates, selects or lists (an) account(s).   Accounts  are  special  incarnations  of
                 defined  macros  and  group  commands  and variable settings which together usually arrange the
                 environment for the purpose of creating an email account.  Different to normal macros  settings
                 which  are  covered  by  localopts – here by default enabled! – will not be reverted before the
                 account is changed again.  The special account ‘null’ (case-insensitive) always exists, and all
                 but it can be deleted by the latter command, and in one operation with the  special  name  ‘*’.
                 Also  for  all  but  it  a  possibly  set on-account-cleanup hook is called once they are left,
                 including program exit.

                 Without arguments a listing of all defined accounts is shown.   With  one  argument  the  given
                 account  is  activated:  the  system  inbox  of that account will be activated (as via file), a
                 possibly installed folder-hook will be run, and the internal variable account will be  updated.
                 The two argument form is identical to defining a macro as via define:

                       account myisp {
                         set folder=~/mail inbox=+syste.mbox record=+sent.mbox
                         set from='(My Name) myname@myisp.example'
                         set mta=smtp://mylogin@smtp.myisp.example
                       }

       addrcodec
                 Perform  email  address  codec  transformations on raw-data argument, rather according to email
                 standards (RFC 5322; [v15 behaviour may differ] will furtherly improve).   Supports  vput  (see
                 “Command  modifiers”),  and  manages  the  error  number  !.  The first argument must be either
                 [+[+[+]]]e[ncode], d[ecode], s[kin] or skinl[ist] and specifies the operation to perform on the
                 rest of the line.

                 Decoding will show how a standard-compliant MUA will display the given argument,  which  should
                 be  an  email  address.   Please  be  aware  that  most MUAs have difficulties with the address
                 standards, and vary wildly when (comments) in parenthesis, “double-quoted” strings, or  quoted-
                 pairs, as below, become involved.  [v15 behaviour may differ] S-nail currently does not perform
                 decoding when displaying addresses.

                 Skinning  is  identical  to  decoding  but  only outputs the plain address, without any string,
                 comment etc. components.  Another difference is that it may fail with the error number ! set to
                 ^ERR-INVAL if decoding fails to find a(n) (valid) email address, in which case  the  unmodified
                 input will be output again.

                 skinlist  first performs a skin operation, and thereafter checks a valid address for whether it
                 is a registered mailing list (see mlist and mlsubscribe), eventually reporting  that  state  in
                 the  error number ! as ^ERR-EXIST.  (This state could later become overwritten by an I/O error,
                 though.)

                 Encoding supports four different modes, lesser automated versions can be  chosen  by  prefixing
                 one,  two or three plus signs: the standard imposes a special meaning on some characters, which
                 thus have to be transformed to so-called quoted-pairs by pairing them with  a  reverse  solidus
                 ‘\’  in  order  to  remove  the special meaning; this might change interpretation of the entire
                 argument from what has been desired, however!  Specify one plus sign to remark that parenthesis
                 shall be left alone, two for not turning double quotation marks into  quoted-pairs,  and  three
                 for also leaving any user-specified reverse solidus alone.  The result will always be valid, if
                 a  successful exit status is reported ([v15 behaviour may differ] the current parser fails this
                 assertion for some constructs).  [v15 behaviour may differ] Addresses need to be  specified  in
                 between  angle brackets ‘<’, ‘>’ if the construct becomes more difficult, otherwise the current
                 parser will fail; it is not smart enough to guess right.

                       ? addrc enc "Hey, you",<diet@exam.ple>\ out\ there
                       "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
                       ? addrc d "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
                       "Hey, you", \ out\ there <diet@exam.ple>
                       ? addrc s "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
                       diet@exam.ple

       alias, unalias
                 [Only new quoting rules] (a, una) Define or list, and remove,  respectively,  address  aliases.
                 Address  aliases  are  a method of creating personal distribution lists that map a single alias
                 name to none to multiple receivers; aliases are expanded after message composing is  completed.
                 The  latter  command  removes  all given aliases, the special name asterisk ‘*’ will remove all
                 existing aliases.  When used without arguments the former shows a list of all  currently  known
                 aliases,  with  one  argument  only  the target(s) of the given one.  When given two arguments,
                 hyphen-minus ‘-’ being the first, the target(s) of the second is/are expanded recursively.

                 In all other cases the given address alias is newly defined or  will  be  appended  to:  target
                 arguments  must either be valid alias names, or any other address type.  Recursive expansion of
                 (what looks like) alias name(s) targets can be prevented  by  prefixing  the  target  with  the
                 modifier  reverse  solidus \.  A valid alias name conforms to the Postfix MTA aliases(5) rules,
                 and may consist of alphabetic characters, digits,  the  underscore,  the  number  sign,  colon,
                 commercial  at  and  hyphen-minus; extensions: exclamation mark ‘!’, period ‘.’ as well as “any
                 character that has the high bit set” may be used: ‘[[:alnum:]_#:@!.-]+’.  The number  sign  may
                 need be quoted to avoid misinterpretation as the shell comment character.

                 [v15 behaviour may differ] Unfortunately the colon is currently not supported, as it interferes
                 with  normal  address  parsing rules.  [v15 behaviour may differ] Such high bit characters will
                 likely cause warnings at the moment for the same reasons why colon is unsupported; also, in the
                 future locale dependent character set validity checks will be performed.

       alternates, unalternates
                 [Only new quoting rules] (alt) Manage a list of alternate addresses  or  names  of  the  active
                 user,  members  of  which will be removed from recipient lists (except one).  There is a set of
                 implicit alternates which is formed of the values of LOGNAME, from, sender and reply-to.   from
                 will  not  be  used if sender is set.  The latter command removes the given list of alternates,
                 the special name ‘*’ will discard all existing alternate names.

                 The former command manages the error number !.  It shows the current  set  of  alternates  when
                 used  without  arguments;  in  this  mode only it also supports vput (see “Command modifiers”).
                 Otherwise the given arguments (after being checked for validity) are appended to  the  list  of
                 alternate names; in posix mode they replace that list instead.

       answered, unanswered
                 Take  a  message  lists  and mark each message as (not) having been answered.  Messages will be
                 marked answered when being replyd to automatically if the markanswered variable  is  set.   See
                 the section “Message states”.

       bind, unbind
                 [Option][Only new quoting rules] The bind command extends the MLE (see “On terminal control and
                 line editor”) with freely configurable key bindings.  The latter command removes from the given
                 context the given key binding, both of which may be specified as a wildcard ‘*’, so that, e.g.,
                 ‘unbind  *  *’ will remove all bindings of all contexts.  Due to initialization order unbinding
                 will  not  work  for  built-in  key  bindings  upon  program  startup,  however:   please   use
                 line-editor-no-defaults for this purpose instead.

                 With  zero  arguments, or with a context name the former command shows all key bindings (of the
                 given context; an asterisk ‘*’ will iterate over all contexts); a more verbose listing will  be
                 produced  if  either  of  debug  or  verbose  are set.  With two or more arguments a binding is
                 (re)established: the first argument is the context to which the binding shall apply, the second
                 argument is a comma-separated list of the “keys” which form  the  binding,  and  any  remaining
                 arguments form the expansion.  To indicate that a binding shall not be auto-committed, but that
                 the  expansion  shall instead be furtherly editable by the user, a commercial at ‘@’ (that will
                 be removed) can be placed last in the expansion, from which  leading  and  trailing  whitespace
                 will  finally  be  removed.  Reverse solidus cannot be used as the last character of expansion.
                 An empty expansion will be rejected.

                 Contexts define when a binding applies, i.e., a binding will not be seen unless the context for
                 which it is defined for is currently active.  This is not true for the shared  binding  ‘base’,
                 which  is  the  foundation  for  all  other  bindings and as such always applies, its bindings,
                 however, only apply secondarily.  The available contexts are the shared ‘base’,  the  ‘default’
                 context  which is used in all not otherwise documented situations, and ‘compose’, which applies
                 to compose mode only.

                 “Keys” which form the binding are specified as a comma-separated list of byte-sequences,  where
                 each  list entry corresponds to one key(press).  A list entry may, indicated by a leading colon
                 character ‘:’, also refer to the name of a terminal capability; several  dozen  names  will  be
                 compiled  in  and  may  be  specified  either  by  their terminfo(5), or, if existing, by their
                 termcap(5) name, regardless of the actually used [Option]al terminal control  library.   It  is
                 possible  to  use  any  capability, as long as the name is resolvable by the [Option]al control
                 library or was defined via the internal  variable  termcap.   Input  sequences  are  not  case-
                 normalized, so that an exact match is required to update or remove a binding.  Examples:

                       ? bind base $'\E',d mle-snarf-word-fwd # Esc(ape)
                       ? bind base $'\E',$'\c?' mle-snarf-word-bwd # Esc,Delete
                       ? bind default $'\cA',:khome,w 'echo Editable binding@'
                       ? bind default a,b,c rm -irf / @  # Also editable
                       ? bind default :kf1 File %
                       ? bind compose :kf1 ~v

                 Note  that  the  entire  comma-separated  list  is  first  parsed  (over) as a shell-token with
                 whitespace as the field separator, before being parsed and expanded for real with comma as  the
                 field  separator,  therefore  whitespace needs to be properly quoted, see “Shell-style argument
                 quoting”.  Using Unicode reverse solidus escape sequences renders a binding defunctional if the
                 locale does not support Unicode (see “Character sets”), and using terminal capabilities does so
                 if no (corresponding) terminal control support is (currently) available.

                 The following terminal capability names are built-in and can be  used  in  terminfo(5)  or  (if
                 available)  the  two-letter  termcap(5)  notation.   See  the  respective  manual for a list of
                 capabilities.  The program infocmp(1) can be used to show all the capabilities of TERM  or  the
                 given terminal type; using the -x flag will also show supported (non-standard) extensions.

                 kbs or kb       Backspace.
                 kdch1 or kD     Delete character.
                 kDC or *4       — shifted variant.
                 kel or kE       Clear to end of line.
                 kext or @9      Exit.
                 kich1 or kI     Insert character.
                 kIC or #3       — shifted variant.
                 khome or kh     Home.
                 kHOM or #2      — shifted variant.
                 kend or @7      End.
                 knp or kN       Next page.
                 kpp or kP       Previous page.
                 kcub1 or kl     Left cursor (with more modifiers: see below).
                 kLFT or #4      — shifted variant.
                 kcuf1 or kr     Right cursor (ditto).
                 kRIT or %i      — shifted variant.
                 kcud1 or kd     Down cursor (ditto).
                 kDN             — shifted variant (only terminfo).
                 kcuu1 or ku     Up cursor (ditto).
                 kUP             — shifted variant (only terminfo).
                 kf0 or k0       Function key 0.  Add one for each function key up to kf9 and k9, respectively.
                 kf10 or k;      Function key 10.
                 kf11 or F1      Function  key  11.   Add  one  for  each  function  key  up  to  kf19  and  F9,
                                 respectively.

                 Some terminals support key-modifier combination extensions, e.g., ‘Alt+Shift+xy’.  For example,
                 the delete key, kdch1: in its shifted variant, the name is mutated to kDC,  then  a  number  is
                 appended  for  the  states  ‘Alt’ (kDC3), ‘Shift+Alt’ (kDC4), ‘Control’ (kDC5), ‘Shift+Control’
                 (kDC6), ‘Alt+Control’ (kDC7), finally ‘Shift+Alt+Control’ (kDC8).  The same for the left cursor
                 key, kcub1: KLFT, KLFT3, KLFT4, KLFT5, KLFT6, KLFT7, KLFT8.

                 It is advisable to use an initial escape or other control character (e.g., ‘\cA’) for  bindings
                 which  describe user key combinations (as opposed to purely terminal capability based ones), in
                 order to avoid ambiguities whether input belongs to key  sequences  or  not;  it  also  reduces
                 search time.  Adjusting bind-timeout may help shall keys and sequences be falsely recognized.

       call      [Only  new  quoting  rules] Calls the given macro, which must have been created via define (see
                 there for more), otherwise an ^ERR-NOENT error occurs.  Calling macros recursively will at some
                 time excess the stack size limit, causing a hard program abortion;  if  recursively  calling  a
                 macro  is  the last command of the current macro, consider to use the command xcall, which will
                 first release all resources of the current macro before replacing the current  macro  with  the
                 called one.

       call_if   Identical to call if the given macro has been created via define, but does not fail nor warn if
                 the macro does not exist.

       cd        (ch) Change the working directory to HOME or the given argument.  Synonym for chdir.

       certsave  [Option]  Only  applicable  to  S/MIME  signed  messages.  Takes an optional message list and a
                 filename and saves the certificates contained within the message signatures to the  named  file
                 in  both  human-readable  and PEM format.  The certificates can later be used to send encrypted
                 messages to the respective message senders by setting smime-encrypt-USER@HOST variables.

       charsetalias, uncharsetalias
                 [Only new quoting rules] Manage alias mappings for (conversion  of)  “Character  sets”.   Alias
                 processing  is  not  performed  for  “INTERNAL VARIABLES”, e.g., charset-8bit, and mappings are
                 ineffective if character set conversion is not available (features does not announce ‘+iconv’).
                 Expansion happens recursively for cases where aliases point to  other  aliases  (built-in  loop
                 limit: 8).

                 The  latter  command  deletes  all  aliases  given  as arguments, or all at once when given the
                 asterisk ‘*’.  The former shows the list of all  currently  defined  aliases  if  used  without
                 arguments,  or  the target of the given single argument; when given two arguments, hyphen-minus
                 ‘-’ being the first, the second is instead expanded recursively.  In all other cases the  given
                 arguments  are treated as pairs of character sets and their desired target alias name, creating
                 new or updating already existing aliases.

       chdir     (ch) Change the working directory to HOME or the given argument.  Synonym for cd.

       collapse, uncollapse
                 Only applicable to ‘thread’ed sort mode.  Takes a message list and makes all replies  to  these
                 messages  invisible  in header summaries, except for ‘new’ messages and the “dot”.  Also when a
                 message with collapsed replies is displayed, all of these are automatically  uncollapsed.   The
                 latter command undoes collapsing.

       colour, uncolour
                 [Option][Only  new  quoting rules] Manage colour mappings of and for a “Coloured display”.  The
                 type of colour is given as the (case-insensitive) first argument, which must be  one  of  ‘256’
                 for 256-colour terminals, ‘8’, ‘ansi’ or ‘iso’ for the standard 8-colour ANSI / ISO 6429 colour
                 palette  and  ‘1’  or  ‘mono’  for monochrome terminals.  Monochrome terminals cannot deal with
                 colours, but only (some) font attributes.

                 Without further arguments the list of all currently defined mappings for the given colour  type
                 is  shown  (as  a  special  case  giving  ‘all’  or  ‘*’  will show the mappings of all types).
                 Otherwise the second argument defines the mappable slot,  and  the  third  argument  a  (comma-
                 separated list of) colour and font attribute specification(s), and the optional fourth argument
                 can  be  used  to  specify  a  precondition:  if  conditioned mappings exist they are tested in
                 (creation) order unless a (case-insensitive) match has been found, and the default mapping  (if
                 any  has  been  established)  will  only be chosen as a last resort.  The types of precondition
                 available depend on the mappable slot (see “Coloured display” for some examples), the following
                 of which exist:

                 Mappings prefixed with ‘mle-’ are used for the [Option]al built-in Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE,  see
                 “On terminal control and line editor”) and do not support preconditions.

                 mle-position   This  mapping  is  used  for  the position indicator that is visible when a line
                                cannot be fully displayed on the screen.
                 mle-prompt     Used for the prompt.
                 mle-error      Used for the occasionally appearing error indicator that is joined onto  prompt.
                                [v15  behaviour  may  differ]  Also  used for error messages written on standard
                                error .

                 Mappings prefixed with ‘sum-’ are used  in  header  summaries,  and  they  all  understand  the
                 preconditions  ‘dot’  (the  current  message)  and ‘older’ for elder messages (only honoured in
                 conjunction with datefield-markout-older).

                 sum-dotmark    This mapping is used for the “dotmark” that can be created with the ‘%>’ or ‘%<’
                                formats of the variable headline.
                 sum-header     For the complete header  summary  line  except  the  “dotmark”  and  the  thread
                                structure.
                 sum-thread     For  the  thread  structure  which  can  be  created with the ‘%i’ format of the
                                variable headline.

                 Mappings prefixed with ‘view-’ are used when displaying messages.

                 view-from_     This mapping is used for so-called ‘From_’ lines, which  are  MBOX  file  format
                                specific header lines (also see mbox-rfc4155).
                 view-header    For  header  lines.   A  comma-separated  list  of  headers to which the mapping
                                applies may be given as a precondition; if  the  [Option]al  regular  expression
                                support is available then if any of the “magic regular expression characters” is
                                seen the precondition will be evaluated as (an extended) one.
                 view-msginfo   For the introductional message info line.
                 view-partinfo  For MIME part info lines.

                 The  following  (case-insensitive)  colour  definitions  and  font  attributes  are understood,
                 multiple of which can be specified in a comma-separated list:

                 ft=  a font attribute: ‘bold’, ‘reverse’ or ‘underline’.  It is possible (and often applicable)
                      to specify multiple font attributes for a single mapping.

                 fg=  foreground colour attribute: ‘black’, ‘blue’, ‘green’, ‘red’, ‘brown’,  ‘magenta’,  ‘cyan’
                      or  ‘white’.   To  specify  a 256-colour mode a decimal number colour specification in the
                      range 0 to 255, inclusive, is supported, and interpreted as follows:

                      0 - 7      the standard ISO 6429 colours, as above.
                      8 - 15     high intensity variants of the standard colours.
                      16 - 231   216 colours in tuples of 6.
                      232 - 255  grayscale from black to white in 24 steps.

                            #!/bin/sh -
                            fg() { printf "\033[38;5;${1}m($1)"; }
                            bg() { printf "\033[48;5;${1}m($1)"; }
                            i=0
                            while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do fg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
                            printf "\033[0m\n"
                            i=0
                            while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do bg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
                            printf "\033[0m\n"

                 bg=  background colour attribute (see fg= for possible values).

                 The command uncolour will remove for the given colour type (the special type ‘*’  selects  all)
                 the  given  mapping;  if  the  optional  precondition argument is given only the exact tuple of
                 mapping and precondition is removed.  The  special  name  ‘*’  will  remove  all  mappings  (no
                 precondition allowed), thus ‘uncolour * *’ will remove all established mappings.

       commandalias, uncommandalias
                 [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Define  or  list,  and  remove, respectively, command aliases.  An
                 (command)alias can be  used  everywhere  a  normal  command  can  be  used,  but  always  takes
                 precedence:  any  arguments  that  are  given  to  the  command alias are joined onto the alias
                 expansion, and the resulting string forms the command line that is, in effect,  executed.   The
                 latter  command  removes  all  given  aliases,  the  special  name asterisk ‘*’ will remove all
                 existing aliases.  When used without arguments the former shows a list of all  currently  known
                 aliases, with one argument only the expansion of the given one.

                 With  two  or  more  arguments a command alias is defined or updated: the first argument is the
                 name under which the remaining command line should be accessible, the content of which  can  be
                 just about anything.  An alias may itself expand to another alias, but to avoid expansion loops
                 further expansion will be prevented if an alias refers to itself or if an expansion depth limit
                 is  reached.   Explicit  expansion  prevention  is  available via reverse solidus \, one of the
                 “Command modifiers”.

                       ? commandalias xx
                       s-nail: `commandalias': no such alias: xx
                       ? commandalias xx echo hello,
                       ? commandalias xx
                       commandalias xx 'echo hello,'
                       ? xx
                       hello,
                       ? xx world
                       hello, world

       Copy      (C) Copy messages to files whose names are derived from the author of  the  respective  message
                 and do not mark them as being saved; otherwise identical to Save.

       copy      (c) Copy messages to the named file and do not mark them as being saved; otherwise identical to
                 save.

       csop      [Only  new  quoting  rules]  A  multiplexer command which provides C-style string operations on
                 8-bit bytes without a notion of locale settings and character sets, effectively assuming  ASCII
                 data.   For numeric and other operations refer to vexpr.  vput, one of the “Command modifiers”,
                 is supported.  The error result is ‘-1’ for usage errors and numeric results, the empty  string
                 otherwise;  missing  data  errors,  as  for unsuccessful searches, result in the ! error number
                 being set to ^ERR-NODATA.  Where the question mark ‘?’ modifier suffix is  supported,  a  case-
                 insensitive  (ASCII mapping) operation mode is supported; the keyword ‘case’ is optional, e.g.,
                 ‘find?’ and ‘find?case’ are identical.

                 length    Queries the length of the given argument.

                 hash, hash32 Calculates a hash value of the given argument.  The latter will  return  a  32-bit
                           result  regardless of host environment.  ‘?’ modifier suffix is supported.  These use
                           Chris Torek's hash algorithm, the resulting hash value is bit mixed as shown by  Bret
                           Mulvey.

                 find      Search  for  the  second  in  the first argument.  Shows the resulting 0-based offset
                           shall it have been found.  ‘?’ modifier suffix is supported.

                 substring Creates a substring of its first argument.   The  optional  second  argument  is  the
                           0-based  starting  offset,  a  negative  one  counts from the end; the optional third
                           argument specifies the length of the desired result, a negative length leaves off the
                           given number of bytes at the end of the original string; by default the entire string
                           is used.  This operation tries to work around faulty arguments (set verbose for error
                           logs), but reports them via the error number ! as ^ERR-OVERFLOW.

                 trim      Trim away whitespace characters from both ends of the argument.

                 trim-front Trim away whitespace characters from the begin of the argument.

                 trim-end  Trim away whitespace characters from the end of the argument.

       cwd       Show the name of the current working directory, as reported by getcwd(3).  Supports  vput  (see
                 “Command modifiers”).  The return status is tracked via ?.

       Decrypt   [Option]  For  unencrypted  messages  this command is identical to Copy; Encrypted messages are
                 first decrypted, if possible, and then copied.

       decrypt   [Option] For unencrypted messages this command is identical to  copy;  Encrypted  messages  are
                 first decrypted, if possible, and then copied.

       define, undefine
                 The  latter  command  deletes  the  given macro, the special name ‘*’ will discard all existing
                 macros.  Deletion of (a) macro(s) can be performed from within running (a) macro(s),  including
                 self-deletion.   Without  arguments  the  former  command  prints  the  current list of macros,
                 including their content, otherwise it defines a macro, replacing an existing one  of  the  same
                 name as applicable.

                 A  defined  macro  can  be invoked explicitly by using the call, call_if and xcall commands, or
                 implicitly if a macro hook is triggered, e.g., a folder-hook.  Execution of a macro body can be
                 stopped from within by calling return.

                 Temporary macro block-scope variables can be created or deleted with the local command modifier
                 in conjunction with the commands set and unset, respectively.  To enforce unrolling of  changes
                 made  to  (global)  “INTERNAL VARIABLES” the command localopts can be used instead; its covered
                 scope depends on how (i.e., “as what”: normal macro, folder hook,  hook,  account  switch)  the
                 macro is invoked.

                 Inside  a  called  macro,  the  given positional parameters are implicitly local to the macro's
                 scope, and may be accessed via the variables *, @, # and 1  and  any  other  positive  unsigned
                 decimal  number  less  than  or  equal  to  #.  Positional parameters can be shifted, or become
                 completely replaced, removed etc. via vpospar.  A helpful command for numeric  computation  and
                 string evaluations is vexpr, csop offers C-style byte string operations.

                       define name {
                         command1
                         command2
                         ...
                         commandN
                       }

                       # E.g.
                       define exmac {
                         echo Parameter 1 of ${#} is ${1}, all: ${*} / ${@}
                         return 1000 0
                       }
                       call exmac Hello macro exmac!
                       echo ${?}/${!}/${^ERRNAME}

       delete, undelete
                 (d,  u)  Marks  the  given  message  list  as being or not being ‘deleted’, respectively; if no
                 argument has been specified then the usual search  for  a  visible  message  is  performed,  as
                 documented  for  “Message  list  arguments”,  showing  only the next input prompt if the search
                 fails.  Deleted messages will neither be saved in the “secondary mailbox” MBOX nor will they be
                 available for most other commands.  If the autoprint variable is set, the new “dot” or the last
                 message restored, respectively, is automatically typed; also see dp, dt.

       digmsg    [Only new quoting rules] Digging (information out  of)  messages  is  possible  through  digmsg
                 objects,  which  can  be created for the given message number; in compose mode the hyphen-minus
                 ‘-’ will instead open the message that is being composed.  If a hyphen-minus is  given  as  the
                 optional third argument then output will be generated on the standard output channel instead of
                 being subject to consumation by the read or readall commands.

                 The  objects  may  be  removed again by giving the same identifier used for creation; this step
                 could be omitted: objects will be automatically closed when the active mailbox or  the  compose
                 mode  is  left,  respectively.   In  all  other  use  cases  the  second  argument is an object
                 identifier, and the third and all following arguments are interpreted as via ~^  (see  “COMMAND
                 ESCAPES”):

                       ? vput = msgno; digmsg create $msgno
                       ? digmsg $msgno header list;   readall x;   echon $x
                       210 Subject From To Message-ID References In-Reply-To Status
                       ? digmsg $msgno header show Status;readall x;echon $x
                       212 Status
                       RO

                       ? digmsg remove $msgno

       discard   (di) Identical to ignore.  Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       dp, dt    Delete the given messages and automatically type the new “dot” if one exists, regardless of the
                 setting of autoprint.

       dotmove   Move the “dot” up or down by one message when given ‘+’ or ‘-’ argument, respectively.

       draft, undraft
                 Take  message  lists  and  mark  each  given  message  as  being  draft,  or  not  being draft,
                 respectively, as documented in the section “Message states”.

       echo      [Only new quoting rules] (ec) Echoes  arguments  to  standard  output  and  writes  a  trailing
                 newline,  whereas  the  otherwise  identical echon does not.  “Shell-style argument quoting” is
                 used, “Filename transformations” are applied to the  expanded  arguments.   This  command  also
                 supports  vput as documented in “Command modifiers”, and manages the error number !: if data is
                 stored in a variable then the return value reflects the length of the result string in case  of
                 success and is ‘-1’ on error.

       echoerr   [Only  new  quoting rules] Identical to echo except that is echoes to standard error.  Also see
                 echoerrn.  In interactive sessions the [Option]al message ring queue for errors  will  be  used
                 instead, if available and vput was not used.

       echon     [Only new quoting rules] Identical to echo, but does not write or store a trailing newline.

       echoerrn  [Only new quoting rules] Identical to echoerr, but does not write or store a trailing newline.

       edit      (e)  Point  the text EDITOR at each message from the given list in turn.  Modified contents are
                 discarded unless the writebackedited variable is set, and are not used unless the  mailbox  can
                 be  written to and the editor returns a successful exit status.  visual can be used instead for
                 a more display oriented editor.

       elif      Part of the if (see there for more), elif, else, endif conditional —  if  the  condition  of  a
                 preceding  if  was  false,  check the following condition and execute the following block if it
                 evaluates true.

       else      (el) Part of the if (see there for more), elif, else,  endif  conditional  —  if  none  of  the
                 conditions of the preceding if and elif commands was true, the else block is executed.

       endif     (en)  Marks  the  end  of  an  if (see there for more), elif, else, endif conditional execution
                 block.

       environ   [Only new quoting rules] S-nail has  a  strict  notion  about  which  variables  are  “INTERNAL
                 VARIABLES”  and which are managed in the program “ENVIRONMENT”.  Since some of the latter are a
                 vivid part of S-nails functioning, however, they are transparently integrated into  the  normal
                 handling  of internal variables via set and unset.  To integrate other environment variables of
                 choice into this transparent handling, and also to export internal variables into  the  process
                 environment  where  they  normally  are  not,  a  ‘link’  needs to become established with this
                 command, as in, e.g.,

                       environ link PERL5LIB TZ

                 Afterwards changing such variables with  set  will  cause  automatic  updates  of  the  program
                 environment,  and  therefore  be inherited by newly created child processes.  Sufficient system
                 support provided (it was in BSD as early as 1987, and is standardized since Y2K) removing  such
                 variables  with  unset  will  remove them also from the program environment, but in any way the
                 knowledge they ever have been ‘link’ed will be lost.  Note that this implies that localopts may
                 cause loss of such links.

                 The command ‘unlink’ will remove an existing link, but leaves the  variables  as  such  intact.
                 Additionally the subcommands ‘set’ and ‘unset’ are provided, which work exactly the same as the
                 documented  commands  set and unset, but (additionally un)link the variable(s) with the program
                 environment  and  thus  immediately  export  them  to,  or  remove  them  from  (if  possible),
                 respectively, the program environment.

       errors    [Option]  Since  S-nail uses the console as a user interface it can happen that messages scroll
                 by too fast to become recognized.  Therefore an error log  queue  is  available  which  can  be
                 managed  by errors: show or no argument will display and clear the queue, clear will only clear
                 the queue.  The queue is finite: if its maximum size is reached any new  message  replaces  the
                 eldest.  There are also the variables ^ERRQUEUE-COUNT and ^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS.

       eval      [Only  new  quoting rules] Construct a command by concatenating the arguments, separated with a
                 single space character, and then evaluate the result.  This command  passes  through  the  exit
                 status ? and error number ! of the evaluated command; also see call.

                       define xxx {
                         echo "xxx arg <$1>"
                         shift
                         if [ $# -gt 0 ]
                           \xcall xxx "$@"
                         endif
                       }
                       define yyy {
                         eval "$@ ' ball"
                       }
                       call yyy '\call xxx' "b\$'\t'u ' "
                       call xxx arg <b      u>
                       call xxx arg <  >
                       call xxx arg <ball>

       exit      (ex  or x) Exit from S-nail without changing the active mailbox and skip any saving of messages
                 in the “secondary mailbox” MBOX, as well as a possibly tracked  line  editor  history-file.   A
                 possibly  set on-account-cleanup will be invoked, however.  The optional status number argument
                 will be passed through to exit(3).  [v15 behaviour may differ] For now it can happen  that  the
                 given  status  will  be  overwritten,  later  this will only occur if a later error needs to be
                 reported onto an otherwise success indicating status.

       File      (Fi) Like file, but open the mailbox read-only.

       file      (fi) The file command switches to a new mailbox.  Without arguments it shows status information
                 of the current mailbox.  If an argument is given, it will write out changes (such as deletions)
                 the user has made, open a new mailbox,  update  the  internal  variables  mailbox-resolved  and
                 mailbox-display,  execute an according folder-hook, if one is installed, and optionally display
                 a summary of headers if the variable header is set.

                 “Filename transformations” will be applied to the name  argument,  and  ‘protocol://’  prefixes
                 are,  i.e., URL syntax is understood, e.g., ‘mbox:///tmp/mdirbox’: if a protocol prefix is used
                 the mailbox type is fixated and  neither  the  auto-detection  (read  on)  nor  the  newfolders
                 mechanisms apply.  [Option]ally URLs can also be used to access network resources, which may be
                 accessed securely via “Encrypted network communication” if so supported.  Network communication
                 socket  timeouts are configurable, e.g., socket-connect-timeout.  All generated network traffic
                 may be proxied over the SOCKS5 server given in socks-proxy.

                       [v15-compat] protocol://[user[:password]@]host[:port][/path]
                       [no v15-compat] protocol://[user@]host[:port][/path]

                 [Option]ally supported network protocols are pop3 (POP3) and pop3s  (POP3  with  TLS  encrypted
                 transport),  imap  and  imaps.   The  [/path] part is valid only for IMAP; there it defaults to
                 INBOX.  Network URLs require a special encoding as documented in the section “On URL syntax and
                 credential lookup”.

                 If the resulting file protocol (MBOX database) name is located on a local filesystem  then  the
                 list  of  all  registered  filetypes  is  traversed  in  order  to  see  whether  a transparent
                 intermediate conversion step is necessary to handle the given mailbox,  in  which  case  S-nail
                 will  use  the  found  hook to load and save data into and from a temporary file, respectively.
                 Changing hooks will not affect already opened mailboxes.  For example,  the  following  creates
                 hooks for the gzip(1) compression tool and a combined compressed and encrypted format:

                       ? filetype \
                           gzip 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' \
                           zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'

                 filetypes  also  provide  limited  (case-sensitive)  auto-completion capabilities.  For example
                 ‘mbox.gz’ will be found for ‘? file mbox’ provided that a corresponding handler  is  installed.
                 It  will  neither  find ‘mbox.GZ’ nor ‘mbox.Gz’ however, on the other hand doing an explicit ‘?
                 file mbox.GZ’ will find and use the handler for ‘gz’.

                 MBOX databases will always be protected via file-region locks (fcntl(2)) during file operations
                 in order to avoid inconsistencies  due  to  concurrent  modifications.   [Option]  In  addition
                 mailbox  files  treated  as  the  system inbox (MAIL), as well as “primary system mailbox”es in
                 general will also be protected by so-called dotlock files, the traditional way  of  mail  spool
                 file  locking:  for  any  file ‘x’ a lock file ‘x.lock’ will be created for the duration of the
                 synchronization — as necessary an external privileged dotlock helper will be used to create the
                 dotlock file in the same directory and with the same user and group identities as the  file  of
                 interest.   dotlock-disable  can  be  used to turn off additional dotlock files, shall the need
                 arise.  There is also a related entry in the “FAQ”: “Howto handle stale dotlock files”.

                 S-nail by default uses tolerant POSIX rules when reading  MBOX  database  files,  but  it  will
                 detect  invalid  message  boundaries in this mode and complain (even more with debug) if any is
                 seen: in this case mbox-rfc4155 can be used to create a valid MBOX database  from  the  invalid
                 input.

                 [Option]  If  no  protocol  has  been  fixated,  and  name  refers  to  a  directory  with  the
                 subdirectories ‘tmp’, ‘new’ and ‘cur’, then it is treated as a folder in “Maildir” format.  The
                 maildir format stores each message in its own file, and has been designed so that file  locking
                 is not necessary when reading or writing files.

                 [v15 behaviour may differ] If no protocol has been fixated and no existing file has been found,
                 the variable newfolders controls the format of mailboxes yet to be created.

       filetype, unfiletype
                 [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Define,  list, and remove, respectively, file handler hooks, which
                 provide (shell) commands that enable S-nail to load and save MBOX files from and to files  with
                 the registered file extensions, as shown and described for file.  The extensions are used case-
                 insensitively,  yet the auto-completion feature of, e.g., file will only work case-sensitively.
                 An intermediate temporary file will be used to store the expanded  data.   The  latter  command
                 will remove hooks for all given extensions, asterisk ‘*’ will remove all existing handlers.

                 When  used  without arguments the former shows a list of all currently defined file hooks, with
                 one argument the expansion of the given alias.  Otherwise three  arguments  are  expected,  the
                 first  specifying  the  file  extension  for  which the hook is meant, and the second and third
                 defining the load- and save commands to deal with the file type, respectively,  both  of  which
                 must  read  from  standard  input and write to standard output.  Changing hooks will not affect
                 already opened mailboxes ([v15 behaviour may differ] except below).  [v15 behaviour may differ]
                 For now too much work is done, and files  are  oftened  read  in  twice  where  once  would  be
                 sufficient:  this can cause problems if a filetype is changed while such a file is opened; this
                 was already so with the built-in support of .gz etc. in Heirloom, and will vanish in v15.  [v15
                 behaviour may differ] For now all handler strings  are  passed  to  the  SHELL  for  evaluation
                 purposes;  in  the  future a ‘!’ prefix to load and save commands may mean to bypass this shell
                 instance: placing a leading space will avoid any possible misinterpretations.

                       ? filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
                           gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c'  xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
                           zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
                           zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
                       ? set record=+sent.zst.pgp

       flag, unflag
                 Take message lists and mark the messages as being flagged, or not being flagged,  respectively,
                 for urgent/special attention.  See the section “Message states”.

       folder    (fold) The same as file.

       folders   With  no  arguments,  list  the names of the folders in the folder directory.  With an existing
                 folder as an argument, lists the names of folders below the named folder.

       Followup  (F) Similar to Respond, but saves the message in a file named after the local part of the first
                 recipient's address (instead of in record).

       followup  (fo) Similar to respond, but saves the message in a file named after  the  local  part  of  the
                 first recipient's address (instead of in record).

       followupall
                 Similar to followup, but responds to all recipients regardless of the flipr variable.

       followupsender
                 Similar to Followup, but responds to the sender only regardless of the flipr variable.

       Forward   Similar  to  forward,  but  saves  the  message  in  a  file  named after the local part of the
                 recipient's address (instead of in record).

       forward   Takes a message and the address of a recipient and forwards the message to him.   The  text  of
                 the  original  message  is  included  in the new one, with the value of the forward-inject-head
                 variable preceding, and the value of forward-inject-tail succeeding it.  To filter the included
                 header fields to the desired subset use the ‘forward’  slot  of  the  white-  and  blacklisting
                 command   headerpick.   Only  the  first  part  of  a  multipart  message  is  included  unless
                 forward-as-attachment, and recipient addresses will  be  stripped  from  comments,  names  etc.
                 unless the internal variable fullnames is set.

                 This  may  generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified, ^ERR-PERM if
                 some addressees where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NODATA if no applicable messages  have  been
                 given,  ^ERR-NOTSUP  if  multiple messages have been specified, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
                 ^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.

       from      (f) Takes a list of message specifications and displays a summary  of  their  message  headers,
                 exactly  as via headers, making the first message of the result the new “dot” (the last message
                 if showlast is set).  An alias of this command is search.  Also see “Specifying messages”.

       Fwd       [Obsolete] Alias for Forward.

       fwd       [Obsolete] Alias for forward.

       fwdignore
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       fwdretain
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       ghost, unghost
                 [Obsolete] Replaced by commandalias, uncommandalias.

       headerpick, unheaderpick
                 [Only new quoting rules] Multiplexer command to manage white- and  blacklisting  selections  of
                 header  fields  for a variety of applications.  Without arguments the set of contexts that have
                 settings is displayed.  When given arguments, the first argument is the context  to  which  the
                 command  applies,  one  of  (case-insensitive)  ‘type’  for display purposes (via, e.g., type),
                 ‘save’ for selecting which headers shall be stored persistently when save, copy, move  or  even
                 decrypting  messages  (note that MIME related etc. header fields should not be ignored in order
                 to not destroy usability of the message in this case), ‘forward’ for  stripping  down  messages
                 when forwarding message (has no effect if forward-as-attachment is set), and ‘top’ for defining
                 user-defined set of fields for the command top.

                 The  current  settings of the given context are displayed if it is the only argument.  A second
                 argument denotes the type of restriction that is to be chosen, it may  be  (a  case-insensitive
                 prefix   of)   ‘retain’  or  ‘ignore’  for  white-  and  blacklisting  purposes,  respectively.
                 Establishing a whitelist suppresses inspection of the corresponding blacklist.

                 If no further argument is given the current settings of  the  given  type  will  be  displayed,
                 otherwise  the  remaining  arguments  specify header fields, which [Option]ally may be given as
                 regular expressions, to be added to the given type.  The special wildcard field (asterisk, ‘*’)
                 will establish a (fast) shorthand setting which covers all fields.

                 The latter command always takes three or more arguments and can be used to  remove  selections,
                 i.e.,  from  the  given context, the given type of list, all the given headers will be removed,
                 the special argument ‘*’ will remove all headers.

       headers   (h) Show the current group of headers, the size of which depends  on  the  variable  screen  in
                 interactive  mode,  and  the  format  of  which  can  be  defined with headline.  If a message-
                 specification is given the group of headers containing the first message therein is  shown  and
                 the  message  at  the  top of the screen becomes the new “dot”; the last message is targeted if
                 showlast is set.

       help      (hel) A synonym for ?.

       history   [Option] Without arguments or when given show all history entries are  shown  (this  mode  also
                 supports  a  more  verbose  output).  load will replace the list of entries with the content of
                 history-file, and save will dump the current list  to  said  file,  replacing  former  content.
                 clear will delete all history entries.  The argument can also be a signed decimal NUMBER, which
                 will select and evaluate the respective history entry, and move it to the top of the history; a
                 negative  number  is  used as an offset to the current command, e.g., ‘-1’ will select the last
                 command, the history top.  Please see “On terminal control and line editor” for  more  on  this
                 topic.

       hold      (ho,  also  preserve)  Takes  a  message list and marks each message therein to be saved in the
                 user's system inbox instead of in the “secondary mailbox” MBOX.  Does not override  the  delete
                 command.   S-nail  deviates  from  the POSIX standard with this command, because a next command
                 issued after hold will display the following message, not the current one.

       if        (i) Part of the if, elif, else, endif conditional execution construct — if the given  condition
                 is  true  then the encapsulated block is executed.  The POSIX standard only supports the (case-
                 insensitive) conditions ‘r’eceive and ‘s’end, the remaining are non-portable extensions.   [v15
                 behaviour  may  differ]  In  conjunction with the wysh command prefix(es) “Shell-style argument
                 quoting” and more test operators are available.

                       if receive
                         commands ...
                       else
                         commands ...
                       endif

                 Further (case-insensitive) one-argument conditions are ‘t’erminal which evaluates  to  true  in
                 interactive  terminal  sessions  (running  with standard input or standard output attached to a
                 terminal, and none of the “quickrun” command line options -e, -H and -L  have  been  used),  as
                 well  as  any  boolean  value (see “INTERNAL VARIABLES” for textual boolean representations) to
                 mark an enwrapped block as “never execute” or “always  execute”.   (Remarks:  condition  syntax
                 errors skip all branches until endif.)

                 [no  v15-compat]  and  without  wysh:  It  is possible to check “INTERNAL VARIABLES” as well as
                 “ENVIRONMENT” variables for existence or compare their expansion against a user given value  or
                 another  variable  by using the ‘$’ (“variable next”) conditional trigger character; a variable
                 on the right hand side may be signalled using  the  same  mechanism.   Variable  names  may  be
                 enclosed  in  a  pair of matching braces.  When this mode has been triggered, several operators
                 are available ([v15-compat] and wysh: they are always  available,  and  there  is  no  trigger:
                 variables  will  have  been  expanded by the shell-compatible parser before the if etc. command
                 sees them).

                 [v15-compat] Two argument conditions.  Variables can be tested  for  existence  and  expansion:
                 ‘-N’  will  test  whether the given variable exists, e.g., ‘-N editalong’ will evaluate to true
                 when editalong is set, whereas ‘-Z editalong’ will if it is not.   ‘-n  "$editalong"’  will  be
                 true  if the variable is set and expands to a non-empty string, ‘-z $'\$editalong'’ only if the
                 expansion is empty, whether the variable exists or not.  The remaining  conditions  take  three
                 arguments.

                 Integer  operators  treat  the  arguments  on  the  left and right hand side of the operator as
                 integral numbers and compare them arithmetically.  It is an error if any of the operands is not
                 a valid integer, an empty argument (which implies it had been quoted) is treated as if it  were
                 0.   Via  the  question  mark ‘?’ modifier suffix a saturated operation mode is available where
                 numbers will linger at the minimum or  maximum  possible  value,  instead  of  overflowing  (or
                 trapping),  the  keyword ‘saturated’ is optional, e.g., ‘==?’, ‘==?satu’ and ‘==?saturated’ are
                 identical.  Available operators are ‘-lt’ (less than), ‘-le’ (less than  or  equal  to),  ‘-eq’
                 (equal), ‘-ne’ (not equal), ‘-ge’ (greater than or equal to), and ‘-gt’ (greater than).

                 String  and regular expression data operators compare the left and right hand side according to
                 their textual content.  Unset variables are treated as the empty string.  Via the question mark
                 ‘?’ modifier suffix a case-insensitive operation mode  is  available,  the  keyword  ‘case’  is
                 optional, e.g., ‘==?’ and ‘==?case’ are identical.

                 Available  string  operators  are  ‘<’ (less than), ‘<=’ (less than or equal to), ‘==’ (equal),
                 ‘!=’ (not equal), ‘>=’ (greater than or equal to), ‘>’ (greater than), ‘=%’ (is  substring  of)
                 and  ‘!%’  (is  not substring of).  By default these operators work on bytes and (therefore) do
                 not take into account character set specifics.  If the  case-insensitivity  modifier  has  been
                 used,  case  is  ignored according to the rules of the US-ASCII encoding, i.e., bytes are still
                 compared.

                 When the [Option]al regular expression support is available, the  additional  string  operators
                 ‘=~’  and  ‘!~’  can be used.  They treat the right hand side as an extended regular expression
                 that is matched according to the active locale (see “Character  sets”),  i.e.,  character  sets
                 should be honoured correctly.

                 Conditions  can  be joined via AND-OR lists (where the AND operator is ‘&&’ and the OR operator
                 is ‘||’), which have equal precedence and will be evaluated with left associativity, thus using
                 the same syntax that is known for the sh(1).  It is also possible to form groups of  conditions
                 and  lists  by  enclosing  them in pairs of brackets ‘[ ... ]’, which may be interlocked within
                 each other, and also be joined via AND-OR lists.

                 The results of individual conditions and entire groups may be modified via unary operators: the
                 unary operator ‘!’ will reverse the result.

                       wysh set v15-compat=yes # with value: automatic "wysh"!
                       if -N debug;echo *debug* set;else;echo not;endif
                       if [ "$ttycharset" == UTF-8 ] || \
                           [ "$ttycharset" ==?case UTF8 ]
                         echo *ttycharset* is UTF-8, the former case-sensitive!
                       endif
                       set t1=one t2=one
                       if [ "${t1}" == "${t2}" ]
                         echo These two variables are equal
                       endif
                       if "$features" =% +regex && "$TERM" =~?case "^xterm.*"
                         echo ..in an X terminal
                       endif
                       if [ [ true ] && [ [ "${debug}" != '' ] || \
                           [ "$verbose" != '' ] ] ]
                         echo Noisy, noisy
                       endif
                       if true && [ -n "$debug" || -n "${verbose}" ]
                         echo Left associativity, as is known from the shell
                       endif

       ignore    (ig) Identical to discard.  Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       list      Shows the names of all available commands, alphabetically sorted.  If given any  non-whitespace
                 argument  the list will be shown in the order in which command prefixes are searched.  [Option]
                 In conjunction with a set variable verbose additional information will  be  provided  for  each
                 command:  the  argument type will be indicated, the documentation string will be shown, and the
                 set of command flags will show up:

                 ‘`local'’    command supports the command modifier local.
                 ‘`vput'’     command supports the command modifier vput.
                 ‘*!*’        the error number is tracked in !.
                 ‘needs-box’  whether the command needs an active mailbox, a file.
                 ‘ok:’        indicators whether command is ...
                              ‘batch/interactive’
                                            usable in interactive or batch mode (-#).
                              ‘send-mode’   usable in send mode.
                              ‘subprocess’  allowed to be used when running in a subprocess instance, e.g., from
                                            within a macro that is called via on-compose-splice.
                 ‘not ok:’    indicators whether command is not ...
                              ‘compose-mode’  available in compose mode.
                              ‘startup’       available during program startup, e.g., in “Resource files”.
                 ‘gabby’      The command produces history-gabby history entries.

       localopts
                 Enforce change localization of environ (linked) “ENVIRONMENT” as  well  as  (global)  “INTERNAL
                 VARIABLES”,  meaning  that  their  state  will  be reverted to the former one once the “covered
                 scope” is left.  Just like the command modifier local, which provides block-scope  localization
                 for  some  commands (instead), it can only be used inside of macro definition blocks introduced
                 by account or define.  The covered scope of an account is left  once  a  different  account  is
                 activated,  and  some  macros,  notably  folder-hooks, use their own specific notion of covered
                 scope, here it will be extended until the folder is left again.

                 This setting stacks up: i.e., if ‘macro1’ enables change localization and calls ‘macro2’, which
                 explicitly resets localization, then any value changes within ‘macro2’ will still  be  reverted
                 when  the  scope  of  ‘macro1’  is  left.   (Caveats:  if in this example ‘macro2’ changes to a
                 different account which sets some variables that are already covered  by  localizations,  their
                 scope  will  be  extended,  and  in  fact  leaving  the account will (thus) restore settings in
                 (likely) global scope which actually were defined in a local, macro private context!)

                 This command takes one or two arguments, the optional first one specifies an attribute that may
                 be one of scope, which refers to the current scope and is thus the default, call, which  causes
                 any  macro  that is being called to be started with localization enabled by default, as well as
                 call-fixate, which (if enabled) disallows any called macro to turn off localization: like  this
                 it  can  be  ensured  that  once  the current scope regains control, any changes made in deeper
                 levels have been reverted.  The latter two are mutually exclusive, and neither  affects  xcall.
                 The (second) argument is interpreted as a boolean (string, see “INTERNAL VARIABLES”) and states
                 whether the given attribute shall be turned on or off.

                       define temporary_settings {
                         set possibly_global_option1
                         localopts on
                         set localized_option1
                         set localized_option2
                         localopts scope off
                         set possibly_global_option2
                       }

       Lreply    Reply  to messages that come in via known (mlist) or subscribed (mlsubscribe) mailing lists, or
                 pretend to do so (see “Mailing lists”): on top of  the  usual  reply  functionality  this  will
                 actively  resort  and  even  remove  message  recipients in order to generate a message that is
                 supposed to be sent to a mailing  list.   For  example  it  will  also  implicitly  generate  a
                 ‘Mail-Followup-To:’  header  if  that  seems  useful, regardless of the setting of the variable
                 followup-to.  For more documentation please refer to  “On  sending  mail,  and  non-interactive
                 mode”.

                 This  may  generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified, ^ERR-PERM if
                 some addressees where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NODATA if no applicable messages  have  been
                 given,  ^ERR-IO  if  an  I/O  error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set conversion
                 fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.  Occurrence of some of the errors depend on  the  value
                 of expandaddr.  Any error stops processing of further messages.

       Mail      Similar  to  mail,  but  saves  the  message  in a file named after the local part of the first
                 recipient's address (instead of in record).

       mail      (m) Takes a (list of) recipient address(es) as (an) argument(s), or asks on standard  input  if
                 none  were  given;  then  collects  the  remaining  mail  content and sends it out.  Unless the
                 internal variable fullnames is set recipient addresses will be stripped  from  comments,  names
                 etc.  For more documentation please refer to “On sending mail, and non-interactive mode”.

                 This  may  generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified, ^ERR-PERM if
                 some addressees where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NODATA if no applicable messages  have  been
                 given,  ^ERR-NOTSUP  if  multiple messages have been specified, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
                 ^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set conversion fails, and  ^ERR-INVAL  for  other  errors.
                 Occurrence of some of the errors depend on the value of expandaddr.

       mbox      (mb)  The given message list is to be sent to the “secondary mailbox” MBOX when S-nail is quit;
                 this is the default action unless the variable hold is set.  [v15 behaviour  may  differ]  This
                 command can only be used in a “primary system mailbox”.

       mimetype, unmimetype
                 [Only new quoting rules] Without arguments the content of the MIME type cache will displayed; a
                 more  verbose  listing  will  be  produced  if  either of debug or verbose are set.  When given
                 arguments they will be joined, interpreted as shown in “The mime.types files” (also  see  “HTML
                 mail  and  MIME  attachments”), and the resulting entry will be added (prepended) to the cache.
                 In any event MIME type sources are loaded first as necessary –  mimetypes-load-control  can  be
                 used to fine-tune which sources are actually loaded.

                 The  latter  command  deletes  all  specifications  of  the given MIME type, thus ‘? unmimetype
                 text/plain’ will remove all registered specifications for  the  MIME  type  ‘text/plain’.   The
                 special  name  ‘*’  will  discard all existing MIME types, just as will ‘reset’, but which also
                 reenables cache initialization via mimetypes-load-control.

       mimeview  [v15 behaviour may differ] Only available in interactive  mode,  this  command  allows  one  to
                 display  MIME  parts which require external MIME handler programs to run which do not integrate
                 in S-nails normal type output (see “HTML mail and  MIME  attachments”).   ([v15  behaviour  may
                 differ]  No  syntax  to directly address parts, this restriction may vanish.)  The user will be
                 asked for each non-text part of the given message in turn whether the registered handler  shall
                 be used to display the part.

       mlist, unmlist
                 [Only new quoting rules] Manage the list of known “Mailing lists”; subscriptions are controlled
                 via mlsubscribe.  The latter command deletes all given arguments, or all at once when given the
                 asterisk  ‘*’.   The  former  shows  the  list  of  all  currently  known lists if used without
                 arguments, otherwise the given arguments will become  known.   [Option]  In  the  latter  case,
                 arguments which contain any of the “magic regular expression characters” will be interpreted as
                 one,  possibly  matching  many  addresses;  these will be sequentially matched via linked lists
                 instead of being looked up in a dictionary.

       mlsubscribe, unmlsubscribe
                 Building upon the command pair mlist, unmlist, but only managing the subscription attribute  of
                 mailing lists.  (The former will also create not yet existing mailing lists.)

       Move      Similar  to  move,  but  moves  the messages to a file named after the local part of the sender
                 address of the first message (instead of in record).

       move      Acts like copy but marks the messages for deletion if they were transferred successfully.

       More      Like more, but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick  selection,  and
                 all MIME parts.  Identical to Page.

       more      Invokes  the  PAGER  on  the  given  messages,  even in non-interactive mode and as long as the
                 standard output is a terminal.  Identical to page.

       netrc     [Option] When used without arguments or if show has been given  the  content  of  the  ~/.netrc
                 cache  is  shown,  loading  it first as necessary.  If the argument is load then the cache will
                 only be initialized and clear will remove its contents.  Note that S-nail will try to load  the
                 file only once, use ‘netrc clear’ to unlock further attempts.  See netrc-lookup, netrc-pipe and
                 the  section “On URL syntax and credential lookup”; the section “The .netrc file” documents the
                 file format in detail.

       newmail   Checks for new mail in the current folder without committing any changes before.  If  new  mail
                 is present, a message is shown.  If the header variable is set, the headers of each new message
                 are also shown.  This command is not available for all mailbox types.

       next      (n)  (like ‘+’ or “ENTER”) Goes to the next message in sequence and types it.  With an argument
                 list, types the next matching message.

       New       Same as Unread.

       new       Same as unread.

       noop      If the current folder is accessed via a network connection, a “NOOP” command is sent, otherwise
                 no operation is performed.

       Page      Like page, but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick  selection,  and
                 all MIME parts.  Identical to More.

       page      Invokes  the  PAGER  on  the  given  messages,  even in non-interactive mode and as long as the
                 standard output is a terminal.  Identical to more.

       Pipe      Like pipe but also pipes header fields which would not pass the headerpick selection,  and  all
                 parts of MIME ‘multipart/alternative’ messages.

       pipe      (pi)  Takes  an  optional  message list and shell command (that defaults to cmd), and pipes the
                 messages through the command.  If the page variable is set, every  message  is  followed  by  a
                 formfeed character.

       preserve  (pre) A synonym for hold.

       Print     (P) Alias for Type.

       print     (p) Research Unix equivalent of type.

       quit      (q)  Terminates  the  session, saving all undeleted, unsaved messages in the current “secondary
                 mailbox” MBOX, preserving all messages marked with hold or preserve or never referenced in  the
                 system  inbox,  and removing all other messages from the “primary system mailbox”.  If new mail
                 has arrived during the session, the message “You have new mail” will be shown.  If given  while
                 editing  a  mailbox  file  with the command line option -f, then the edit file is rewritten.  A
                 return to the shell is effected, unless the rewrite of edit file fails, in which case the  user
                 can  escape  with the exit command.  The optional status number argument will be passed through
                 to exit(3).  [v15 behaviour may differ] For now it can happen that the  given  status  will  be
                 overwritten, later this will only occur if a later error needs to be reported onto an otherwise
                 success indicating status.

       read      [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Read  a  line  from  standard input, or the channel set active via
                 readctl, and assign the data, which will be split as indicated by ifs, to the given  variables.
                 The  variable  names  are  checked by the same rules as documented for vput, and the same error
                 codes will be seen in !; the exit status ? indicates the number of bytes read, it will be  ‘-1’
                 with  the error number ! set to ^ERR-BADF in case of I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE upon End-Of-File.
                 If there are more fields than variables, assigns successive fields to the last given  variable.
                 If there are less fields than variables, assigns the empty string to the remains.

                       ? read a b c
                          H  e  l  l  o
                       ? echo "<$a> <$b> <$c>"
                       <H> <e> <l  l  o>
                       ? wysh set ifs=:; read a b c;unset ifs
                       hey2.0,:"'you    ",:world!:mars.:
                       ? echo $?/$^ERRNAME / <$a><$b><$c>
                       0/NONE / <hey2.0,><"'you    ",><world!:mars.:><><>

       readall   [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Read  anything  from standard input, or the channel set active via
                 readctl, and assign the data to the given variable.  The variable name is checked by  the  same
                 rules  as  documented  for  vput, and the same error codes will be seen in !; the exit status ?
                 indicates the number of bytes read, it will be ‘-1’ with the error number ! set to ^ERR-BADF in
                 case of I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE upon End-Of-File.  [v15 behaviour may differ] The  input  data
                 length is restricted to 31-bits.

       readctl   [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Manages  input  channels for read and readall, to be used to avoid
                 complicated or impracticable code, like calling read from within  a  macro  in  non-interactive
                 mode.   Without  arguments, or when the first argument is show, a listing of all known channels
                 is printed.  Channels can otherwise be created, and existing channels can  be  set  active  and
                 removed by giving the string used for creation.

                 The  channel name is expected to be a file descriptor number, or, if parsing the numeric fails,
                 an input file name that undergoes “Filename transformations”.  E.g. (this  example  requires  a
                 modern shell):

                       $ LC_ALL=C printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\nyou\necho $a' |\
                         LC_ALL=C s-nail -R#
                       hey, you
                       $ LC_ALL=C printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\necho $a' |\
                         LC_ALL=C 6<<< 'you' s-nail -R#X'readctl create 6'
                       hey, you

       remove    Removes  the  named  files or directories.  “Filename transformations” including shell pathname
                 wildcard pattern expansions (glob(7)) are performed on the arguments.  If a  name  refer  to  a
                 mailbox,  e.g.,  a  Maildir  mailbox,  then  a mailbox type specific removal will be performed,
                 deleting the complete mailbox.  The user is asked for confirmation in interactive mode.

       rename    Takes the name of an existing folder and the name for the new folder and renames the  first  to
                 the   second  one.   “Filename  transformations”  including  shell  pathname  wildcard  pattern
                 expansions (glob(7)) are performed on both arguments.  Both folders must be of the same type.

       Reply     (R) Identical to reply except that it replies to only the sender of each message of  the  given
                 list,  by  using  the  first message as the template to quote, for the ‘Subject:’ etc.; setting
                 flipr will exchange this command with reply.

       reply     (r) Take a message and group-responds to it  by  addressing  the  sender  and  all  recipients,
                 subject  to alternates processing.  followup-to, followup-to-honour, reply-to-honour as well as
                 recipients-in-cc influence response behaviour.  Unless the internal variable fullnames  is  set
                 recipient   addresses   will   be  stripped  from  comments,  names  etc.   quote  as  well  as
                 quote-as-attachment configure whether responded-to message shall be quoted etc.; setting  flipr
                 will  exchange this command with Reply.  The command Lreply offers special support for replying
                 to mailing lists.  For more documentation please refer to “On sending mail, and non-interactive
                 mode”.

                 This may generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified,  ^ERR-PERM  if
                 some  addressees  where rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NODATA if no applicable messages have been
                 given, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP if  a  necessary  character  set  conversion
                 fails,  and  ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.  Occurrence of some of the errors depend on the value
                 of expandaddr.  Any error stops processing of further messages.

       replyall  Similar to reply, but initiates a group-reply regardless of the value of flipr.

       replysender
                 Similar to Reply, but responds to the sender only regardless of the value of flipr.

       Resend    Like resend, but does not add any header lines.  This  is  not  a  way  to  hide  the  sender's
                 identity, but useful for sending a message again to the same recipients.

       resend    Takes  a  list  of  messages  and  a  name, and sends each message to the given, fully expanded
                 addressee.  ‘Resent-From:’ and related header fields are prepended  to  the  new  copy  of  the
                 message.  Saving in record is only performed if record-resent is set.

                 This  may  generate the errors ^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been specified, ^ERR-PERM if
                 the addressee was rejected by expandaddr, ^ERR-NODATA  if  no  applicable  messages  have  been
                 given,  ^ERR-IO  if  an  I/O  error occurs, ^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set conversion
                 fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.  Occurrence of some of the errors depend on  the  value
                 of expandaddr.  Any error stops processing of further messages.

       Respond   Same as Reply.

       respond   Same as reply.

       respondall
                 Same as replyall.

       respondsender
                 Same as replysender.

       retain    (ret) Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       return    Only  available inside the scope of a defined macro or an account, this will stop evaluation of
                 any further macro content, and return execution  control  to  the  caller.   The  two  optional
                 parameters  must be specified as positive decimal numbers and default to the value 0: the first
                 argument specifies the signed 32-bit return value (stored in ? [v15 behaviour may  differ]  and
                 later  extended to signed 64-bit), the second the signed 32-bit error number (stored in !).  As
                 documented for ? a non-0 exit status may cause the program to exit.

       Save      (S) Similar to save, but saves the messages in a file named after the local part of the  sender
                 of  the  first  message  instead  of  (in  record and) taking a filename argument; the variable
                 outfolder is inspected to decide on the actual storage location.

       save      (s) Takes a message list and a filename and appends each message in turn  to  the  end  of  the
                 file.    “Filename  transformations”  including  shell  pathname  wildcard  pattern  expansions
                 (glob(7)) is performed on the filename.  If no filename is given, the “secondary mailbox”  MBOX
                 is  used.   The  filename in quotes, followed by the generated character count is echoed on the
                 user's terminal.  If editing a “primary system mailbox” the messages are marked  for  deletion.
                 “Filename  transformations”  will be applied.  To filter the saved header fields to the desired
                 subset use the ‘save’ slot of the white- and blacklisting command headerpick.

       savediscard
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       saveignore
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       saveretain
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       search    Takes a message specification (list) and displays a header summary of all matching messages, as
                 via headers.  This command is an alias of from.  Also see “Specifying messages”.

       seen      Takes a message list and marks all messages as having been read.

       set, unset
                 (se, [Only new quoting rules] uns) The latter command will delete all given  global  variables,
                 or  only  block-scope local ones if the local command modifier has been used.  The former, when
                 used without arguments, will show all currently known variables, being more verbose  if  either
                 of  debug  or  verbose  is  set.   Remarks: this list mode will not automatically link-in known
                 “ENVIRONMENT” variables, but only explicit addressing will, e.g., via varshow, using a variable
                 in an if condition or a string passed to echo, explicit  setting,  as  well  as  some  program-
                 internal use cases.

                 Otherwise  the  given variables (and arguments) are set or adjusted.  Arguments are of the form
                 ‘name=value’ (no space before or after ‘=’), or plain ‘name’ if there  is  no  value,  i.e.,  a
                 boolean  variable.   If  a name begins with ‘no’, as in ‘set nosave’, the effect is the same as
                 invoking the unset command with the remaining  part  of  the  variable  (‘unset  save’).   [v15
                 behaviour  may  differ] In conjunction with the wysh (or local) command prefix(es) “Shell-style
                 argument quoting” can be used to quote arguments as  necessary.   [v15  behaviour  may  differ]
                 Otherwise  quotation  marks  may be placed around any part of the assignment statement to quote
                 blanks or tabs.

                 When operating in global scope any ‘name’ that is known to map to an environment variable  will
                 automatically cause updates in the program environment (unsetting a variable in the environment
                 requires  corresponding  system  support)  —  use the command environ for further environmental
                 control.  If the command modifier local has been used to alter the command to  work  in  block-
                 scope  all  variables  have  values  (may  they  be  empty), and creation of names which shadow
                 “INTERNAL VARIABLES” is actively prevented ([v15 behaviour  may  differ]  shadowing  of  linked
                 “ENVIRONMENT”  variables  and free-form versions of variable chains is not yet detected).  Also
                 see varshow and the sections “INTERNAL VARIABLES” and “ENVIRONMENT”.

                       ? wysh set indentprefix=' -> '
                       ? wysh set atab=$'' aspace=' ' zero=0

       shcodec   Apply shell quoting rules to  the  given  raw-data  arguments.   Supports  vput  (see  “Command
                 modifiers”).   The  first argument specifies the operation: [+]e[ncode] or d[ecode] cause shell
                 quoting to be applied to the remains of the line, and expanded away thereof, respectively.   If
                 the  former  is prefixed with a plus-sign, the quoted result will not be roundtrip enabled, and
                 thus can be decoded only in the very same environment that was used to perform the encode; also
                 see  mle-quote-rndtrip.   If  the  coding  operation  fails  the  error  number  !  is  set  to
                 ^ERR-CANCELED,  and  the  unmodified  input  is used as the result; the error number may change
                 again due to output or result storage errors.

       shell     [Only new quoting rules] (sh) Invokes an interactive version of the shell, and returns its exit
                 status.

       shortcut, unshortcut
                 [Only new quoting rules] Manage the file- or pathname shortcuts as documented  for  file.   The
                 latter command deletes all shortcuts given as arguments, or all at once when given the asterisk
                 ‘*’.   The  former shows the list of all currently defined shortcuts if used without arguments,
                 the target of the given with a single argument.  Otherwise arguments are treated  as  pairs  of
                 shortcuts and their desired expansion, creating new or updating already existing ones.

       shift     [Only  new  quoting  rules]  Shift  the positional parameter stack (starting at 1) by the given
                 number (which must be a positive decimal), or 1 if no argument has been given.  It is an  error
                 if  the value exceeds the number of positional parameters.  If the given number is 0, no action
                 is performed, successfully.  The stack as such can be managed via vpospar.  Note  this  command
                 will  fail in account and hook macros unless the positional parameter stack has been explicitly
                 created in the current context via vpospar.

       show      Like type, but performs neither MIME decoding nor decryption, so that the raw message  text  is
                 shown.

       size      (si) Shows the size in characters of each message of the given message-list.

       sleep     [Only   new  quoting  rules]  Sleep  for  the  specified  number  of  seconds  (and  optionally
                 milliseconds), by default interruptable.  If a third  argument  is  given  the  sleep  will  be
                 uninterruptible,  otherwise  the  error number ! will be set to ^ERR-INTR if the sleep has been
                 interrupted.  The command will fail and the error number will be  ^ERR-OVERFLOW  if  the  given
                 duration(s)  overflow  the  time  datatype,  and ^ERR-INVAL if the given durations are no valid
                 integers.

       sort, unsort
                 The latter command disables sorted or threaded mode, returns to normal message  order  and,  if
                 the  header  variable  is set, displays a header summary.  The former command shows the current
                 sorting criterion when used without an argument, but creates a  sorted  representation  of  the
                 current  folder otherwise, and changes the next command and the addressing modes such that they
                 refer to messages in the sorted order.  Message numbers are the same as in  regular  mode.   If
                 the  header  variable  is  set, a header summary in the new order is also displayed.  Automatic
                 folder  sorting  can  be  enabled  by  setting  the  autosort  variable,  as  in,  e.g.,   ‘set
                 autosort=thread’.  Possible sorting criterions are:

                 date     Sort the messages by their ‘Date:’ field, that is by the time they were sent.
                 from     Sort  messages  by  the  value  of  their ‘From:’ field, that is by the address of the
                          sender.  If the showname variable is set, the sender's real name (if any) is used.
                 size     Sort the messages by their size.
                 spam     [Option] Sort the message by their spam score, as has been classified by spamrate.
                 status   Sort the messages by their message status.
                 subject  Sort the messages by their subject.
                 thread   Create a threaded display.
                 to       Sort messages by the value of their ‘To:’  field,  that  is  by  the  address  of  the
                          recipient.   If  the  showname  variable is set, the recipient's real name (if any) is
                          used.

       source    [Only new quoting rules] (so) The source command reads commands from the given file.  “Filename
                 transformations” will be applied.  If the given expanded argument ends with a vertical bar  ‘|’
                 then  the  argument  will  instead  be  interpreted as a shell command and S-nail will read the
                 output generated by it.  Dependent on the settings of posix and errexit, and also dependent  on
                 whether  the  command  modifier ignerr had been used, encountering errors will stop sourcing of
                 the given input.  [v15 behaviour may differ] Note that source cannot be used from within macros
                 that execute as folder-hooks or accounts, i.e., it can only be called  from  macros  that  were
                 called.

       source_if
                 [Only  new quoting rules] The difference to source (beside not supporting pipe syntax aka shell
                 command input) is that this command will not generate an error  nor  warn  if  the  given  file
                 argument cannot be opened successfully.

       spamclear
                 [Option] Takes a list of messages and clears their ‘is-spam’ flag.

       spamforget
                 [Option] Takes a list of messages and causes the spam-interface to forget it has ever used them
                 to  train  its  Bayesian  filter.   Unless otherwise noted the ‘is-spam’ flag of the message is
                 inspected to chose whether a message shall be forgotten to be “ham” or “spam”.

       spamham   [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of  the  spam-interface  that
                 they are “ham”.  This also clears the ‘is-spam’ flag of the messages in question.

       spamrate  [Option]  Takes  a list of messages and rates them using the configured spam-interface, without
                 modifying the messages, but setting their ‘is-spam’  flag  as  appropriate;  because  the  spam
                 rating  headers  are  lost  the  rate will be forgotten once the mailbox is left.  Refer to the
                 manual section “Handling spam” for the complete picture of spam handling in S-nail.

       spamset   [Option] Takes a list of messages and sets their ‘is-spam’ flag.

       spamspam  [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of  the  spam-interface  that
                 they are “spam”.  This also sets the ‘is-spam’ flag of the messages in question.

       thread    [Obsolete] The same as ‘sort thread’ (consider using a ‘commandalias’ as necessary).

       tls       [Only  new  quoting  rules]  TLS  information  and  management  command  multiplexer  to aid in
                 “Encrypted network communication”.  Commands  support  vput  if  so  documented  (see  “Command
                 modifiers”).  The result that is shown in case of errors is always the empty string, errors can
                 be  identified via the error number !.  For example, string length overflows are caught and set
                 ! to ^ERR-OVERFLOW.  Note this command of course honours the overall TLS configuration.

                       ? vput tls result fingerprint pop3s://ex.am.ple
                       ? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME: $result

                 fingerprint Show the tls-fingerprint-digested fingerprint of the certificate of the given  HOST
                           (‘server:port’,  where the port defaults to the HTTPS port, 443).  tls-fingerprint is
                           actively ignored for the runtime  of  this  command.   Only  available  if  the  term
                           ‘+sockets’ is included in features.

       Top       Like top but always uses the headerpick ‘type’ slot for white- and blacklisting header fields.

       top       (to)  Takes a message list and types out the first toplines lines of each message on the user's
                 terminal.  Unless a special selection has been established for the ‘top’ slot of the headerpick
                 command, the only header fields that are displayed are ‘From:’, ‘To:’, ‘CC:’,  and  ‘Subject:’.
                 Top  will  always  use  the  ‘type’  headerpick  selection  instead.   It  is possible to apply
                 compression to what is displayed by setting topsqueeze.  Messages are decrypted  and  converted
                 to the terminal character set if necessary.

       touch     (tou)  Takes  a message list and marks the messages for saving in the “secondary mailbox” MBOX.
                 S-nail deviates from the POSIX standard with this command, as a  following  next  command  will
                 display the following message instead of the current one.

       Type      (T)  Like  type  but also displays header fields which would not pass the headerpick selection,
                 and all visualizable parts of MIME ‘multipart/alternative’ messages.

       type      (t) Takes a message list and types out each message on the user's  terminal.   The  display  of
                 message  headers  is  selectable via headerpick.  For MIME multipart messages, all parts with a
                 content type of ‘text’, all parts which have a registered MIME type handler (see “HTML mail and
                 MIME attachments”) which produces plain text output, and all ‘message’ parts are shown,  others
                 are  hidden  except  for  their  headers.  Messages are decrypted and converted to the terminal
                 character set if necessary.  The command mimeview can be used to display parts  which  are  not
                 displayable as plain text.

       unaccount
                 See account.

       unalias   (una) See alias.

       unanswered
                 See answered.

       unbind    See bind.

       uncollapse
                 See collapse.

       uncolour  See colour.

       undefine  See define.

       undelete  See delete.

       undraft   See draft.

       unflag    See flag.

       unfwdignore
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unfwdretain
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unignore  Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unmimetype
                 See mimetype.

       unmlist   See mlist.

       unmlsubscribe
                 See mlsubscribe.

       Unread    Same as unread.

       unread    Takes a message list and marks each message as not having been read.

       unretain  Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unsaveignore
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unsaveretain
                 [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer headerpick.

       unset     [Only new quoting rules] (uns) See set.

       unshortcut
                 See shortcut.

       unsort    See short.

       unthread  [Obsolete] Same as unsort.

       urlcodec  Perform  URL  percent  codec operations on the raw-data argument, rather according to RFC 3986.
                 The first argument specifies the operation: e[ncode] or d[ecode] perform plain URL percent  en-
                 and  decoding,  respectively.   p[ath]enc[ode]  and  p[ath]dec[ode] perform a slightly modified
                 operation which should be better for pathnames: it does not allow a tilde ‘~’, and will neither
                 accept hyphen-minus ‘-’ nor dot ‘’.  as an initial character.  The remains of the line form the
                 URL data which is to be converted.  This is a character set agnostic operation, and it may thus
                 decode bytes which are invalid in the current ttycharset.

                 Supports vput (see “Command modifiers”), and  manages  the  error  number  !.   If  the  coding
                 operation fails the error number ! is set to ^ERR-CANCELED, and the unmodified input is used as
                 the  result;  the  error  number may change again due to output or result storage errors.  [v15
                 behaviour may differ] This command does not know about URLs beside what is documented.   (vexpr
                 offers a makeprint subcommand, shall the URL be displayed.)

       varshow   [Only  new  quoting  rules]  This  command produces the same output as the listing mode of set,
                 including verboseity adjustments, but only for the given variables.

       verify    [Option] Takes a message list and verifies each message.  If a message is not a  S/MIME  signed
                 message,  verification  will  fail  for it.  The verification process checks if the message was
                 signed using a valid certificate, if the message sender's email address matches  one  of  those
                 contained within the certificate, and if the message content has been altered.

       version   Shows the version and features of S-nail, optionally in a more verbose form which also includes
                 the   build  and  running  system  environment.   This  command  supports  vput  (see  “Command
                 modifiers”).

       vexpr     [Only new quoting rules] A multiplexer command which offers signed 64-bit numeric calculations,
                 as well as other, mostly string-based operations.  C-style byte string operations are available
                 via csop.  The first argument defines the number, type, and meaning of the remaining arguments.
                 An empty number argument is treated as 0.  Supports vput (see “Command modifiers”).  The result
                 shown in case of errors is ‘-1’ for usage errors  and  numeric  operations,  the  empty  string
                 otherwise; “soft” errors, like when a search operation failed, will also set the ! error number
                 to  ^ERR-NODATA.   Except  when  otherwise  noted numeric arguments are parsed as signed 64-bit
                 numbers, and errors will be reported in the error number ! as the numeric error ^ERR-RANGE.

                 Numeric operations work on one or two signed 64-bit integers.  Numbers prefixed  with  ‘0x’  or
                 ‘0X’  are  interpreted  as hexadecimal (base 16) numbers, whereas ‘0’ indicates octal (base 8),
                 and ‘0b’ as well as ‘0B’ denote binary (base 2) numbers.  It is possible to  use  any  base  in
                 between  2  and  36,  inclusive, with the ‘BASE#number’ notation, where the base is given as an
                 unsigned decimal number, e.g., ‘16#AFFE’ is a different way of specifying a hexadecimal number.
                 Unsigned interpretation of a number can be enforced by prefixing an  ‘u’  (case-insensitively),
                 e.g., ‘u-110’; this is not necessary for power-of-two bases (2, 4, 8, 16 and 32), which will be
                 interpreted  as  unsigned  by  default,  but  it  still  makes  a difference regarding overflow
                 detection and overflow constant.  It is possible to enforce signed interpretation by  (instead)
                 prefixing  a  ‘s’  (case-insensitively).  The number sign notation uses a permissive parse mode
                 and as such supports complicated conditions out of the box:

                       ? wysh set ifs=:;read i;unset ifs;echo $i;vexpr pb 2 10#$i
                          -009
                       <   -009>
                       0b1001

                 One integer is expected by assignment (equals sign ‘=’), which does  nothing  but  parsing  the
                 argument,  thus  detecting  validity  and  possible overflow conditions, unary not (tilde ‘~’),
                 which creates the bitwise complement, and unary plus and  minus.   Two  integers  are  used  by
                 addition  (plus  sign  ‘+’),  subtraction  (hyphen-minus  ‘-’),  multiplication (asterisk ‘*’),
                 division (solidus ‘/’) and modulo (percent sign ‘%’), as well  as  for  the  bitwise  operators
                 logical  or  (vertical  bar  ‘|’,  to  be quoted) , bitwise and (ampersand ‘&’, to be quoted) ,
                 bitwise xor (circumflex ‘^’), the bitwise signed left- and right shifts (‘<<’, ‘>>’),  as  well
                 as for the unsigned right shift ‘>>>’.

                 Another  numeric  operation is pbase, which takes a number base in between 2 and 36, inclusive,
                 and will act on the second number given just the same as what equals sign  ‘=’  does,  but  the
                 number  result  will  be formatted in the base given, as a signed 64-bit number unless unsigned
                 interpretation of the input number had been forced (with an u prefix).

                 Numeric operations support a saturated mode via the question  mark  ‘?’  modifier  suffix;  the
                 keyword  ‘saturated’  is  optional,  e.g., ‘+?’, ‘+?satu’, and ‘+?saturated’ are identical.  In
                 saturated mode overflow errors and division and modulo by zero are no longer reported  via  the
                 exit  status,  but  the result will linger at the minimum or maximum possible value, instead of
                 overflowing (or trapping).  This is true also for the argument parse  step.   For  the  bitwise
                 shifts, the saturated maximum is 63.  Any caught overflow will be reported via the error number
                 ! as ^ERR-OVERFLOW.

                       ? vput vexpr res -? +1 -9223372036854775808
                       ? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res
                       0/75/OVERFLOW:-9223372036854775808

                 Character set agnostic string functions have no notion of locale settings and character sets.

                 file-expand Performs the usual “Filename transformations” on its argument.

                 file-stat,  file-lstat  Perform the usual “Filename transformations” on the argument, then call
                           stat(2) and lstat(2), respectively, in order to echo some stat fields such that ‘vput
                           vexpr v file-stat FILE; eval wysh set $v’ creates accessible variables.

                 random    Generates a random string of the given length, or of PATH_MAX bytes (a constant  from
                           /usr/include)  if  the  value 0 is given; the random string will be base64url encoded
                           according to RFC 4648, and thus be usable as a (portable) filename.

                 String operations work, sufficient support provided, according  to  the  active  user's  locale
                 encoding and character set (see “Character sets”).  Where the question mark ‘?’ modifier suffix
                 is  supported,  a case-insensitive operation mode is available; the keyword ‘case’ is optional,
                 e.g., ‘regex?’ and ‘regex?case’ are identical.

                 makeprint (One-way) Converts the argument to something safely printable on the terminal.

                 regex     [Option] A string operation that will try  to  match  the  first  argument  with  the
                           regular  expression  given as the second argument.  ‘?’ modifier suffix is supported.
                           If the optional third argument has been given  then  instead  of  showing  the  match
                           offset  a  replacement  operation  is  performed: the third argument is treated as if
                           specified within dollar-single-quote (see “Shell-style argument  quoting”),  and  any
                           occurrence  of a positional parameter, e.g., 0, 1 etc. is replaced with the according
                           match group of the regular expression:

                                 ? vput vexpr res regex bananarama \
                                     (.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}au\$2'
                                 ? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
                                 1/61/NODATA::
                                 ? vput vexpr res regex?case bananarama \
                                     (.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}uauf\$2'
                                 ? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
                                 0/0/NONE:bauauframa:

       vpospar   [Only new quoting rules] Manage the positional parameter stack (see 1,  #,  *,  @  as  well  as
                 shift).   If  the first argument is ‘clear’, then the positional parameter stack of the current
                 context, or the global one, if there is none, is cleared.  If it is ‘set’, then  the  remaining
                 arguments  will  be used to (re)create the stack, if the parameter stack size limit is excessed
                 an ^ERR-OVERFLOW error will occur.

                 If the first argument is ‘quote’, a round-trip capable representation of the stack contents  is
                 created,  with each quoted parameter separated from each other with the first character of ifs,
                 and followed by the first character of if-ws, if that is not empty and  not  identical  to  the
                 first.   If that results in no separation at all a space character is used.  This mode supports
                 vput (see “Command modifiers”).  I.e., the subcommands  ‘set’  and  ‘quote’  can  be  used  (in
                 conjunction  with  eval)  to  (re)create  an  argument  stack  from  and  to  a single variable
                 losslessly.

                       ? vpospar set hey, "'you    ", world!
                       ? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
                       ? vput vpospar x quote
                       ? vpospar clear
                       ? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
                       ? eval vpospar set ${x}
                       ? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>

       visual    (v) Takes a message list and invokes the VISUAL  display  editor  on  each  message.   Modified
                 contents  are discarded unless the writebackedited variable is set, and are not used unless the
                 mailbox can be written to and the editor returns a successful exit status.  edit  can  be  used
                 instead for a less display oriented editor.

       write     (w) For conventional messages the body without all headers is written.  The original message is
                 never  marked  for  deletion  in  the  originating  mail  folder.   The output is decrypted and
                 converted to its native format as necessary.  If the output file exists, the text is  appended.
                 If a message is in MIME multipart format its first part is written to the specified file as for
                 conventional  messages,  handling  of  the  remains  depends on the execution mode.  No special
                 handling of compressed files is performed.

                 In interactive mode the user is consecutively asked for the filenames of the  processed  parts.
                 For  convience  saving of each part may be skipped by giving an empty value, the same result as
                 writing it to /dev/null.  Shell piping the part content by specifying a  leading  vertical  bar
                 ‘|’  character  for  the filename is supported.  Other user input undergoes the usual “Filename
                 transformations”, including shell pathname wildcard  pattern  expansions  (glob(7))  and  shell
                 variable  expansion  for  the  message  as  such, not the individual parts, and contents of the
                 destination file are overwritten if the file previously existed.

                 [v15 behaviour may differ] In non-interactive mode any part which does not specify  a  filename
                 is  ignored,  and  suspicious parts of filenames of the remaining parts are URL percent encoded
                 (as via urlcodec) to prevent  injection  of  malicious  character  sequences,  resulting  in  a
                 filename  that  will  be  written  into  the  current  directory.   Existing  files will not be
                 overwritten, instead the part number or a dot are appended after a number sign ‘#’ to the  name
                 until file creation succeeds (or fails due to other reasons).

       xcall     [Only new quoting rules] The sole difference to call is that the new macro is executed in place
                 of  the  current one, which will not regain control: all resources of the current macro will be
                 released first.  This implies that any setting covered  by  localopts  will  be  forgotten  and
                 covered  variables  will  become  cleaned up.  If this command is not used from within a called
                 macro it will silently be (a more expensive variant of) call.

       xit       (x) A synonym for exit.

       z         [Only new quoting rules] S-nail presents message headers in screenfuls as described  under  the
                 headers  command.   Without  arguments  this  command  scrolls  to the next window of messages,
                 likewise if the argument is ‘+’.  An argument of ‘-’ scrolls to the last, ‘^’  scrolls  to  the
                 first,  and  ‘$’  to  the  last  screen  of messages.  A number argument prefixed by ‘+’ or ‘-’
                 indicates that the window is calculated in relation to  the  current  position,  and  a  number
                 without a prefix specifies an absolute position.

       Z         [Only new quoting rules] Similar to z, but scrolls to the next or previous window that contains
                 at least one ‘new’ or flagged message.

COMMAND ESCAPES

       Command  escapes  are available in compose mode, and are used to perform special functions when composing
       messages.  Command escapes are only recognized at the beginning  of  lines,  and  consist  of  a  trigger
       (escape),  and  a  command  character.   The actual escape character can be set via the internal variable
       escape, it defaults to the tilde ‘~’.  Otherwise  ignored  whitespace  characters  following  the  escape
       character will prevent a possible addition of the command line to the [Option]al history.

       Unless  otherwise  noted  all  compose  mode command escapes ensure proper updates of the variables which
       represent the error number ! and the exit status ?.  If the variable errexit is  set  they  will,  unless
       stated  otherwise,  error  out  message  compose  mode and cause a program exit if an operation fails; an
       effect equivalent to the command modifier ignerr can however be achieved by placing  a  hyphen-minus  ‘-’
       after (possible whitespace following) the escape character.  If the [Option]al key bindings are available
       it is possible to create bindings specifically for the compose mode.

       ~~ string
                 Insert  the  string  of text in the message prefaced by a single ‘~’.  (If the escape character
                 has been changed, that character must be doubled instead.)

       ~! command
                 Execute the indicated shell command which follows, replacing unescaped exclamation  marks  with
                 the  previously  executed  command  if  the  internal  variable bang is set, then return to the
                 message.

       ~.        End  compose  mode   and   send   the   message.    The   hooks   on-compose-splice-shell   and
                 on-compose-splice, in order, will be called when set, after which, in interactive mode askatend
                 (leading  to askcc, askbcc) and askattach will be checked as well as asksend, after which a set
                 on-compose-leave hook will be called, autocc and autobcc will be joined in if  set,  finally  a
                 given message-inject-tail will be incorporated, after which the compose mode is left.

       ~: S-nail-command or ~_ S-nail-command
                 Execute the given S-nail command.  Not all commands, however, are allowed.

       ~< filename
                 Identical to ~r.

       ~<! command
                 command is executed using the shell.  Its standard output is inserted into the message.

       ~?        [Option] Write a summary of command escapes.

       ~@ [filename...]
                 Append or edit the list of attachments.  Does not manage the error number ! and the exit status
                 ?  (please  use  ~^  instead if this is a concern).  The append mode expects a list of filename
                 arguments as shell tokens (see “Shell-style  argument  quoting”;  token-separating  commas  are
                 ignored, too), to be interpreted as documented for the command line option -a, with the message
                 number exception as below.

                 Without filename arguments the attachment list is edited, entry by entry; if a filename is left
                 empty, that attachment is deleted from the list; once the end of the list is reached either new
                 attachments  may be entered or the session can be quit by committing an empty “new” attachment.
                 In non-interactive mode or in batch mode (-#) the list of attachments is effectively not edited
                 but instead recreated; again, an empty input ends list creation.

                 For all modes, if a given filename solely consists of the number sign ‘#’ followed by either  a
                 valid  message  number  of  the  currently active mailbox, or by a period ‘.’, referring to the
                 current message of the active mailbox, the so-called “dot”, then the given message is  attached
                 as   a  ‘message/rfc822’  MIME  message  part.   The  number  sign  must  be  quoted  to  avoid
                 misinterpretation as a shell comment character.

       ~| command
                 Pipe the message text through the specified filter command.  If the command gives no output  or
                 terminates  abnormally,  retain  the original text of the message.  E.g., the command fmt(1) is
                 often used as a rejustifying filter.

                 If the first character of the command is a vertical bar,  then  the  entire  message  including
                 header  fields  is  subject  to  the  filter command, e.g., ‘~|| echo Fcc: /tmp/test; cat’ will
                 prepend a file-carbon-copy message header.  Also see ~e, ~v.

       ~^ cmd [subcmd [arg3 [arg4]]]
                 Low-level compose mode command which shares semantics with digmsg.  Does not manage  the  error
                 number  !  and the exit status ?: errors are handled via the protocol, and hard errors like I/O
                 failures cannot be handled.  The protocol consists of command lines followed  by  (a)  response
                 line(s).  The first field of the response line represents a status code which specifies whether
                 a  command  was successful or not, whether result data is to be expected, and if, the format of
                 the result data.  Error status code lines may optionally contain additional context:

                 ‘210’     Status ok; the remains of the line are the result.
                 ‘211’     Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.  What follows are
                           lines of result addresses, terminated by an empty line.  All the input, including the
                           empty line, must be consumed before further commands can be  issued.   Address  lines
                           consist  of  two  fields,  first  the  plain  network  address, e.g., ‘bob@exam.ple’,
                           separated by a single ASCII SP space from the full address as known, e.g.,  ‘(Lovely)
                           Bob  <bob@exam.ple>’.  Non-network addresses use the first field to indicate the type
                           (hyphen-minus ‘-’ for files, vertical bar ‘|’ for pipes,  and  number  sign  ‘#’  for
                           names  which  will undergo alias processing) instead, the actual value will be in the
                           second field.
                 ‘212’     Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.  What follows are
                           lines of furtherly unspecified string content, terminated by an empty line.  All  the
                           input,  including  the  empty  line,  must be consumed before further commands can be
                           issued.
                 ‘500’     Syntax error; invalid command.
                 ‘501’     Syntax error in parameters or arguments.
                 ‘505’     Error: an argument fails verification.  For  example  an  invalid  address  has  been
                           specified  (also  see  expandaddr),  or  an  attempt  was  made to modify anything in
                           S-nail's own namespace, or a modifying  subcommand  has  been  used  on  a  read-only
                           message.
                 ‘506’     Error:  an otherwise valid argument is rendered invalid due to context.  For example,
                           a second address is added to a header which may consist of a single address only.

                 If a command indicates failure then the message will have remained unmodified.   Most  commands
                 can  fail  with  ‘500’  if required arguments are missing (false command usage).  The following
                 (case-insensitive) commands are supported:

                 attachment This command allows listing, removal  and  addition  of  message  attachments.   The
                          second argument specifies the subcommand to apply, one of:

                          attribute  This  uses the same search mechanism as described for remove and prints any
                                    known attributes of the first found attachment via  ‘212’  upon  success  or
                                    ‘501’  if  no  such  attachment can be found.  The attributes are written as
                                    lines of keyword and value tuples, the keyword being separated from the rest
                                    of the line with an ASCII SP space character.

                          attribute-at This uses the same search mechanism as described  for  remove-at  and  is
                                    otherwise identical to attribute.

                          attribute-set  This  uses  the same search mechanism as described for remove, and will
                                    assign the attribute given as the fourth argument, which is expected to be a
                                    value tuple of keyword and other data, separated by a ASCII SP space or  TAB
                                    tabulator  character.   If the value part is empty, then the given attribute
                                    is removed, or reset to a default value if existence  of  the  attribute  is
                                    crucial.

                                    It  returns  via  ‘210’ upon success, with the index of the found attachment
                                    following, ‘505’ for message attachments or if the given keyword is invalid,
                                    and ‘501’ if no such attachment can be found.  The following keywords may be
                                    used (case-insensitively):

                                    ‘filename’  Sets the filename of the MIME part, i.e., the name that is  used
                                                for display and when (suggesting a name for) saving (purposes).
                                    ‘content-description’   Associate   some   descriptive  information  to  the
                                                attachment's content, used in favour of the  plain  filename  by
                                                some MUAs.
                                    ‘content-id’  May  be used for uniquely identifying MIME entities in several
                                                contexts; this expects a special  reference  address  format  as
                                                defined  in  RFC 2045 and generates a ‘505’ upon address content
                                                verification failure.
                                    ‘content-type’ Defines the media type/subtype of the part, which is  managed
                                                automatically, but can be overwritten.
                                    ‘content-disposition’ Automatically set to the string ‘attachment’.

                          attribute-set-at This uses the same search mechanism as described for remove-at and is
                                    otherwise identical to attribute-set.

                          insert    Adds  the  attachment  given  as  the  third  argument, specified exactly as
                                    documented for the command line option -a, and supporting the message number
                                    extension as documented for ~@.  This reports ‘210’ upon success,  with  the
                                    index  of  the  new  attachment following, ‘505’ if the given file cannot be
                                    opened, ‘506’ if an on-the-fly performed  character  set  conversion  fails,
                                    otherwise  ‘501’  is  reported;  this  is  also  reported  if  character set
                                    conversion is requested but not available.

                          list      List all attachments via ‘212’, or report ‘501’  if  no  attachments  exist.
                                    This  command is the default command of attachment if no second argument has
                                    been given.

                          remove    This will remove the attachment given as  the  third  argument,  and  report
                                    ‘210’  upon  success  or ‘501’ if no such attachment can be found.  If there
                                    exists any path component in the given argument, then an exact match of  the
                                    path  which  has been used to create the attachment is used directly, but if
                                    only the basename of that path matches then all attachments are traversed to
                                    find an exact match first, and the removal occurs  afterwards;  if  multiple
                                    basenames  match,  a ‘506’ error occurs.  Message attachments are treated as
                                    absolute pathnames.

                                    If no path component exists in the given argument, then all attachments will
                                    be searched for ‘filename=’ parameter matches as well as for matches of  the
                                    basename  of  the  path  which  has  been  used when the attachment has been
                                    created; multiple matches result in a ‘506’.

                          remove-at This will interpret the third argument as a number and remove the attachment
                                    at that list position (counting from one!), reporting ‘210’ upon success  or
                                    ‘505’ if the argument is not a number or ‘501’ if no such attachment exists.

                 header   This  command allows listing, inspection, and editing of message headers.  Header name
                          case is not normalized, and case-insensitive comparison should be used  when  matching
                          names.  The second argument specifies the subcommand to apply, one of:

                          insert    Create  a  new  or  an  additional instance of the header given in the third
                                    argument, with the header body content as given in the fourth argument  (the
                                    remains of the line).  It may return ‘501’ if the third argument specifies a
                                    free-form  header  field name that is invalid, or if body content extraction
                                    fails to succeed, ‘505’ if any extracted address does not pass syntax and/or
                                    security checks or on S-nail namespace violations,  and  ‘506’  to  indicate
                                    prevention  of excessing a single-instance header — note that ‘Subject:’ can
                                    be appended to (a  space  separator  will  be  added  automatically  first).
                                    ‘To:’,  ‘Cc:’  or ‘Bcc:’ support the ‘?single’ modifier to enforce treatment
                                    as a single addressee, e.g., ‘header insert To?single:  exa,  <m@ple>’;  the
                                    word ‘single’ is optional.

                                    ‘210’  is  returned upon success, followed by the name of the header and the
                                    list position of the newly inserted instance.  The list position is always 1
                                    for single-instance header fields.  All free-form header fields are  managed
                                    in a single list.

                          list      Without  a  third  argument  a list of all yet existing headers is given via
                                    ‘210’; this command is the default command of header if no  second  argument
                                    has been given.  A third argument restricts output to the given header only,
                                    which may fail with ‘501’ if no such field is defined.

                          remove    This  will  remove  all instances of the header given as the third argument,
                                    reporting ‘210’ upon success, ‘501’ if no such  header  can  be  found,  and
                                    ‘505’ on S-nail namespace violations.

                          remove-at This will remove from the header given as the third argument the instance at
                                    the  list  position  (counting  from  one!)  given with the fourth argument,
                                    reporting ‘210’ upon success or ‘505’ if the list position argument is not a
                                    number or on S-nail namespace  violations,  and  ‘501’  if  no  such  header
                                    instance exists.

                          show      Shows  the  content of the header given as the third argument.  Dependent on
                                    the header type this may respond with ‘211’ or ‘212’; any failure results in
                                    ‘501’.

                          In compose-mode read-only access to optional pseudo  headers  in  the  S-nail  private
                          namespace is available:

                          ‘Mailx-Command:’
                                    The  name  of  the  command  that  generates  the message, one of ‘forward’,
                                    ‘Lreply’, ‘mail’, ‘Reply’, ‘reply’, ‘resend’.   This  pseudo  header  always
                                    exists (in compose-mode).
                          ‘Mailx-Raw-To:’
                          ‘Mailx-Raw-Cc:’
                          ‘Mailx-Raw-Bcc:’
                                    Represent   the   frozen   initial   state   of  these  headers  before  any
                                    transformation (e.g., alias, alternates, recipients-in-cc etc.) took place.
                          ‘Mailx-Orig-From:’
                          ‘Mailx-Orig-To:’
                          ‘Mailx-Orig-Cc:’
                          ‘Mailx-Orig-Bcc:’
                                    The values of said headers of the original message which has been  addressed
                                    by any of reply, forward, resend.

                 help, ?  Show an abstract of the above commands via ‘211’.

                 version  This command will print the protocol version via ‘210’.

       ~A        The same as ‘~i Sign’.

       ~a        The same as ‘~i sign’.

       ~b name ...
                 Add the given names to the list of blind carbon copy recipients.

       ~c name ...
                 Add the given names to the list of carbon copy recipients.

       ~d        Read the file specified by the DEAD variable into the message.

       ~e        Invoke the text EDITOR on the message collected so far, then return to compose mode.  ~v can be
                 used for a more display oriented editor, and ~|| offers a pipe-based editing approach.

       ~F messages
                 Read  the  named  messages  into the message being sent, including all message headers and MIME
                 parts.  If no messages are specified, read in the current message, the “dot”.

       ~f messages
                 Read the named messages into the message being sent.  If no messages are specified, read in the
                 current message, the “dot”.  Strips down the list of header  fields  according  to  the  ‘type’
                 white-  and  blacklist  selection  of  headerpick.  For MIME multipart messages, only the first
                 displayable part is included.

       ~H        Edit the message header fields ‘From:’, ‘Reply-To:’ and ‘Sender:’ by typing each  one  in  turn
                 and  allowing  the  user to edit the field.  The default values for these fields originate from
                 the from, reply-to and sender variables.

       ~h        Edit the message header fields ‘To:’, ‘Cc:’, ‘Bcc:’ and ‘Subject:’ by typing each one  in  turn
                 and allowing the user to edit the field.

       ~I variable
                 Insert  the value of the specified variable into the message.  The message remains unaltered if
                 the variable is unset or empty.  Any embedded character sequences ‘\t’ horizontal tabulator and
                 ‘\n’ line feed are expanded in posix mode; otherwise the expansion should  occur  at  set  time
                 ([v15 behaviour may differ] by using the command modifier wysh).

       ~i variable
                 Like ~I, but appends a newline character.

       ~M messages
                 Read  the named messages into the message being sent, indented by indentprefix.  If no messages
                 are specified, read the current message, the “dot”.

       ~m messages
                 Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by indentprefix.  If no  messages
                 are  specified,  read  the  current  message, the “dot”.  Strips down the list of header fields
                 according to the ‘type’ white- and blacklist  selection  of  headerpick.   For  MIME  multipart
                 messages, only the first displayable part is included.

       ~p        Display the message collected so far, prefaced by the message header fields and followed by the
                 attachment list, if any.

       ~Q        Read in the given / current message(s) according to the algorithm of quote.

       ~q        Abort  the message being sent, copying it to the file specified by the DEAD variable if save is
                 set.

       ~R filename
                 Identical to ~r, but indent each line that has been read by indentprefix.

       ~r filename [HERE-delimiter]
                 Read the named file, object to the usual “Filename transformations”, into the message; if  (the
                 expanded)  filename  is  the  hyphen-minus  ‘-’  then standard input is used, e.g., for pasting
                 purposes.  Only in this latter mode HERE-delimiter may be given: if it is data will be read  in
                 until  the  given HERE-delimiter is seen on a line by itself, and encountering EOF is an error;
                 the HERE-delimiter is a required argument in non-interactive mode; if it is single-quote quoted
                 then the pasted content will not be expanded, [v15 behaviour may  differ]  otherwise  a  future
                 version of S-nail may perform shell-style expansion on the content.

       ~s string
                 Cause  the  named string to become the current subject field.  Newline (NL) and carriage-return
                 (CR) bytes are invalid and will be normalized to space (SP) characters.

       ~t name ...
                 Add the given name(s) to the direct recipient list.

       ~U messages
                 Read in the given / current message(s) excluding all headers, indented by indentprefix.

       ~u messages
                 Read in the given / current message(s), excluding all headers.

       ~v        Invoke the VISUAL editor on the message collected so far, then return to compose mode.  ~e  can
                 be used for a less display oriented editor, and ~|| offers a pipe-based editing approach.

       ~w filename
                 Write the message onto the named file, which is object to the usual “Filename transformations”.
                 If the file exists, the message is appended to it.

       ~x        Same as ~q, except that the message is not saved at all.

INTERNAL VARIABLES

       Internal  S-nail  variables are controlled via the set and unset commands; prefixing a variable name with
       the string ‘no’ and calling set has the same effect as using unset: ‘unset crt’ and ‘set  nocrt’  do  the
       same  thing.   varshow  will  give  more  insight  on the given variable(s), and set, when called without
       arguments, will show a listing of all variables.  Both commands support  a  more  verbose  listing  mode.
       Some  well-known  variables  will also become inherited from the program “ENVIRONMENT” implicitly, others
       can be imported explicitly with the command environ and henceforth share said properties.

       Two different kinds of internal variables exist, and both of which  can  also  form  chains.   There  are
       boolean variables, which can only be in one of the two states “set” and “unset”, and value variables with
       a(n  optional)  string  value.   For  the  latter  proper  quoting is necessary upon assignment time, the
       introduction of the section “COMMANDS” documents the supported quoting rules.

             ? wysh set one=val\ 1 two="val 2" \
                 three='val "3"' four=$'val \'4\''; \
                 varshow one two three four; \
                 unset one two three four

       Dependent upon the  actual  option  string  values  may  become  interpreted  as  colour  names,  command
       specifications,  normal  text,  etc.   They  may  be treated as numbers, in which case decimal values are
       expected if so documented, but otherwise any numeric format and base that is valid and understood by  the
       vexpr command may be used, too.

       There  also  exists  a special kind of string value, the “boolean string”, which must either be a decimal
       integer (in which case ‘0’ is false and ‘1’ and any other value is true) or any of the (case-insensitive)
       strings ‘off’, ‘no’, ‘n’ and ‘false’ for a false boolean and ‘on’, ‘yes’,  ‘y’  and  ‘true’  for  a  true
       boolean;  a  special  kind  of  boolean  string  is  the “quadoption”, which is a boolean string that can
       optionally be prefixed with the (case-insensitive) term ‘ask-’, as in ‘ask-yes’, which  causes  prompting
       of the user in interactive mode, with the given boolean as the default value.

       Variable  chains  extend a plain ‘variable’ with ‘variable-HOST’ and ‘variable-USER@HOST’ variants.  Here
       ‘HOST’ will be converted to all lowercase when looked up (but not when the variable is  set  or  unset!),
       [Option]ally  IDNA  converted,  and  indeed  means  ‘server:port’  if  a ‘port’ had been specified in the
       contextual Uniform Resource Locator URL, see “On URL syntax and credential  lookup”.   Even  though  this
       mechanism  is  based  on  URLs  no  URL  percent encoding may be applied to neither of ‘USER’ nor ‘HOST’,
       variable chains need to be specified using raw data; the mentioned section contains examples.   Variables
       which  support  chains  are  explicitly  documented  as such, and S-nail treats the base name of any such
       variable special, meaning that users should not create custom names like ‘variable-xyz’ in order to avoid
       false classifications and treatment of such variables.

   Initial settings
       The standard POSIX 2008/Cor 2-2016 mandates the following initial variable settings: noallnet,  noappend,
       asksub,  noaskbcc,  noautoprint,  nobang,  nocmd,  nocrt,  nodebug,  nodot,  escape  set to ‘~’, noflipr,
       nofolder, header, nohold, noignore, noignoreeof, nokeep, nokeepsave, nometoo, nooutfolder, nopage, prompt
       set to ‘? ’, noquiet, norecord, save, nosendwait, noshowto, noSign, nosign, toplines set to ‘5’.

       However, S-nail has built-in some initial (and some default) settings which  (may)  diverge,  others  may
       become adjusted by one of the “Resource files”.  Displaying the former is accomplished via set: ‘$ s-nail
       -:/  -v  -Xset -Xx’.  In general this implementation sets (and has extended the meaning of) sendwait, and
       does not support the noonehop variable – use command  line  options  or  mta-arguments  to  pass  options
       through  to  a  mta.   The  default global resource file sets, among others, the variables hold, keep and
       keepsave, establishes a default headerpick selection etc., and should thus be taken into account.

   Variables
       ?         (Read-only) The exit status of the last command, or the return value of the macro called  last.
                 This  status  has  a  meaning  in the state machine: in conjunction with errexit any non-0 exit
                 status will cause a program exit, and in posix mode  any  error  while  loading  (any  of  the)
                 resource  files will have the same effect.  ignerr, one of the “Command modifiers”, can be used
                 to instruct the state machine to ignore errors.

       !         (Read-only) The current error number (errno(3)), which is set after an error  occurred;  it  is
                 also  available  via  ^ERR,  and  the  error  name  and documentation string can be queried via
                 ^ERRNAME and ^ERRDOC.  [v15 behaviour may differ] This machinery is new and the error number is
                 only really usable if a command explicitly states that it manages the variable  !,  for  others
                 errno  will  be  used  in  case  of  errors, or ^ERR-INVAL if that is 0: it thus may or may not
                 reflect the real error.  The error number may be set with the command return.

       ^         (Read-only) This is a multiplexer variable which performs dynamic expansion  of  the  requested
                 state or condition, of which there are:

                 ^ERR, ^ERRDOC, ^ERRNAME
                           The  number,  documentation, and name of the current errno(3), respectively, which is
                           usually set after an error occurred.  The documentation is an [Option], the  name  is
                           used  if  not  available.   [v15  behaviour  may differ] This machinery is new and is
                           usually reliable only if a command explicitly states that it manages the variable  !,
                           which is effectively identical to ^ERR.  Each of those variables can be suffixed with
                           a  hyphen  minus  followed by a name or number, in which case the expansion refers to
                           the given error.  Note this is a direct mapping of (a subset  of)  the  system  error
                           values:

                                 define work {
                                   eval echo \$1: \$^ERR-$1:\
                                     \$^ERRNAME-$1: \$^ERRDOC-$1
                                   vput vexpr i + "$1" 1
                                   if [ $i -lt 16 ]
                                     \xcall work $i
                                   end
                                 }
                                 call work 0
                 ^ERRQUEUE-COUNT, ^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS
                           The  number  of messages present in the [Option]al log queue of errors, and a boolean
                           which indicates whether the queue is not  empty,  respectively;  both  are  always  0
                           unless features indicates ‘+errors’.

       *         (Read-only)  Expands all positional parameters (see 1), separated by the first character of the
                 value of ifs.  [v15 behaviour may differ] The special semantics of the  equally  named  special
                 parameter of the sh(1) are not yet supported.

       @         (Read-only)  Expands  all  positional  parameters  (see 1), separated by a space character.  If
                 placed in double quotation marks, each positional parameter is properly quoted to expand  to  a
                 single parameter again.

       #         (Read-only)  Expands  to  the number of positional parameters, i.e., the size of the positional
                 parameter stack in decimal.

       0         (Read-only) Inside the scope of a defined and called macro this expands  to  the  name  of  the
                 calling  macro,  or  to  the  empty  string  if  the  macro is running from top-level.  For the
                 [Option]al regular expression search and replace operator of vexpr this expands to  the  entire
                 matching expression.  It represents the program name in global context.

       1         (Read-only)  Access  of the positional parameter stack.  All further parameters can be accessed
                 with this syntax, too, e.g., ‘2’, ‘3’ etc.; positional parameters can be shifted off the  stack
                 by calling shift.  The parameter stack contains, e.g., the arguments of a called defined macro,
                 the  matching  groups  of  the  [Option]al  regular expression search and replace expression of
                 vexpr, and can be explicitly created or overwritten with the command vpospar.

       account   (Read-only) Is set to the active account.

       add-file-recipients
                 (Boolean) When file or pipe recipients have been specified, mention them in  the  corresponding
                 address fields of the message instead of silently stripping them from their recipient list.  By
                 default such addressees are not mentioned.

       allnet    (Boolean) Causes only the local part to be evaluated when comparing addresses.

       append    (Boolean)  Causes  messages  saved  in  the  “secondary mailbox” MBOX to be appended to the end
                 rather than prepended.  This should always be set.

       askatend  (Boolean) Causes the prompts for ‘Cc:’ and ‘Bcc:’ lists to appear after the  message  has  been
                 edited.

       askattach
                 (Boolean)  If  set,  S-nail  asks  an  interactive  user for files to attach at the end of each
                 message; An empty line finalizes the list.

       askcc     (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for carbon copy recipients (at the end  of
                 each message if askatend or bsdcompat are set).

       askbcc    (Boolean)  Causes  the interactive user to be prompted for blind carbon copy recipients (at the
                 end of each message if askatend or bsdcompat are set).

       asksend   (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for confirmation to send  the  message  or
                 reenter compose mode after having been shown an envelope summary.  This is by default enabled.

       asksign   (Boolean)[Option]  Causes the interactive user to be prompted if the message is to be signed at
                 the end of each message.  The smime-sign variable is ignored when this variable is set.

       asksub    (Boolean) Causes S-nail to prompt the interactive user for the subject  upon  entering  compose
                 mode unless a subject already exists.

       attrlist  A  sequence  of characters to display in the ‘attribute’ column of the headline as shown in the
                 display of headers; each for one type of messages (see  “Message  states”),  with  the  default
                 being  ‘NUROSPMFAT+-$~’  or  ‘NU  *HMFAT+-$~’ if the bsdflags variable is set, in the following
                 order:

                 ‘N’       new.
                 ‘U’       unread but old.
                 ‘R’       new but read.
                 ‘O’       read and old.
                 ‘S’       saved.
                 ‘P’       preserved.
                 ‘M’       mboxed.
                 ‘F’       flagged.
                 ‘A’       answered.
                 ‘T’       draft.
                 ‘+’       [v15 behaviour may differ] start of  a  (collapsed)  thread  in  threaded  mode  (see
                           autosort, thread);
                 ‘-’       [v15  behaviour  may  differ]  an  uncollapsed  thread in threaded mode; only used in
                           conjunction with -L.
                 ‘$’       classified as spam.
                 ‘~’       classified as possible spam.

       autobcc   Specifies a list of recipients to which a blind carbon copy of each outgoing  message  will  be
                 sent automatically.

       autocc    Specifies  a  list  of  recipients to which a carbon copy of each outgoing message will be sent
                 automatically.

       autocollapse
                 (Boolean) Causes threads to be collapsed automatically when .Ql  thread  Ns  ed  sort  mode  is
                 entered (see the collapse command).

       autoprint
                 (Boolean)  Enable  automatic  typeing  of  a(n  existing) “successive” message after delete and
                 undelete commands, e.g., the message that becomes the new “dot” is shown automatically, as  via
                 dp or dt.

       autosort  Causes  sorted  mode  (see the sort command) to be entered automatically with the value of this
                 variable as sorting method when a folder is opened, e.g., ‘set autosort=thread’.

       bang      (Boolean) Enables the substitution of all not (reverse-solidus) escaped  exclamation  mark  ‘!’
                 characters  by the contents of the last executed command for the ! shell escape command and ~!,
                 one of the compose mode “COMMAND ESCAPES”.  If this variable is  not  set  no  reverse  solidus
                 stripping is performed.

       bind-timeout
                 [Option]  Terminals  generate  multi-byte sequences for certain forms of input, for example for
                 function and other special  keys.   Some  terminals  however  do  not  write  these  multi-byte
                 sequences  as  a  whole,  but byte-by-byte, and the latter is what S-nail actually reads.  This
                 variable specifies the timeout in milliseconds that the MLE (see “On terminal control and  line
                 editor”) waits for more bytes to arrive unless it considers a sequence “complete”.  The default
                 is 200.

       bsdcompat
                 (Boolean)  Sets  some  cosmetical  features  to  traditional  BSD style; has the same affect as
                 setting askatend and all other variables prefixed with ‘bsd’; it also changes the behaviour  of
                 emptystart (which does not exist in BSD).

       bsdflags  (Boolean)  Changes the letters shown in the first column of a header summary to traditional BSD
                 style.

       bsdheadline
                 (Boolean) Changes the display of columns in a header summary to traditional BSD style.

       bsdmsgs   (Boolean) Changes some informational messages to traditional BSD style.

       bsdorder  (Boolean) Causes the ‘Subject:’ field to appear immediately after the ‘To:’  field  in  message
                 headers and with the ~h “COMMAND ESCAPES”.

       build-cc, build-ld, build-os, build-rest
                 (Read-only)  The  build  environment,  including the compiler, the linker, the operating system
                 S-nail has been build for, usually taken from uname(1) via ‘uname -s’, and then lowercased,  as
                 well  as  all  the  possibly interesting rest of the configuration and build environment.  This
                 information is also available in the verbose output of the command version.

       charset-7bit
                 The value that should appear in the ‘charset=’ parameter of ‘Content-Type:’ MIME header  fields
                 when no character set conversion of the message data was performed.  This defaults to US-ASCII,
                 and the chosen character set should be US-ASCII compatible.

       charset-8bit
                 [Option]  The  default  8-bit  character  set  that  is  used as an implicit last member of the
                 variable sendcharsets.  This defaults to UTF-8 if character  set  conversion  capabilities  are
                 available,  and  to  ISO-8859-1  otherwise (unless the operating system environment is known to
                 always and exclusively support UTF-8 locales), in which case the only supported  character  set
                 is ttycharset and this variable is effectively ignored.

       charset-unknown-8bit
                 [Option]  RFC 1428 specifies conditions when internet mail gateways shall “upgrade” the content
                 of a mail message by using a character set  with  the  name  ‘unknown-8bit’.   Because  of  the
                 unclassified  nature of this character set S-nail will not be capable to convert this character
                 set to any other character set.  If this variable is  set  any  message  part  which  uses  the
                 character  set  ‘unknown-8bit’ is assumed to really be in the character set given in the value,
                 otherwise the (final) value of charset-8bit is used for this purpose.

                 This variable will also be taken into account if a MIME type (see “The mime.types files”) of  a
                 MIME message part that uses the ‘binary’ character set is forcefully treated as text.

       cmd       The default value for the pipe command.

       colour-disable
                 (Boolean)[Option]  Forcefully  disable  usage  of  colours.   Also  see  the  section “Coloured
                 display”.

       colour-pager
                 (Boolean)[Option] Whether colour shall be used for output that is paged  through  PAGER.   Note
                 that  pagers  may  need  special command line options, e.g., less(1) requires the option -R and
                 lv(1) the option -c in order to support colours.  Often doing manual adjustments is unnecessary
                 since S-nail may perform adjustments dependent on the value of the environment  variable  PAGER
                 (see there for more).

       contact-mail, contact-web
                 (Read-only)  Addresses  for  contact  per  email  and web, respectively, e.g., for bug reports,
                 suggestions, or help regarding  S-nail.   The  former  can  be  used  directly:  ‘?  eval  mail
                 $contact-mail’.

       crt       In  a(n interactive) terminal session, then if this valued variable is set it will be used as a
                 threshold to determine how many lines the given output has to span before it will be  displayed
                 via  the  configured  PAGER; Usage of the PAGER can be forced by setting this to the value ‘0’,
                 setting it without a value will deduce the current height of the terminal screen to compute the
                 threshold (see LINES, screen and stty(1)).  [v15 behaviour may differ] At the moment this  uses
                 the  count of lines of the message in wire format, which, dependent on the mime-encoding of the
                 message, is unrelated to the number of display lines.  (The software is  old  and  historically
                 the relation was a given thing.)

       customhdr
                 Define  a  set  of  custom headers to be injected into newly composed or forwarded messages.  A
                 custom header consists of the field name followed by a colon ‘:’ and the  field  content  body.
                 Standard header field names cannot be overwritten by a custom header.  Different to the command
                 line  option  -C the variable value is interpreted as a comma-separated list of custom headers:
                 to include commas in header bodies they need  to  become  escaped  with  reverse  solidus  ‘\’.
                 Headers can be managed more freely in compose mode via ~^.

                       ? set customhdr='Hdr1: Body1-1\, Body1-2, Hdr2: Body2'

       datefield
                 Controls  the  appearance  of  the  ‘%d’  date  and  time  format specification of the headline
                 variable, that is used, for example, when viewing the summary of headers.  If unset,  then  the
                 local  receiving date is used and displayed unformatted, otherwise the message sending ‘Date:’.
                 It is possible to assign a strftime(3) format string  and  control  formatting,  but  embedding
                 newlines  via the ‘%n’ format is not supported, and will result in display errors.  The default
                 is ‘%Y-%m-%d %H:%M’, and also see datefield-markout-older.

       datefield-markout-older
                 Only used in conjunction with datefield.  Can be  used  to  create  a  visible  distinction  of
                 messages dated more than a day in the future, or older than six months, a concept comparable to
                 the  -l  option  of the POSIX utility ls(1).  If set to the empty string, then the plain month,
                 day and year of the ‘Date:’ will be displayed, but  a  strftime(3)  format  string  to  control
                 formatting can be assigned.  The default is ‘%Y-%m-%d’.

       debug     (Boolean)  Enables  debug  messages  and  obsoletion  warnings, disables the actual delivery of
                 messages and also implies norecord as well as nosave.

       disposition-notification-send
                 (Boolean)[Option] Emit a ‘Disposition-Notification-To:’ header (RFC  3798)  with  the  message.
                 This requires the from variable to be set.

       dot       (Boolean)  When  dot  is  set,  a  period  ‘.’  on  a  line  by  itself during message input in
                 (interactive or batch -#) compose mode will be treated as end-of-message (in  addition  to  the
                 normal end-of-file condition).  This behaviour is implied in posix mode with a set ignoreeof.

       dotlock-disable
                 (Boolean)[Option] Disable creation of “dotlock files” for MBOX databases.

       dotlock-ignore-error
                 [Obsolete](Boolean)[Option]   Ignore  failures  when  creating  “dotlock  files”.   Please  use
                 dotlock-disable instead.

       editalong
                 If this variable is set then the editor is started automatically when a message is composed  in
                 interactive  mode.   If the value starts with the letter ‘v’ then this acts as if ~v, otherwise
                 as if ~e (see “COMMAND ESCAPES”) had been specified.  The editheaders variable is  implied  for
                 this automatically spawned editor session.

       editheaders
                 (Boolean) When a message is edited while being composed, its header is included in the editable
                 text.

       emptystart
                 (Boolean)  When  entering  interactive mode S-nail normally writes “No mail for user” and exits
                 immediately if a mailbox is empty or does not exist.  If this variable  is  set  S-nail  starts
                 even  with  an  empty  or  non-existent  mailbox  (the  latter behaviour furtherly depends upon
                 bsdcompat, though).

       errexit   (Boolean) Let each command with a non-0 exit status, including every called macro which returns
                 a non-0 status, cause a program exit unless prefixed by ignerr (see “Command modifiers”).  This
                 also affects “COMMAND ESCAPES”, but which use a different  modifier  for  ignoring  the  error.
                 Please refer to the variable ? for more on this topic.

       escape    The first character of this value defines the escape character for “COMMAND ESCAPES” in compose
                 mode.   The  default  value  is  the  character tilde ‘~’.  If set to the empty string, command
                 escapes are disabled.

       expandaddr
                 If unset then file and command pipeline address targets are not allowed, and any  such  address
                 will  be  filtered  out,  giving a warning message.  If set then all possible recipient address
                 specifications will be accepted, unless the optional value  is  more  specific  (also  see  “On
                 sending  mail,  and  non-interactive  mode”).   If the value contains ‘restrict’ then behaviour
                 equals the former unless in interactive mode, or when tilde commands  were  enabled  explicitly
                 via  -~  or -#, in which case it equals the latter, and thus allows all addressees.  ‘restrict’
                 really acts like ‘restrict,-all,+name,+addr’, so care for ordering issues must be taken.

                 Indeed the value is interpreted as a comma-separated list of  case-insensitive  strings.   Hard
                 send  errors  can  be enforced for disallowed address types by setting ‘fail’; by default these
                 are only filtered out.  User name receivers addressing valid local users can be expanded  to  a
                 network  address (also see hostname) by setting ‘namehostex’.  Address targets can be added and
                 removed with a plus sign  ‘+’  or  hyphen-minus  ‘-’  prefix,  respectively:  the  value  ‘all’
                 addresses  all  possible  specifications, ‘fcc’ whitelists targets specified via ‘Fcc:’ headers
                 regardless of other settings, ‘file’ file targets (it includes ‘fcc’), ‘pipe’ command  pipeline
                 targets,  ‘name’  plain user names left for further expansion by the MTA (implicitly disallowed
                 for the SMTP based mta), and ‘addr’ network addresses.  Targets are interpreted  in  the  given
                 order,  so  that  ‘restrict,fail,+file,-all,+addr’  will  cause hard errors for any non-network
                 address recipient address unless running interactively or having been started with  the  option
                 -~ or -#; in the latter case(s) any address may be used, then.

                 Historically  invalid  network  addressees  were  silently stripped off — shall they cause hard
                 errors instead it must be ensured that ‘failinvaddr’ is an entry of the list  (it  really  acts
                 like  ‘failinvaddr,+addr’).   Likewise,  ‘domaincheck’  (actually ‘domaincheck,+addr’) compares
                 address domain names against a whitelist and strips off (‘fail’  for  hard  errors)  addressees
                 which fail this test; the domain name ‘localhost’ and the non-empty value of hostname (the real
                 hostname  otherwise)  are  always whitelisted, expandaddr-domaincheck can be set to extend this
                 list.  Finally some  address  providers  (for  example  -b,  -c  and  all  other  command  line
                 recipients)  will  be  evaluated  as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see “Shell-style
                 argument quoting”) if the value list contains the string ‘shquote’.

       expandaddr-domaincheck
                 Can be set to a comma-separated list of domain  names  which  should  be  whitelisted  for  the
                 evaluation  of  the  ‘domaincheck’  mode  of  expandaddr.   IDNA  encoding is not automatically
                 performed, addrcodec can be used to prepare the domain (of an address).

       expandargv
                 Unless this variable is set additional mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent)  arguments  from  the  command
                 line,  as  can  be  given  after  a -- separator, results in a program termination with failure
                 status.  The same can be accomplished by using the special (case-insensitive) value ‘fail’.   A
                 lesser  strict  variant is the otherwise identical ‘restrict’, which does accept such arguments
                 in interactive mode, or if tilde commands were enabled explicitly by using one of  the  command
                 line options -~ or -#.  The empty value will allow unconditional usage.

       features  (Read-only)  String giving a list of optional features.  Features are preceded with a plus sign
                 ‘+’ if they are available, with a hyphen-minus  ‘-’  otherwise.   The  output  of  the  command
                 version includes this information in a more pleasant output.

       flipr     (Boolean)  This setting reverses the meanings of a set of reply commands, turning the lowercase
                 variants, which by default address all recipients included in the header of a  message  (reply,
                 respond,  followup)  into  the  uppercase  variants,  which  by default address the sender only
                 (Reply,  Respond,  Followup)  and  vice  versa.   The  commands   replysender,   respondsender,
                 followupsender  as  well  as  replyall, respondall, followupall are not affected by the current
                 setting of flipr.

       folder    The default path under which mailboxes are to be saved: filenames that begin with the plus sign
                 ‘+’ will have the plus sign replaced with the value of this variable if set, otherwise the plus
                 sign will remain unchanged when doing “Filename transformations”; also see  file  for  more  on
                 this  topic,  and  know about standard imposed implications of outfolder.  The value supports a
                 subset of transformations itself, and if the non-empty value does not start with a solidus ‘/’,
                 then the value of HOME will be prefixed automatically.  Once  the  actual  value  is  evaluated
                 first, the internal variable folder-resolved will be updated for caching purposes.

       folder-hook-FOLDER, folder-hook
                 Names  a  defined macro which will be called whenever a file is opened.  The macro will also be
                 invoked when new mail arrives, but message lists for commands  executed  from  the  macro  only
                 include  newly  arrived  messages  then.   localopts are activated by default in a folder hook,
                 causing the covered settings to be reverted once the folder is left again.

                 The specialized form will override the generic one if ‘FOLDER’ matches the file that is opened.
                 Unlike  other  folder  specifications,  the  fully  expanded  name   of   a   folder,   without
                 metacharacters,  is  used  to  avoid ambiguities.  However, if the mailbox resides under folder
                 then the usual ‘+’ specification is tried in addition, e.g., if  folder  is  “mail”  (and  thus
                 relative   to   the   user's  home  directory)  then  /home/usr1/mail/sent  will  be  tried  as
                 ‘folder-hook-/home/usr1/mail/sent’ first, but then followed by ‘folder-hook-+sent’.

       folder-resolved
                 (Read-only) Set to the fully resolved path of folder once that evaluation has occurred;  rather
                 internal.

       followup-to
                 (Boolean)  Controls  whether a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is generated when sending messages to
                 known mailing lists.  The user as determined via from (or, if that contains multiple addresses,
                 sender) will be placed in there if any list addressee is  not  a  subscribed  list.   Also  see
                 followup-to-honour and the commands mlist, mlsubscribe, reply and Lreply.

       followup-to-add-cc
                 (Boolean)  Controls  whether  the user will be added to the messages' ‘Cc:’ list in addition to
                 placing an entry in ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ (see followup-to).

       followup-to-honour
                 Controls whether a ‘Mail-Followup-To:’ header is honoured when group-replying to a message  via
                 reply  or  Lreply.   This is a quadoption; if set without a value it defaults to “yes”, and see
                 followup-to.

       forward-as-attachment
                 (Boolean) Original messages are normally sent as inline text with the forward command, and only
                 the first part of a multipart message is included.  With this setting enabled messages are sent
                 as unmodified MIME ‘message/rfc822’ attachments with all of their parts included.

       forward-inject-head, forward-inject-tail
                 The strings to put  before  and  after  the  text  of  a  message  with  the  forward  command,
                 respectively.   The  former defaults to ‘-------- Original Message --------\n’.  Special format
                 directives in these strings will be expanded if possible, and if so configured the output  will
                 be folded according to quote-fold; for more please refer to quote-inject-head.  These variables
                 are ignored if the forward-as-attachment variable is set.

       from      The  address  (or  a  list  of  addresses) to put into the ‘From:’ field of the message header,
                 quoting RFC 5322: the author(s) of the message, that is, the mailbox(es) of  the  person(s)  or
                 system(s) responsible for the writing of the message.  According to that RFC setting the sender
                 variable  is  required  if from contains more than one address.  Dependent on the context these
                 addresses are handled as if they were in the list of alternates.

                 If a file-based MTA is used, then from (or, if that contains multiple  addresses,  sender)  can
                 nonetheless be enforced to appear as the envelope sender address at the MTA protocol level (the
                 RFC 5321 reverse-path), either by using the -r command line option (with an empty argument; see
                 there  for  the  complete  picture  on  this  topic),  or  by  setting  the  internal  variable
                 r-option-implicit.

                 If the machine's hostname is not valid at the Internet (for example at a dialup  machine)  then
                 either  this  variable  or  hostname  ([v15-compat] a SMTP-based mta adds even more fine-tuning
                 capabilities with smtp-hostname) have to be set: if so the message and MIME part related unique
                 ID  fields  ‘Message-ID:’  and  ‘Content-ID:’  will  be  created  (except  when  disallowed  by
                 message-id-disable or stealthmua).

       fullnames
                 (Boolean)  Due  to historical reasons comments and name parts of email addresses are removed by
                 default when sending mail, replying to or forwarding a message.  If this variable is  set  such
                 stripping is not performed.

       fwdheading
                 [Obsolete] Predecessor of forward-inject-head.

       header    (Boolean) Causes the header summary to be written at startup and after commands that affect the
                 number  of  messages  or  the  order of messages in the current folder.  Unless in posix mode a
                 header summary will also be displayed on folder changes.  The command line  option  -N  can  be
                 used to set noheader.

       headline  A format string to use for the summary of headers.  Format specifiers in the given string start
                 with  a percent sign ‘%’ and may be followed by an optional decimal number indicating the field
                 width — if that is negative, the field is to be left-aligned.  Names and addresses are  subject
                 to modifications according to showname and showto.  Valid format specifiers are:

                 ‘%%’      A plain percent sign.
                 ‘%>’      “Dotmark”:  a  space  character  but  for  the  current message (“dot”), for which it
                           expands to ‘>’ (dependent on headline-plain).
                 ‘%<’      “Dotmark”: a space character but for  the  current  message  (“dot”),  for  which  it
                           expands to ‘<’ (dependent on headline-plain).
                 ‘%$’      [Option]  The  spam  score  of  the  message,  as has been classified via the command
                           spamrate.  Shows only a replacement character if there is no spam support.
                 ‘%a’      Message attribute character (status flag); the actual  content  can  be  adjusted  by
                           setting attrlist.
                 ‘%d’      The  date  found  in  the  ‘Date:’  header  of the message when datefield is set (the
                           default), otherwise the date when  the  message  was  received.   Formatting  can  be
                           controlled   by   assigning   a   strftime(3)   format   string   to  datefield  (and
                           datefield-markout-older).
                 ‘%e’      The indenting level in ‘thread’ed sort mode.
                 ‘%f’      The address of the message sender.
                 ‘%i’      The message thread tree structure.  (Note that this format does not support  a  field
                           width, and honours headline-plain.)
                 ‘%L’      Mailing  list status: is the addressee of the message a known (mlist) or mlsubscribed
                           mailing list?
                 ‘%l’      The number of lines of the message, if available.
                 ‘%m’      Message number.
                 ‘%o’      The number of octets (bytes) in the message, if available.
                 ‘%S’      Message subject (if any) in double quotes.
                 ‘%s’      Message subject (if any).
                 ‘%t’      The position in threaded/sorted order.
                 ‘%U’      The value 0 except in an IMAP mailbox, where it expands to the UID of the message.

                 The default is ‘%>%a%m %-18f %16d %4l/%-5o %i%-s’,  or  ‘%>%a%m %20-f  %16d %3l/%-5o %i%-S’  if
                 bsdcompat is set.  Also see attrlist, headline-plain and headline-bidi.

       headline-bidi
                 Bidirectional  text  requires  special  treatment  when displaying headers, because numbers (in
                 dates or for file sizes etc.) will not affect the current text direction, in  effect  resulting
                 in  ugly line layouts when arabic or other right-to-left text is to be displayed.  On the other
                 hand only a minority of terminals is capable to correctly handle  direction  changes,  so  that
                 user  interaction  is necessary for acceptable results.  Note that extended host system support
                 is required nonetheless, e.g., detection of the terminal character set is one precondition; and
                 this feature only works in an Unicode (i.e., UTF-8) locale.

                 In general setting this variable will cause S-nail to encapsulate text fields  that  may  occur
                 when  displaying  headline  (and  some  other  fields,  like dynamic expansions in prompt) with
                 special Unicode control sequences; it is possible to fine-tune the terminal  support  level  by
                 assigning  a value: no value (or any value other than ‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’) will make S-nail assume
                 that the terminal is capable to properly deal with Unicode version 6.3, in which case  text  is
                 embedded  in  a  pair  of  U+2068  (FIRST  STRONG ISOLATE) and U+2069 (POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE)
                 characters.  In addition no space on the line is reserved for these characters.

                 Weaker support is chosen by using the value ‘1’ (Unicode 6.3,  but  reserve  the  room  of  two
                 spaces for writing the control sequences onto the line).  The values ‘2’ and ‘3’ select Unicode
                 1.1  support  (U+200E,  LEFT-TO-RIGHT  MARK);  the latter again reserves room for two spaces in
                 addition.

       headline-plain
                 (Boolean) On Unicode (UTF-8) aware terminals enhanced graphical symbols are used by default for
                 certain entries of headline.  If this variable is set only basic US-ASCII symbols will be used.

       history-file
                 [Option] If a line editor is available then this can be set to name the  (expandable)  path  of
                 the location of a permanent history file; also see history-size.

       history-gabby
                 (Boolean)[Option] Add more entries to the history as is normally done.

       history-gabby-persist
                 (Boolean)[Option]  S-nail's  own  MLE  will  not  save  the additional history-gabby entries in
                 persistent storage unless this variable is set.  On the  other  hand  it  will  not  loose  the
                 knowledge of whether a persistent entry was gabby or not.  Also see history-file.

       history-size
                 [Option] Setting this variable imposes a limit on the number of concurrent history entries.  If
                 set to the value 0 then no further history entries will be added, and loading and incorporation
                 of the history-file upon program startup can also be suppressed by doing this.  Runtime changes
                 will not be reflected before the history is saved or loaded (again).

       hold      (Boolean) This setting controls whether messages are held in the system inbox, and it is set by
                 default.

       hostname  Used  instead  of  the  value  obtained  from  uname(3) and getaddrinfo(3) as the hostname when
                 expanding local addresses, e.g., in ‘From:’ (also see “On  sending  mail,  and  non-interactive
                 mode”,  e.g.,  for  expansion of addresses that have a valid user-, but no domain name in angle
                 brackets).  If either of from or this variable is set the message and MIME part related  unique
                 ID  fields  ‘Message-ID:’  and  ‘Content-ID:’  will  be  created  (except  when  disallowed  by
                 message-id-disable  or  stealthmua).   If  the  [Option]al  IDNA  support  is  available   (see
                 idna-disable) variable assignment is aborted when a necessary conversion fails.

                 Setting  it  to  the  empty  string  will cause the normal hostname to be used, but nonetheless
                 enables creation of said ID fields.  [v15-compat] in conjunction with  the  built-in  SMTP  mta
                 smtp-hostname  also  influences  the  results:  one  should produce some test messages with the
                 desired combination of hostname, and/or from, sender etc. first.

       idna-disable
                 (Boolean)[Option] Can be used to turn off the automatic conversion of domain names according to
                 the rules of IDNA (internationalized domain names  for  applications).   Since  the  IDNA  code
                 assumes  that  domain  names  are  specified with the ttycharset character set, an UTF-8 locale
                 charset is required to represent all possible international domain  names  (before  conversion,
                 that is).

       ifs       The  input  field  separator  that  is  used  ([v15 behaviour may differ] by some functions) to
                 determine where to split input data.

                 1.        Unsetting is treated as assigning the default value, ‘ \t\n’.
                 2.        If set to the empty value, no field splitting will be performed.
                 3.        If set to a non-empty value, all whitespace characters are extracted and assigned  to
                           the variable ifs-ws.

                 a.        ifs-ws  will  be  ignored  at  the  beginning and end of input.  Diverging from POSIX
                           shells default whitespace is removed in addition,  which  is  owed  to  the  entirely
                           different line content extraction rules.
                 b.        Each occurrence of a character of ifs will cause field-splitting, any adjacent ifs-ws
                           characters will be skipped.

       ifs-ws    (Read-only) Automatically deduced from the whitespace characters in ifs.

       ignore    (Boolean) Ignore interrupt signals from the terminal while entering messages; instead echo them
                 as ‘@’ characters and discard the current line.

       ignoreeof
                 (Boolean)  Ignore  end-of-file conditions (‘control-D’) in compose mode on message input and in
                 interactive command input.  If set an interactive command input session can  only  be  left  by
                 explicitly  using one of the commands exit and quit, and message input in compose mode can only
                 be terminated by entering a period ‘.’ on a  line  by  itself  or  by  using  the  ~.  “COMMAND
                 ESCAPES”; Setting this implies the behaviour that dot describes in posix mode.

       inbox     If  this  is  set  to  a  non-empty string it will specify the user's “primary system mailbox”,
                 overriding MAIL and the system-dependent default, and (thus) be used to replace ‘%’ when  doing
                 “Filename  transformations”; also see file for more on this topic.  The value supports a subset
                 of transformations itself.

       indentprefix
                 String used by the ~m, ~M and ~R “COMMAND ESCAPES”  and  by  the  quote  option  for  indenting
                 messages,  in  place  of  the  POSIX  mandated  default  tabulator  character  ‘\t’.   Also see
                 quote-chars.

       keep      (Boolean) If set, an empty “primary system  mailbox”  file  is  not  removed.   Note  that,  in
                 conjunction  with  posix mode any empty file will be removed unless this variable is set.  This
                 may improve the interoperability with other  mail  user  agents  when  using  a  common  folder
                 directory,  and prevents malicious users from creating fake mailboxes in a world-writable spool
                 directory.  [v15 behaviour may differ] Only local regular (MBOX) files are covered, Maildir and
                 other mailbox types will never be removed, even if empty.

       keep-content-length
                 (Boolean) When (editing messages and) writing MBOX mailbox files S-nail can be told to keep the
                 ‘Content-Length:’ and ‘Lines:’ header fields that some MUAs generate by setting this  variable.
                 Since  S-nail does neither use nor update these non-standardized header fields (which in itself
                 shows one of their conceptual problems), stripping them  should  increase  interoperability  in
                 between  MUAs  that  work  with  with  same  mailbox  files.  Note that, if this is not set but
                 writebackedited, as below, is, a possibly performed automatic stripping of these header  fields
                 already  marks  the  message as being modified.  [v15 behaviour may differ] At some future time
                 S-nail will be capable to rewrite and apply an mime-encoding to  modified  messages,  and  then
                 those fields will be stripped silently.

       keepsave  (Boolean)  When  a  message  is  saved it is usually discarded from the originating folder when
                 S-nail is quit.  This setting causes all saved message to be retained.

       line-editor-cpl-word-breaks
                 [Option] List of bytes which are used by the mle-complete tabulator completion to decide  where
                 word  boundaries  exist,  by default ‘"'@=;|:’ [v15 behaviour may differ] This mechanism is yet
                 restricted.

       line-editor-disable
                 (Boolean) Turn off any line editing capabilities (from S-nails POW, see  “On  terminal  control
                 and line editor” for more).

       line-editor-no-defaults
                 (Boolean)[Option] Do not establish any default key binding.

       log-prefix
                 Error log message prefix string (‘s-nail: ’).

       mailbox-display
                 (Read-only) The name of the current mailbox (file), possibly abbreviated for display purposes.

       mailbox-resolved
                 (Read-only) The fully resolved path of the current mailbox.

       mailx-extra-rc
                 An  additional  startup file that is loaded as the last of the “Resource files”.  Use this file
                 for commands that are not understood by other  POSIX  mailx(1)  implementations,  i.e.,  mostly
                 anything which is not covered by “Initial settings”.

       markanswered
                 (Boolean)  When  a  message is replied to and this variable is set, it is marked as having been
                 answered.  See the section “Message states”.

       mbox-fcc-and-pcc
                 (Boolean) By default all file and pipe message receivers (see expandaddr)  will  be  fed  valid
                 MBOX  database  entry  message  data  (see  file, mbox-rfc4155), and existing file targets will
                 become extended in compliance to RFC 4155.  If this variable is unset then a  plain  standalone
                 RFC 5322 message will be written, and existing file targets will be overwritten.

       mbox-rfc4155
                 (Boolean)  When  opening MBOX mailbox databases, and in order to achieve compatibility with old
                 software, the very tolerant POSIX standard rules for detecting  message  boundaries  (so-called
                 ‘From_’  lines)  are  used  instead  of  the  stricter  rules from the standard RFC 4155.  This
                 behaviour can be switched by setting this variable.

                 This may temporarily be handy when S-nail complains about invalid ‘From_’ lines when opening  a
                 MBOX: in this case setting this variable and re-opening the mailbox in question may correct the
                 result.   If  so, copying the entire mailbox to some other file, as in ‘copy * SOME-FILE’, will
                 perform proper, all-compatible ‘From_’ quoting for all detected messages, resulting in a  valid
                 MBOX  mailbox.   ([v15  behaviour may differ] The better and non-destructive approach is to re-
                 encode invalid messages, as if it would be created anew, instead of mangling the ‘From_’ lines;
                 this requires the structural code changes of the v15 rewrite.)  Finally  the  variable  can  be
                 unset again:

                       define mboxfix {
                         localopts yes; wysh set mbox-rfc4155;\
                           wysh File "${1}"; copy * "${2}"
                       }
                       call mboxfix /tmp/bad.mbox /tmp/good.mbox

       memdebug  (Boolean)  Internal  development  variable.   (Keeps  memory debug enabled even if debug is not
                 set.)

       message-id-disable
                 (Boolean) By setting this variable the generation of ‘Message-ID:’  and  ‘Content-ID:’  message
                 and MIME part headers can be completely suppressed, effectively leaving this task up to the mta
                 (Mail-Transfer-Agent) or the SMTP server.  Note that according to RFC 5321 a SMTP server is not
                 required  to add this field by itself, so it should be ensured that it accepts messages without
                 ‘Message-ID’.

       message-inject-head
                 A string to put at the beginning of each new message, followed by a  newline.   [Obsolete]  The
                 escape  sequences  tabulator  ‘\t’  and  newline  ‘\n’ are understood (use the wysh prefix when
                 setting the variable(s) instead).

       message-inject-tail
                 A string to put at the end of each new message, followed by a newline.  [Obsolete]  The  escape
                 sequences  tabulator ‘\t’ and newline ‘\n’ are understood (use the wysh prefix when setting the
                 variable(s) instead).  Also see on-compose-leave.

       metoo     (Boolean) Usually, when an alias expansion contains the sender, the sender is removed from  the
                 expansion.  Setting this option suppresses these removals.  Note that a set metoo also causes a
                 ‘-m’  option  to  be passed through to the mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent); though most of the modern
                 MTAs no longer document this flag, no MTA is known which does not support  it  (for  historical
                 compatibility).

       mime-allow-text-controls
                 (Boolean)  When  sending  messages,  each  part  of  the  message is MIME-inspected in order to
                 classify the ‘Content-Type:’  and  ‘Content-Transfer-Encoding:’  (see  mime-encoding)  that  is
                 required  to send this part over mail transport, i.e., a computation rather similar to what the
                 file(1) command produces when used with the ‘--mime’ option.

                 This classification however treats text files which are encoded in UTF-16 (seen for HTML files)
                 and similar character sets as binary octet-streams, forcefully  changing  any  ‘text/plain’  or
                 ‘text/html’  specification  to ‘application/octet-stream’: If that actually happens a yet unset
                 charset MIME parameter is set to ‘binary’, effectively making it impossible for  the  receiving
                 MUA to automatically interpret the contents of the part.

                 If this variable is set, and the data was unambiguously identified as text data at first glance
                 (by  a  ‘.txt’  or  ‘.html’  file  extension),  then  the  original ‘Content-Type:’ will not be
                 overwritten.

       mime-alternative-favour-rich
                 (Boolean) If this variable is set then  rich  MIME  alternative  parts  (e.g.,  HTML)  will  be
                 preferred  in  favour of included plain text versions when displaying messages, provided that a
                 handler exists which produces output that can be (re)integrated  into  S-nail's  normal  visual
                 display.   (E.g.,  at the time of this writing some newsletters ship their full content only in
                 the rich HTML part, whereas the plain text part only contains topic subjects.)

       mime-counter-evidence
                 Normally the ‘Content-Type:’ field is used to decide how to  handle  MIME  parts.   Some  MUAs,
                 however,  do  not  use  “The mime.types files” (also see “HTML mail and MIME attachments”) or a
                 similar  mechanism  to  correctly  classify  content,  but  specify  an  unspecific  MIME  type
                 (‘application/octet-stream’)  even  for  plain  text attachments.  If this variable is set then
                 S-nail will try to re-classify such MIME message parts, if possible, for example via a possibly
                 existing attachment filename.  A non-empty value may also be given, in which case a  number  is
                 expected, actually a carrier of bits, best specified as a binary value, e.g., ‘0b1111’.

                    If  bit  two is set (counting from 1, decimal 2) then the detected mimetype will be carried
                     along with the message and be used for deciding which MIME  handler  is  to  be  used,  for
                     example;  when  displaying  such  a  MIME  part  the part-info will indicate the overridden
                     content-type by showing a plus sign ‘+’.
                    If bit three is set (decimal 4) then the counter-evidence is always produced and a positive
                     result will be used as the MIME type, even forcefully overriding the parts given MIME type.
                    If  bit  four  is  set  (decimal  8)   as   a   last   resort   the   actual   content   of
                     ‘application/octet-stream’  parts  will  be  inspected, so that data which looks like plain
                     text can be treated as such.  This mode is even more relaxed when data is to  be  displayed
                     to  the  user  or  used  as  a  message quote (data consumers which mangle data for display
                     purposes, which includes masking of control characters, for example).

       mime-encoding
                 The MIME ‘Content-Transfer-Encoding’ to use in outgoing text messages and message parts,  where
                 applicable (7-bit clean text messages are without an encoding if possible):

                 ‘8bit’    (Or ‘8b’.)   8-bit  transport  effectively  causes  the  raw  data  be passed through
                           unchanged, but may cause problems when transferring mail messages over channels  that
                           are  not  ESMTP  (RFC  1869)  compliant.  Also, several input data constructs are not
                           allowed by the specifications and may cause a different transfer-encoding to be used.
                           By established rules and popular demand occurrences of  ‘^From_’  (see  mbox-rfc4155)
                           will  be MBOXO quoted (prefixed with greater-than sign ‘>’) instead of causing a non-
                           destructive encoding like ‘quoted-printable’ to  be  chosen,  unless  context  (e.g.,
                           message signing) requires otherwise.
                 ‘quoted-printable’
                           (Or ‘qp’.)   Quoted-printable encoding is 7-bit clean and has the property that ASCII
                           characters are passed through unchanged, so that an english message can be  read  as-
                           is;  it  is  also acceptable for other single-byte locales that share many characters
                           with ASCII, like, e.g., ISO-8859-1.  The encoding will cause  a  large  overhead  for
                           messages  in  other  character sets: e.g., it will require up to twelve (12) bytes to
                           encode a single UTF-8 character of four (4) bytes.  It is the default encoding.
                 ‘base64’  (Or ‘b64’.)  This encoding is 7-bit clean and will always be used  for  binary  data.
                           This  encoding  has a constant input:output ratio of 3:4, regardless of the character
                           set of the input data it will encode three bytes of input to four  bytes  of  output.
                           This transfer-encoding is not human readable without performing a decoding step.

       mime-force-sendout
                 (Boolean)[Option]  Whenever  it  is not acceptable to fail sending out messages because of non-
                 convertible character content this variable may be set.  It will, as a  last  resort,  classify
                 the  part  content as ‘application/octet-stream’.  Please refer to the section “Character sets”
                 for the complete picture of character set conversion in S-nail.

       mimetypes-load-control
                 Can be used to control which of “The mime.types files” are loaded: if the letter ‘u’ is part of
                 the option value, then the user's personal ~/.mime.types file will be loaded  (if  it  exists);
                 likewise  the  letter ‘s’ controls loading of the system wide /etc/mime.types; directives found
                 in the user file take precedence, letter matching is case-insensitive.  If this variable is not
                 set S-nail will try to load both files.  Incorporation of the S-nail-built-in MIME types cannot
                 be suppressed, but they will be matched last (the order can be listed via mimetype).

                 More sources can be specified by using a different syntax: if  the  value  string  contains  an
                 equals  sign  ‘=’  then it is instead parsed as a comma-separated list of the described letters
                 plus ‘f=FILENAME’ pairs; the given filenames will be expanded and loaded, and their content may
                 use the extended syntax that is described in the section “The  mime.types  files”.   Directives
                 found in such files always take precedence (are prepended to the MIME type cache).

       mta       Select an alternate Mail-Transfer-Agent by either specifying the full pathname of an executable
                 (optionally  prefixed  with  the  protocol  ‘file://’),  or  [Option]ally a SMTP aka SUBMISSION
                 protocol URL, e.g., [v15-compat]

                       submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port]

                 ([no v15-compat]: ‘[smtp://]server[:port]’.)  The default has been chosen at compile time.  MTA
                 data transfers are always performed in asynchronous child processes,  and  without  supervision
                 unless  either  the sendwait or the verbose variable is set.  [Option]ally S-nail can take care
                 of expansion of the usual mta-aliases (aliases(5)).

                 For testing purposes there is  the  ‘test’  pseudo-MTA,  which  dumps  to  standard  output  or
                 optionally to a file, and honours mbox-fcc-and-pcc:

                       $ echo text | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s ubject user@exam.ple
                       $ </dev/null s-nail -:/ -Smta=test://./xy -s ub user@exam.ple

                 For  a  file-based  MTA  it  may  be necessary to set mta-argv0 in in order to choose the right
                 target of a modern mailwrapper(8) environment.  It will be passed command line  arguments  from
                 several  possible  sources:  from  the  variable mta-arguments if set, from the command line if
                 given and the variable expandargv allows their use.  Argument processing of  the  MTA  will  be
                 terminated with a -- separator.

                 The  otherwise  occurring  implicit  usage  of  the following MTA command line arguments can be
                 disabled by setting the boolean variable  mta-no-default-arguments  (which  will  also  disable
                 passing -- to the MTA): -i (for not treating a line with only a dot ‘.’ character as the end of
                 input),  -m  (shall  the  variable  metoo  be  set) and -v (if the verbose variable is set); in
                 conjunction with the -r command line option S-nail will also (not) pass -f as well as  possibly
                 -F.

                 [Option]ally  S-nail  can  send  mail  over SMTP aka SUBMISSION network connections to a single
                 defined smart host by setting this variable to a SMTP or SUBMISSION URL (see “On URL syntax and
                 credential lookup”).  An  authentication  scheme  can  be  specified  via  the  variable  chain
                 smtp-auth.   Encrypted  network  connections are [Option]ally available, the section “Encrypted
                 network communication” should give an overview and provide links to more information  on  this.
                 Note  that  with  some  mail providers it may be necessary to set the smtp-hostname variable in
                 order to use a specific combination of from, hostname and mta.   Network  communication  socket
                 timeouts  are configurable, e.g., socket-connect-timeout.  All generated network traffic may be
                 proxied over the SOCKS5 server given in socks-proxy.  The following SMTP variants may be used:

                    The plain SMTP protocol (RFC 5321) that normally lives on the server port 25  and  requires
                     setting  the  smtp-use-starttls  variable to enter a TLS encrypted session state.  Assign a
                     value   like   [v15-compat]   ‘smtp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’   ([no   v15-compat]
                     ‘smtp://server[:port]’) to choose this protocol.

                    The  so-called  SMTPS which is supposed to live on server port 465 and is automatically TLS
                     secured.  Unfortunately it never became  a  standardized  protocol  and  may  thus  not  be
                     supported by your hosts network service database – in fact the port number has already been
                     reassigned to other protocols!

                     SMTPS  is  nonetheless  a  commonly  offered protocol and thus can be chosen by assigning a
                     value  like   [v15-compat]   ‘smtps://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’   ([no   v15-compat]
                     ‘smtps://server[:port]’);  due  to  the  mentioned  problems  it  is  usually  necessary to
                     explicitly specify the port as ‘:465’, however.

                    The SUBMISSION protocol (RFC 6409) lives on server port 587 and is identically to the  SMTP
                     protocol  from S-nail's point of view; it requires setting smtp-use-starttls to enter a TLS
                     secured session state; e.g., [v15-compat] ‘submission://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’.

                    The SUBMISSIONS protocol (RFC 8314) that lives on server port 465 and  is  TLS  secured  by
                     default.     It    can    be    chosen    by    assigning   a   value   like   [v15-compat]
                     ‘submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port]’.  Due to the problems mentioned  for  SMTPS
                     above  and  the fact that SUBMISSIONS is new and a successor that lives on the same port as
                     the historical engineering mismanagement named SMTPS, it is usually necessary to explicitly
                     specify the port as ‘:465’.

       mta-aliases
                 [Option] If set to a valid path pointing to a text file in MTA aliases(5) format, plain  ‘name’
                 (see  expandaddr)  message  receiver  names  are recursively expanded as a last expansion step,
                 after the distribution lists which can  be  created  with  alias.   Constraints  on  aliases(5)
                 content    support:    only    local    addresses    (names)    which   are   valid   usernames
                 (‘[a-z_][a-z0-9_-]*[$]?’) are understood, and [v15 behaviour may differ]  ‘:include:/file/name’
                 directives  are  not  supported.   By  including ‘-name’ in the setting of expandaddr it can be
                 asserted that only expanded names (mail addresses) are passed through to the MTA,  hard  errors
                 occur  otherwise.   The  file  content  is  cached,  but  variable  as  well  as  file size and
                 modification time changes will cause an update.

       mta-arguments
                 Arguments to pass through to a file-based mta can be given via this variable, which  is  parsed
                 according  to  “Shell-style  argument  quoting”  into  an array of arguments, and which will be
                 joined onto MTA options from other sources, and then passed individually to the  MTA:  ‘?  wysh
                 set mta-arguments='-t -X "/tmp/my log"'’.

       mta-no-default-arguments
                 (Boolean)  Unless  this  variable is set S-nail will pass some well known standard command line
                 options to a file-based mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent), see there for more.

       mta-no-receiver-arguments
                 (Boolean) By default a file-based mta will be passed all  receiver  addresses  on  the  command
                 line.  This variable can be set to suppress any such argument.

       mta-argv0
                 Many   systems  use  a  so-called  mailwrapper(8)  environment  to  ensure  compatibility  with
                 sendmail(1).  This works by inspecting the name that was  used  to  invoke  the  mail  delivery
                 system.   If  this  variable is set then the mailwrapper (the program that is actually executed
                 when calling the file-based mta) will treat its contents as that name.

       netrc-lookup-USER@HOST, netrc-lookup-HOST, netrc-lookup
                 (Boolean)[v15-compat][Option] Used to control usage of the user's ~/.netrc file for  lookup  of
                 account credentials, as documented in the section “On URL syntax and credential lookup” and for
                 the  command  netrc;  the  section  “The  .netrc  file”  documents  the  file format.  Also see
                 netrc-pipe.

       netrc-pipe
                 [v15-compat][Option] When ~/.netrc is loaded (see netrc and netrc-lookup) then S-nail will read
                 the output of a shell pipe instead of the user's ~/.netrc file if this variable is set (to  the
                 desired  shell  command).   This can be used to, e.g., store ~/.netrc in encrypted form: ‘? set
                 netrc-pipe='gpg -qd ~/.netrc.pgp'’.

       newfolders
                 [Option] If this variable has the value ‘maildir’, newly  created  local  folders  will  be  in
                 Maildir instead of MBOX format.

       newmail   Checks for new mail in the current folder each time the prompt is shown.  A Maildir folder must
                 be  re-scanned  to  determine  if new mail has arrived.  If this variable is set to the special
                 value ‘nopoll’ then a Maildir folder will not  be  rescanned  completely,  but  only  timestamp
                 changes are detected.  Maildir folders are [Option]al.

       outfolder
                 (Boolean)  Unless  specified  as  absolute  pathnames,  causes the filename given in the record
                 variable and the sender-based filenames for the  Copy  and  Save  commands  to  be  interpreted
                 relative  to  the  directory  given  in the folder variable rather than relative to the current
                 directory.

       on-account-cleanup-ACCOUNT, on-account-cleanup
                 Macro hook which will be called once an account is left, as the very last step before unrolling
                 per-account localopts.  This hook is run even in case of fatal errors, and it is  advisable  to
                 perform  only  absolutely  necessary  actions,  like  cleaning up alternates, for example.  The
                 specialized form is used in favour of the generic one if found.

       on-compose-cleanup
                 Macro hook which will be called after the message has been sent (or not, in case of  failures),
                 as  the  very last step before unrolling compose mode localopts.  This hook is run even in case
                 of fatal errors, and it is  advisable  to  perform  only  absolutely  necessary  actions,  like
                 cleaning up alternates, for example.

                 For  compose  mode  hooks  that  may  affect  the  message content please see on-compose-enter,
                 on-compose-leave, on-compose-splice.  [v15 behaviour  may  differ]  This  hook  exists  because
                 alias,  alternates, commandalias, shortcut, to name a few, are neither covered by localopts nor
                 by local: changes applied in compose mode will continue to be in effect thereafter.

       on-compose-enter, on-compose-leave
                 Macro hooks which will be called once compose mode is entered, and  after  composing  has  been
                 finished,  respectively;  the  exact  order of the steps taken is documented for ~., one of the
                 “COMMAND ESCAPES”.  Context about the message being  worked  on  can  be  queried  via  digmsg.
                 localopts  are  enabled  for  these hooks, and changes on variables will be forgotten after the
                 message has been sent.  on-compose-cleanup can be  used  to  perform  other  necessary  cleanup
                 steps.

                 Here   is   an  example  that  injects  a  signature  via  message-inject-tail;  instead  using
                 on-compose-splice to simply inject the file of desire via ~< or ~<! may be a better approach.

                       define t_ocl {
                         vput ! i cat ~/.mysig
                         if [ $? -eq 0 ]
                            vput csop message-inject-tail trim-end $i
                         end

                         # Alternatively
                         readctl create ~/.mysig
                         if [ $? -eq 0 ]
                           readall i
                           if [ $? -eq 0 ]
                             vput csop vexpr message-inject-tail trim-end $i
                           end
                           readctl remove ~/.mysig
                         end
                       }
                       set on-compose-leave=t_ocl

       on-compose-splice, on-compose-splice-shell
                 These hooks run once the normal compose mode is finished, but before the on-compose-leave macro
                 hook is called etc.  Both hooks will be executed in a subprocess, with their input  and  output
                 connected  to  S-nail  such  that  they  can  act as if they would be an interactive user.  The
                 difference in between them is that the latter is a SHELL  command,  whereas  the  former  is  a
                 normal  defined  macro,  but which is restricted to a small set of commands (the verbose output
                 of, e.g., list will indicate said capability).  localopts are enabled for these hooks  (in  the
                 parent  process),  causing  any  setting  to  be  forgotten  after  the  message has been sent;
                 on-compose-cleanup can be used to perform other cleanup as necessary.

                 During execution of these hooks S-nail will temporarily forget whether it has been  started  in
                 interactive  mode,  (a  restricted  set of) “COMMAND ESCAPES” will always be available, and for
                 guaranteed reproducibilities sake escape and ifs will be set to their  defaults.   The  compose
                 mode  command  ~^  has been especially designed for scriptability (via these hooks).  The first
                 line the hook will read on its standard input is the protocol version of said  command  escape,
                 currently “0 0 1”: backward incompatible protocol changes have to be expected.

                 Care  must be taken to avoid deadlocks and other false control flow: if both involved processes
                 wait for more input to happen at the same time, or one does not expect more input but the other
                 is stuck waiting for consumption of its output, etc.  There is no automatic synchronization  of
                 the  hook:  it  will not be stopped automatically just because it, e.g., emits ‘~x’.  The hooks
                 will however receive a termination signal if  the  parent  enters  an  error  condition.   [v15
                 behaviour  may  differ] Protection against and interaction with signals is not yet given; it is
                 likely that in the future these scripts will  be  placed  in  an  isolated  session,  which  is
                 signalled in its entirety as necessary.

                       define ocs_signature {
                         read version
                         echo '~< ~/.mysig' # '~<! fortune pathtofortunefile'
                       }
                       set on-compose-splice=ocs_signature

                       wysh set on-compose-splice-shell=$'\
                         read version;\
                         printf "hello $version!  Headers: ";\
                         echo \'~^header list\';\
                         read status result;\
                         echo "status=$status result=$result";\
                         '

                       define ocsm {
                         read version
                         echo Splice protocol version is $version
                         echo '~^h l'; read hl; vput csop es substring "${hl}" 0 1
                         if [ "$es" != 2 ]
                           echoerr 'Cannot read header list'; echo '~x'; xit
                         endif
                         if [ "$hl" !%?case ' cc' ]
                           echo '~^h i cc Diet is your <mirr.or>'; read es;\
                             vput csop es substring "${es}" 0 1
                           if [ "$es" != 2 ]
                             echoerr 'Cannot insert Cc: header'; echo '~x'
                             # (no xit, macro finishs anyway)
                           endif
                         endif
                       }
                       set on-compose-splice=ocsm

       on-history-addition
                 This  hook  will  be  called  if an entry is about to be added to the history of the MLE, as is
                 documented in “On terminal control and line editor”.  It will be called with  three  arguments:
                 the  first  is the name of the input context (see bind), the second whether the command relates
                 to history-gabby, and the third being the complete command line to be added.   The  entry  will
                 not  be  added to history if the hook uses a non-0 return.  [v15 behaviour may differ] A future
                 version will give the expanded command name as the third argument, followed  by  the  tokenized
                 command  line  as  parsed  in  the  remaining  arguments,  the  first  of which is the original
                 unexpanded command name; i.e., one may do ‘shift 4’  and  will  then  be  able  to  access  the
                 positional parameters as usual via *, #, 1 etc.

       on-main-loop-tick
                 This hook will be called whenever the program's main event loop is about to read the next input
                 line.  Note variable and other changes it performs are not scoped, e.g., via localopts!

       on-program-exit
                 This  hook will be called when the program exits, whether via exit or quit, or because the send
                 mode is done.

       on-resend-cleanup
                 [v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to on-compose-cleanup, but is only triggered by resend.

       on-resend-enter
                 [v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to on-compose-enter, but  is  only  triggered  by  resend;
                 currently there is no digmsg support, for example.

       page      (Boolean)  If  set,  each  message  feed  through  the  command given for pipe is followed by a
                 formfeed character ‘\f’.

       password-USER@HOST, password-HOST, password
                 [v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a password, which is used in case none has been given  in
                 the  protocol  and account-specific URL; as a last resort S-nail will ask for a password on the
                 user's terminal if the authentication method requires a password.  Specifying  passwords  in  a
                 startup  file  is  generally  a security risk; the file should be readable by the invoking user
                 only.

       password-USER@HOST
                 [no v15-compat] (see the chain above  for  [v15-compat])  Set  the  password  for  ‘USER’  when
                 connecting  to ‘HOST’.  If no such variable is defined for a host, the user will be asked for a
                 password on standard input.  Specifying passwords in a startup file  is  generally  a  security
                 risk; the file should be readable by the invoking user only.

       piperaw   (Boolean)  Send  messages  to  the  pipe  command  without  performing  MIME  and character set
                 conversions.

       pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE
                 When a MIME message part of type ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’ (case-insensitive) is displayed or quoted,  its
                 text  is filtered through the value of this variable interpreted as a shell command.  Note that
                 only parts which can be displayed inline as plain text (see copiousoutput) are displayed unless
                 otherwise noted, other MIME parts will only be considered by and for the command mimeview.

                 The special value question mark ‘?’ forces interpretation of the message part  as  plain  text,
                 e.g.,  ‘set  pipe-application/xml=?’ will henceforth display XML “as is”.  (The same could also
                 be achieved by adding a MIME type marker with the mimetype command.  And [Option]ally MIME type
                 handlers may be defined via “The Mailcap files” — these directives, copiousoutput  has  already
                 been used, should be referred to for further documentation.

                 The  question mark ‘?’ can in fact be used as a trigger character to adjust usage and behaviour
                 of a following shell command specification more thoroughly by appending more special characters
                 which  refer  to  further  mailcap  directives,  e.g.,  the  following   hypothetical   command
                 specification could be used:

                       ? set pipe-X/Y='?!++=? vim ${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}'

                 ‘*’       The command produces plain text to be integrated in S-nails output: copiousoutput.
                 ‘#’       If  set the handler will not be invoked when a message is to be quoted, but only when
                           it will be displayed: x-mailx-noquote.
                 ‘&’       Run the command asynchronously, i.e., without blocking  S-nail:  x-mailx-async.   The
                           standard output of the command will go to /dev/null.
                 ‘!’       The  command  must be run on an interactive terminal, S-nail will temporarily release
                           the terminal to it: needsterminal.
                 ‘+’       Request creation of a zero-sized temporary file, the absolute pathname of which  will
                           be   made   accessible   via   the   environment  variable  MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY:
                           x-mailx-tmpfile.  If given twice then the file  will  be  unlinked  automatically  by
                           S-nail  when  the command loop is entered again at latest: x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink; it
                           is an error to use automatic deletion in conjunction with x-mailx-async.
                 ‘=’       Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard input;  if  this
                           flag  is  set  then  the  data  will instead be written into MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY
                           (x-mailx-tmpfile-fill), the creation of which is implied; in order to cause automatic
                           deletion of the temporary file two plus signs ‘++’ still have to be used.
                 ‘?’       To avoid ambiguities with normal shell command content another question mark  can  be
                           used  to forcefully terminate interpretation of remaining characters.  (Any character
                           not in this list will have the same effect.)

                 Some information about the MIME part to be displayed is embedded into the  environment  of  the
                 shell command:

                 MAILX_CONTENT            The  MIME  content-type  of  the  part,  if  known,  the  empty string
                                          otherwise.
                 MAILX_CONTENT_EVIDENCE   If mime-counter-evidence includes the carry-around-bit (2), then  this
                                          will be set to the detected MIME content-type; not only then identical
                                          to MAILX_CONTENT otherwise.
                 MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL  MIME  parts of type ‘message/external-body access-type=url’ will store
                                          the access URL in this variable, it is empty otherwise.   URL  targets
                                          should not be activated automatically, without supervision.
                 MAILX_FILENAME           The filename, if any is set, the empty string otherwise.
                 MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED
                                          A random string.
                 MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY
                                          If  temporary  file  creation  has  been requested through the command
                                          prefix this variable will be set and contain the absolute pathname  of
                                          the temporary file.

       pipe-EXTENSION
                 This  is  identical to pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE except that ‘EXTENSION’ (normalized to lowercase using
                 character mappings of the ASCII charset) names  a  file  extension,  e.g.,  ‘xhtml’.   Handlers
                 registered using this method take precedence.

       pop3-auth-USER@HOST, pop3-auth-HOST, pop3-auth
                 [Option][v15-compat]  Variable  chain  that sets the POP3 authentication method.  Supported are
                 the default ‘plain’, [v15-compat] ‘oauthbearer’ (see “FAQ” entry  “But,  how  about  XOAUTH2  /
                 OAUTHBEARER?”), as well as [v15-compat] ‘external’ and ‘externanon’ for TLS secured connections
                 which  pass  a  client  certificate  via  tls-config-pairs.  There may be the [Option]al method
                 [v15-compat] ‘gssapi’.  ‘externanon’  does  not  need  any  user  credentials,  ‘external’  and
                 ‘gssapi’ need a user, the remains also require a password.  ‘externanon’ solely builds upon the
                 credentials  passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go since tested servers
                 do not actually follow RFC 4422, and  fail  if  additional  credentials  are  actually  passed.
                 Unless  pop3-no-apop  is  set  the  ‘plain’  method  will [Option]ally be replaced with APOP if
                 possible (see there).

       pop3-bulk-load-USER@HOST, pop3-bulk-load-HOST, pop3-bulk-load
                 (Boolean)[Option] When accessing a POP3 server S-nail loads the headers of  the  messages,  and
                 only  requests  the  message bodies on user request.  For the POP3 protocol this means that the
                 message headers will be downloaded twice.  If this variable is set then  S-nail  will  download
                 only complete messages from the given POP3 server(s) instead.

       pop3-keepalive-USER@HOST, pop3-keepalive-HOST, pop3-keepalive
                 [Option]  POP3 servers close the connection after a period of inactivity; the standard requires
                 this to be at least 10 minutes, but practical experience may vary.  Setting this variable to  a
                 numeric  value  greater  than  ‘0’  causes a ‘NOOP’ command to be sent each value seconds if no
                 other operation is performed.

       pop3-no-apop-USER@HOST, pop3-no-apop-HOST, pop3-no-apop
                 (Boolean)[Option] Unless this variable is set the MD5 based ‘APOP’ authentication  method  will
                 be  used instead of a chosen ‘plain’ pop3-auth when connecting to a POP3 server that advertises
                 support.  The advantage of ‘APOP’ is that only a single packet is sent  for  the  user/password
                 tuple.  (Originally also that the password is not sent in clear text over the wire, but for one
                 MD5  does not any longer offer sufficient security, and then today transport is almost ever TLS
                 secured.)  Note that pop3-no-apop-HOST requires [v15-compat].

       pop3-use-starttls-USER@HOST, pop3-use-starttls-HOST, pop3-use-starttls
                 (Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to issue a ‘STLS’ command to make an unencrypted  POP3  session
                 TLS  encrypted.   This  functionality  is  not supported by all servers, and is not used if the
                 session is already encrypted by the POP3S method.  Note  that  pop3-use-starttls-HOST  requires
                 [v15-compat].

       posix     (Boolean)  This  flag enables POSIX mode, which changes behaviour of S-nail where that deviates
                 from standardized behaviour.  It will be set implicitly before the “Resource files” are  loaded
                 if  the  environment  variable  POSIXLY_CORRECT  is set, and adjusting any of those two will be
                 reflected by the other one implicitly.  The following behaviour is covered and enforced by this
                 mechanism:

                    In non-interactive mode, any error encountered while loading resource files during  program
                     startup  will  cause  a  program  exit,  whereas  in interactive mode such errors will stop
                     loading of the currently loaded (stack of) file(s, i.e., recursively).  These exits can  be
                     circumvented  on  a  per-command  base by using ignerr, one of the “Command modifiers”, for
                     each command which shall be allowed to fail.
                    alternates will replace the list of alternate addresses instead of  appending  to  it.   In
                     addition alternates will only be honoured for any sort of message reply, and for aliases.
                    The  variable  inserting “COMMAND ESCAPES” ~A, ~a, ~I and ~i will expand embedded character
                     sequences ‘\t’ horizontal tabulator and ‘\n’ line feed.  [v15  behaviour  may  differ]  For
                     compatibility reasons this step will always be performed.
                    Upon  changing  the  active  file no summary of headers will be displayed even if header is
                     set.
                    Setting ignoreeof implies the behaviour described by dot.
                    The variable keep is extended to cover any empty mailbox, not only  empty  “primary  system
                     mailbox”es: they will be removed when they are left in empty state otherwise.

       print-alternatives
                 (Boolean) When a MIME message part of type ‘multipart/alternative’ is displayed and it contains
                 a  subpart  of  type  ‘text/plain’,  other parts are normally discarded.  Setting this variable
                 causes  all  subparts  to  be  displayed,  just  as  if  the  surrounding  part  was  of   type
                 ‘multipart/mixed’.

       prompt    The  string used as a prompt in interactive mode.  Whenever the variable is evaluated the value
                 is treated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes (see  “Shell-style  argument  quoting”).
                 This  (post-assignment,  i.e.,  second)  expansion can be used to embed status information, for
                 example ?, !, account or mailbox-display.

                 In order to embed characters which should not be counted when calculating the visual  width  of
                 the  resulting  string, enclose the characters of interest in a pair of reverse solidus escaped
                 brackets: ‘\[\E[0m\]’; a slot for coloured  prompts  is  also  available  with  the  [Option]al
                 command  colour.   Prompting  may  be  prevented  by  setting this to the null string (aka ‘set
                 noprompt’).

       prompt2   This string is used for secondary prompts, but is otherwise identical to prompt.   The  default
                 is ‘.. ’.

       quiet     (Boolean) Suppresses the printing of the version when first invoked.

       quote     If  set  a  reply  message  is started with the quoted original message, the lines of which are
                 prefixed by the value of  the  variable  indentprefix,  taking  into  account  quote-chars  and
                 quote-fold.  If set to the empty value, the quoted message will be preceded and followed by the
                 expansions of the values of quote-inject-head and quote-inject-tail, respectively.  None of the
                 headers  of  the  quoted  message is included in the quote if the value equals ‘noheading’, and
                 only the headers selected by the ‘type’ headerpick selection are put above the message body for
                 ‘headers’, whereas all headers and all MIME parts are  included  for  ‘allheaders’.   Also  see
                 quote-as-attachment and ~Q, one of the “COMMAND ESCAPES”.

       quote-as-attachment
                 (Boolean)  Add  the original message in its entirety as a ‘message/rfc822’ MIME attachment when
                 replying to a message.  Note this works regardless of the setting of quote.

       quote-chars
                 Can be set to a string consisting of non-whitespace ASCII characters which shall be treated  as
                 quotation leaders, the default being ‘>|}:’.

       quote-fold
                 [Option]  Can  be  set  in addition to indentprefix, and creates a more fancy quotation in that
                 leading quotation characters (quote-chars)  are  compressed  and  overlong  lines  are  folded.
                 quote-fold  can  be set to either one, two or three (space separated) numeric values, which are
                 interpreted as the maximum (goal) and the minimum line length, respectively, in a spirit rather
                 equal to the fmt(1) program, but line- instead of paragraph-based.  The third value is used  as
                 the  maximum  line  length  instead  of  the first if no better break point can be found; it is
                 ignored unless it is larger than the  minimum  and  smaller  than  the  maximum.   If  not  set
                 explicitly  the minimum will reflect the goal algorithmically.  The goal cannot be smaller than
                 the length of indentprefix plus some additional pad; necessary adjustments take place silently.

       quote-inject-head, quote-inject-tail
                 The strings to put before and after the text of a quoted  message,  respectively.   The  former
                 defaults to ‘%f wrote:\n\n’.  Special format directives will be expanded if possible, and if so
                 configured  the  output will be folded according to quote-fold.  Format specifiers in the given
                 strings start with a percent sign ‘%’ and expand values of the original message,  unless  noted
                 otherwise.   Note  that  names  and  addresses are not subject to the setting of showto.  Valid
                 format specifiers are:

                 ‘%%’      A plain percent sign.
                 ‘%a’      The address(es) of the sender(s).
                 ‘%d’      The date found in the ‘Date:’ header of  the  message  when  datefield  is  set  (the
                           default),  otherwise  the  date  when  the  message  was received.  Formatting can be
                           controlled  by  assigning   a   strftime(3)   format   string   to   datefield   (and
                           datefield-markout-older).
                 ‘%f’      The full name(s) (name and address, as given) of the sender(s).
                 ‘%i’      The ‘Message-ID:’.
                 ‘%n’      The  real  name(s)  of  the  sender(s) if there is one and showname allows usage, the
                           address(es) otherwise.
                 ‘%r’      The senders real name(s) if there is one, the address(es) otherwise.

       r-option-implicit
                 (Boolean) Setting this option evaluates the contents of from (or,  if  that  contains  multiple
                 addresses,  sender)  and passes the results onto the used (file-based) MTA as described for the
                 -r option (empty argument case).

       recipients-in-cc
                 (Boolean) When doing a reply, the original ‘From:’ and ‘To:’ are by default merged into the new
                 ‘To:’.  If this variable is set, only the original ‘From:’ ends in the new ‘To:’, the  rest  is
                 merged into ‘Cc:’.

       record    Unless this variable is defined, no copies of outgoing mail will be saved.  If defined it gives
                 the  pathname,  subject  to  the  usual  “Filename transformations”, of a folder where all new,
                 replied-to or forwarded messages are saved: when saving to this folder fails the message is not
                 sent, but instead saved to DEAD.  The standard defines that relative (fully expanded) paths are
                 to be interpreted relative to the current directory (cwd), to force interpretation relative  to
                 folder outfolder needs to be set in addition.

       record-files
                 (Boolean)  If  this  variable  is  set the meaning of record will be extended to cover messages
                 which target only file and pipe recipients (see expandaddr).   These  address  types  will  not
                 appear in recipient lists unless add-file-recipients is also set.

       record-resent
                 (Boolean)  If  this  variable  is  set the meaning of record will be extended to also cover the
                 resend and Resend commands.

       reply-in-same-charset
                 (Boolean) If this variable is set S-nail first tries to use  the  same  character  set  of  the
                 original  message  for  replies.  If this fails, the mechanism described in “Character sets” is
                 evaluated as usual.

       reply-strings
                 Can be set to a comma-separated list of (case-insensitive according  to  ASCII  rules)  strings
                 which  shall  be  recognized  in  addition  to the built-in strings as ‘Subject:’ reply message
                 indicators – built-in are ‘Re:’, which is mandated by RFC 5322, as well as  the  german  ‘Aw:’,
                 ‘Antw:’, and the ‘Wg:’ which often has been seen in the wild; I.e., the separating colon has to
                 be specified explicitly.

       reply-to  A  list  of addresses to put into the ‘Reply-To:’ field of the message header.  Members of this
                 list are handled as if they were in the alternates list.

       replyto   [Obsolete] Variant of reply-to.

       reply-to-honour
                 Controls whether a ‘Reply-To:’ header is honoured when replying  to  a  message  via  reply  or
                 Lreply.  This is a quadoption; if set without a value it defaults to “yes”.

       rfc822-body-from_
                 (Boolean)  This  variable can be used to force displaying a so-called ‘From_’ line for messages
                 that are embedded into an envelope mail via  the  ‘message/rfc822’  MIME  mechanism,  for  more
                 visual convenience, also see mbox-rfc4155.

       save      (Boolean) Enable saving of (partial) messages in DEAD upon interrupt or delivery error.

       screen    The  number  of  lines that represents a “screenful” of lines, used in headers summary display,
                 from searching, message topline display and scrolling via z.   If  this  variable  is  not  set
                 S-nail  falls  back  to a calculation based upon the detected terminal window size and the baud
                 rate: the faster the terminal, the more will be shown.  Overall  screen  dimensions  and  pager
                 usage is influenced by the environment variables COLUMNS and LINES and the variable crt.

       searchheaders
                 (Boolean)  Expand  message-list  specifiers  in  the form ‘/x:y’ to all messages containing the
                 substring “y” in the header field ‘x’.  The string search is case insensitive.

       sendcharsets
                 [Option] A comma-separated list of character set names that can be used  in  outgoing  internet
                 mail.   The  value  of  the  variable  charset-8bit  is  automatically appended to this list of
                 character sets.  If no character set conversion capabilities are compiled into S-nail then  the
                 only  supported  charset is ttycharset.  Also see sendcharsets-else-ttycharset and refer to the
                 section “Character sets” for the complete picture of character set conversion in S-nail.

       sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
                 (Boolean)[Option] If this variable is set, but sendcharsets is not,  then  S-nail  acts  as  if
                 sendcharsets  had been set to the value of the variable ttycharset.  In effect this combination
                 passes through the message data in the character set of the current locale encoding:  therefore
                 mail  message  text  will  be  (assumed  to  be) in ISO-8859-1 encoding when send from within a
                 ISO-8859-1 locale, and in UTF-8 encoding when send from within an UTF-8 locale.

                 The 8-bit fallback charset-8bit never comes into play as ttycharset is implicitly assumed to be
                 8-bit and capable to represent all files the user may specify (as is the case when no character
                 set conversion support is  available  in  S-nail  and  the  only  supported  character  set  is
                 ttycharset, see “Character sets”).  This might be a problem for scripts which use the suggested
                 ‘LC_ALL=C’  setting, since in this case the character set is US-ASCII by definition, so that it
                 is better to also override ttycharset, then; and/or do something  like  the  following  in  the
                 resource file:

                       if [ "$LC_ALL" == C ] || [ "$LC_CTYPE" == C ]
                         unset sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
                       end

       sender    An  address  that  is  put into the ‘Sender:’ field of outgoing messages, quoting RFC 5322: the
                 mailbox of the agent responsible for the actual transmission of the message.  This field should
                 normally not be used unless the from field contains more than one address, on which case it  is
                 required.   Dependent  on  the  context  this  address  is handled as if it were in the list of
                 alternates.  Also see -r, r-option-implicit.

       sendmail  [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta.

       sendmail-arguments
                 [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-arguments.

       sendmail-no-default-arguments
                 [Obsolete](Boolean) Predecessor of mta-no-default-arguments.

       sendmail-progname
                 [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-argv0.

       sendwait  Sending messages to the chosen mta or to command-pipe receivers (see “On sending mail, and non-
                 interactive mode”) will be performed asynchronously.  This means that only  startup  errors  of
                 the  respective  program will be recognizable, but no delivery errors.  Also, no guarantees can
                 be made as to when the respective program will actually run, as well as to when they will  have
                 produced output.

                 If this variable is set then child program exit is waited for, and its exit status code is used
                 to  decide about success.  Remarks: in conflict with the POSIX standard this variable is built-
                 in to be initially set.  Another difference is that it can have a value, which  is  interpreted
                 as  a  comma-separated  list  of  case-insensitive strings naming specific subsystems for which
                 synchronousness shall be ensured (only).  Possible values are ‘mta’ for mta delivery, and ‘pcc’
                 for command-pipe receivers.

       showlast  (Boolean) This setting causes S-nail to start at the last message instead of the first one when
                 opening a mail folder, as well as with from and headers.

       showname  (Boolean) Causes S-nail to use the sender's real name instead  of  the  plain  address  in  the
                 header field summary and in message specifications.

       showto    (Boolean)  Causes the recipient of the message to be shown in the header summary if the message
                 was sent by the user.

       Sign      The  value  backing  ~A,  one  of  the  “COMMAND  ESCAPES”.   Also   see   message-inject-tail,
                 on-compose-leave and on-compose-splice.

       sign      The   value   backing  ~a,  one  of  the  “COMMAND  ESCAPES”.   Also  see  message-inject-tail,
                 on-compose-leave and on-compose-splice.

       signature
                 [Obsolete] Please use on-compose-splice or on-compose-splice-shell or on-compose-leave and  (if
                 necessary) message-inject-tail instead!

       skipemptybody
                 (Boolean)  If  an outgoing message does not contain any text in its first or only message part,
                 do not send it but discard it silently (see also the command line option -E).

       smime-ca-dir, smime-ca-file
                 [Option] Specify the location of trusted CA certificates in PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) for the
                 purpose of  verification  of  S/MIME  signed  messages.   tls-ca-dir  documents  the  necessary
                 preparation  steps  to use the former.  The set of CA certificates which are built into the TLS
                 library can be explicitly turned off by setting smime-ca-no-defaults, and  further  fine-tuning
                 is possible via smime-ca-flags.

       smime-ca-flags
                 [Option]  Can  be  used  to  fine-tune  behaviour  of  the X509 CA certificate storage, and the
                 certificate verification that is used.  The actual values and their meanings are documented for
                 tls-ca-flags.

       smime-ca-no-defaults
                 (Boolean)[Option] Do not load the default CA locations that are built  into  the  used  to  TLS
                 library to verify S/MIME signed messages.

       smime-cipher-USER@HOST, smime-cipher
                 [Option]  Specifies  the  cipher  to  use  when  generating  S/MIME encrypted messages (for the
                 specified account).  RFC 5751 mandates a default of ‘aes128’ (AES-128  CBC).   Possible  values
                 are  (case-insensitive  and)  in  decreasing  cipher strength: ‘aes256’ (AES-256 CBC), ‘aes192’
                 (AES-192 CBC), ‘aes128’ (AES-128 CBC), ‘des3’ (DES EDE3 CBC, 168 bits; default if  ‘aes128’  is
                 not available) and ‘des’ (DES CBC, 56 bits).

                 The  actually available cipher algorithms depend on the cryptographic library that S-nail uses.
                 [Option] Support for more cipher algorithms may be available through dynamic loading via, e.g.,
                 EVP_get_cipherbyname(3) (OpenSSL) if S-nail has been compiled to support this.

       smime-crl-dir
                 [Option] Specifies a directory that contains  files  with  CRLs  in  PEM  format  to  use  when
                 verifying S/MIME messages.

       smime-crl-file
                 [Option]  Specifies  a  file  that  contains  a  CRL in PEM format to use when verifying S/MIME
                 messages.

       smime-encrypt-USER@HOST
                 [Option] If this variable is set, messages send to the  given  receiver  are  encrypted  before
                 sending.   The  value  of  the  variable  must  be  set  to  the name of a file that contains a
                 certificate in PEM format.

                 If a message is sent to multiple recipients, each of them for whom a corresponding variable  is
                 set  will  receive an individually encrypted message; other recipients will continue to receive
                 the message in plain text unless the smime-force-encryption variable is set.  It is recommended
                 to sign encrypted messages, i.e., to also set the smime-sign variable.

       smime-force-encryption
                 (Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to refuse sending unencrypted messages.

       smime-sign
                 (Boolean)[Option] S/MIME sign outgoing messages with the user's private  key  and  include  the
                 user's  certificate as a MIME attachment.  Signing a message enables a recipient to verify that
                 the sender used a valid certificate, that the email addresses in the certificate match those in
                 the message header and that the message content has not been altered.  It does not  change  the
                 message  text, and people will be able to read the message as usual.  Also see smime-sign-cert,
                 smime-sign-include-certs and smime-sign-digest.

       smime-sign-cert-USER@HOST, smime-sign-cert
                 [Option] Points to a file in PEM format.  For the purpose of signing and decryption  this  file
                 needs to contain the user's private key, followed by his certificate.

                 For  message signing ‘USER@HOST’ is always derived from the value of from (or, if that contains
                 multiple addresses, sender).  For the purpose of encryption the recipient's  public  encryption
                 key  (certificate) is expected; the command certsave can be used to save certificates of signed
                 messages (the section “Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME” gives  some  details).   This
                 mode of operation is usually driven by the specialized form.

                 When  decrypting messages the account is derived from the recipient fields (‘To:’ and ‘Cc:’) of
                 the message, which are searched for addresses for which such a variable is set.  S-nail  always
                 uses  the  first  address  that matches, so if the same message is sent to more than one of the
                 user's addresses using different encryption keys, decryption might fail.

                 For signing and decryption purposes it is possible to  use  encrypted  keys,  and  the  pseudo-
                 host(s) ‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-key’ for the private key (and ‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-cert’ for the
                 certificate stored in the same file) will be used for performing any necessary password lookup,
                 therefore  the  lookup  can  be  automated  via  the mechanisms described in “On URL syntax and
                 credential lookup”.  For example, the hypothetical address ‘bob@exam.ple’ could be driven  with
                 a  private  key  /  certificate  pair  path defined in smime-sign-cert-bob@exam.ple, and needed
                 passwords would then be looked up  via  the  pseudo  hosts  ‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-key’  (and
                 ‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-cert’).      To     include     intermediate     certificates,     use
                 smime-sign-include-certs.

       smime-sign-digest-USER@HOST, smime-sign-digest
                 [Option] Specifies the message digestto use when signing S/MIME messages.  Please remember that
                 for this use case ‘USER@HOST’ refers to the  variable  from  (or,  if  that  contains  multiple
                 addresses,  sender).  The available algorithms depend on the used cryptographic library, but at
                 least one usable built-in algorithm is ensured as a default.  If possible the standard RFC 5751
                 will be violated by using ‘SHA512’ instead of the mandated ‘SHA1’ due to security concerns.

                 S-nail will try to add built-in support for the following  message  digests,  names  are  case-
                 insensitive:  ‘BLAKE2b512’,  ‘BLAKE2s256’,  ‘SHA3-512’,  ‘SHA3-384’, ‘SHA3-256’, ‘SHA3-224’, as
                 well as the widely available ‘SHA512’, ‘SHA384’, ‘SHA256’, ‘SHA224’, and the proposed  insecure
                 ‘SHA1’, finally ‘MD5’.  More digests may [Option]ally be available through dynamic loading via,
                 e.g., the OpenSSL function EVP_get_digestbyname(3).

       smime-sign-include-certs-USER@HOST, smime-sign-include-certs
                 [Option]  If  used,  this  is supposed to a consist of a comma-separated list of files, each of
                 which containing a single certificate in PEM format to be included in  the  S/MIME  message  in
                 addition  to  the  smime-sign-cert  certificate.   This  can  be  used  to include intermediate
                 certificates  of  the  certificate  authority,  in  order  to  allow  the   receiver's   S/MIME
                 implementation to perform a verification of the entire certificate chain, starting from a local
                 root certificate, over the intermediate certificates, down to the smime-sign-cert.  Even though
                 top  level  certificates  may  also  be  included  in  the chain, they will not be used for the
                 verification on the receiver's side.

                 For the purpose of the mechanisms involved here, ‘USER@HOST’  refers  to  the  content  of  the
                 internal  variable  from  (or,  if  that contains multiple addresses, sender).  The pseudo-host
                 ‘USER@HOST.smime-include-certs’  will  be  used  for  performing  password  lookups  for  these
                 certificates,  shall  they  have  been given one, therefore the lookup can be automated via the
                 mechanisms described in “On URL syntax and credential lookup”.

       smime-sign-message-digest-USER@HOST, smime-sign-message-digest
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor(s) of smime-sign-digest.

       smtp      [Obsolete][Option] To use the built-in SMTP  transport,  specify  a  SMTP  URL  in  mta.   [v15
                 behaviour may differ] For compatibility reasons a set smtp is used in preference of mta.

       smtp-auth-USER@HOST, smtp-auth-HOST, smtp-auth
                 [Option]  Variable  chain that controls the SMTP mta authentication method, possible values are
                 ‘none’  ([no  v15-compat]  default),  ‘plain’  ([v15-compat]  default),  ‘login’,  [v15-compat]
                 ‘oauthbearer’ (see “FAQ” entry “But, how about XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?”) as well as [v15-compat]
                 ‘external’  and  ‘externanon’  for  TLS secured connections which pass a client certificate via
                 tls-config-pairs.  There may be the [Option]al methods ‘cram-md5’  and  ‘gssapi’.   ‘none’  and
                 ‘externanon’ do not need any user credentials, ‘external’ and ‘gssapi’ require a user name, and
                 all  other  methods  require  a  user name and a password.  ‘externanon’ solely builds upon the
                 credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go since tested  servers
                 do  not  actually  follow RFC 4422 aka RFC 4954, and fail if additional credentials are passed.
                 Also  see  mta.   Note  that  smtp-auth-HOST  is  [v15-compat].   ([no   v15-compat]   Requires
                 smtp-auth-password and smtp-auth-user.  Note for smtp-auth-USER@HOST: may override dependent on
                 sender address in the variable from.)

       smtp-auth-password
                 [Option][no  v15-compat]  Sets  the  global  fallback password for SMTP authentication.  If the
                 authentication method requires a  password,  but  neither  smtp-auth-password  nor  a  matching
                 smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST  can  be  found,  S-nail  will  ask  for  a password on the user's
                 terminal.

       smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST
                 [no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-password for specific values of sender addresses, dependent
                 upon the variable from.

       smtp-auth-user
                 [Option][no v15-compat] Sets the global fallback user name for  SMTP  authentication.   If  the
                 authentication  method  requires  a  user  name,  but  neither  smtp-auth-user  nor  a matching
                 smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST can be found, S-nail will ask for a user name on the user's terminal.

       smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST
                 [no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-user for specific values  of  sender  addresses,  dependent
                 upon the variable from.

       smtp-hostname
                 [Option][v15-compat] Normally S-nail uses the variable from to derive the necessary ‘USER@HOST’
                 information  in order to issue a ‘MAIL FROM:<>’ SMTP mta command.  Setting smtp-hostname can be
                 used to use the ‘USER’ from the SMTP account (mta or the user variable chain)  and  the  ‘HOST’
                 from  the  content  of  this  variable  (or, if that is the empty string, hostname or the local
                 hostname as a last resort).  This often allows using an address that is itself valid but hosted
                 by a provider other than which (in from) is about to send the message.  Setting  this  variable
                 also  influences  generated  ‘Message-ID:’  and ‘Content-ID:’ header fields.  If the [Option]al
                 IDNA support is available (see idna-disable) variable assignment is aborted  when  a  necessary
                 conversion fails.

       smtp-use-starttls-USER@HOST, smtp-use-starttls-HOST, smtp-use-starttls
                 (Boolean)[Option]  Causes  S-nail to issue a ‘STARTTLS’ command to make an SMTP mta session TLS
                 encrypted, i.e., to enable transport layer security.

       socket-connect-timeout
                 [Option] A positive number  that  defines  the  timeout  to  wait  for  establishing  a  socket
                 connection before forcing ^ERR-TIMEDOUT.

       socks-proxy-USER@HOST, socks-proxy-HOST, socks-proxy
                 [Option]  If  this is set to the hostname (SOCKS URL) of a SOCKS5 server then S-nail will proxy
                 all of its network activities through it.  This can be used to proxy SMTP,  POP3  etc.  network
                 traffic  through  the  Tor  anonymizer,  for example.  The following would create a local SOCKS
                 proxy on port 10000 that forwards to the machine ‘HOST’, and from which the network traffic  is
                 actually instantiated:

                       # Create local proxy server in terminal 1 forwarding to HOST
                       $ ssh -D 10000 USER@HOST
                       # Then, start a client that uses it in terminal 2
                       $ s-nail -Ssocks-proxy-USER@HOST=localhost:10000

       spam-interface
                 [Option]  In  order  to use any of the spam-related commands (like, e.g., spamrate) the desired
                 spam interface must be defined by setting this variable.  Please refer to  the  manual  section
                 “Handling  spam”  for  the  complete  picture  of  spam handling in S-nail.  All or none of the
                 following interfaces may be available:

                 ‘spamc’   Interaction    with    spamc(1)    from    the     spamassassin(1)     (SpamAssassin:
                           http://spamassassin.apache.org)  suite.   Different  to  the generic filter interface
                           S-nail will automatically add the correct arguments for a given command and  has  the
                           necessary knowledge to parse the program's output.  A default value for spamc-command
                           will  have  been  compiled  into the S-nail binary if spamc(1) has been found in PATH
                           during compilation.  Shall it be necessary  to  define  a  specific  connection  type
                           (rather  than  using a configuration file for that), the variable spamc-arguments can
                           be used as in, e.g., ‘-d server.example.com -p 783’.  It is also possible to  specify
                           a  per-user  configuration via spamc-user.  Note that this interface does not inspect
                           the ‘is-spam’ flag of a message for the command spamforget.

                 ‘filter’  generic spam filter support via freely configurable hooks.  This interface  is  meant
                           for  programs  like  bogofilter(1) and requires according behaviour in respect to the
                           hooks' exit status for at least the command spamrate (‘0’ meaning a message is  spam,
                           ‘1’ for non-spam, ‘2’ for unsure and any other return value indicating a hard error);
                           since  the  hooks  can  include  shell  code  snippets  diverting  behaviour  can  be
                           intercepted  as  necessary.   The   hooks   are   spamfilter-ham,   spamfilter-noham,
                           spamfilter-nospam,  spamfilter-rate and spamfilter-spam; the manual section “Handling
                           spam” contains examples for some programs.  The process environment of the hooks will
                           have the variable MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED set.  Note that  spam  score  support  for
                           spamrate  is  not  supported  unless the [Option]tional regular expression support is
                           available and the spamfilter-rate-scanscore variable is set.

       spam-maxsize
                 [Option] Messages that  exceed  this  size  will  not  be  passed  through  to  the  configured
                 spam-interface.  If unset or 0, the default of 420000 bytes is used.

       spamc-command
                 [Option]  The  path to the spamc(1) program for the ‘spamc’ spam-interface.  Note that the path
                 is not expanded, but used “as is”.  A fallback path will have been  compiled  into  the  S-nail
                 binary if the executable had been found during compilation.

       spamc-arguments
                 [Option]  Even  though  S-nail  deals  with  most  arguments  for  the  ‘spamc’  spam-interface
                 automatically, it may at least sometimes be desirable to specify  connection-related  ones  via
                 this variable, e.g., ‘-d server.example.com -p 783’.

       spamc-user
                 [Option]  Specify  a  username for per-user configuration files for the ‘spamc’ spam-interface.
                 If this is set to the empty string then S-nail will use the name of the current user.

       spamfilter-ham, spamfilter-noham, spamfilter-nospam, spamfilter-rate, spamfilter-spam
                 [Option] Command and argument hooks  for  the  ‘filter’  spam-interface.   The  manual  section
                 “Handling spam” contains examples for some programs.

       spamfilter-rate-scanscore
                 [Option]  Because  of  the  generic  nature  of the ‘filter’ spam-interface spam scores are not
                 supported for it by default, but if the [Option]nal regular  expression  support  is  available
                 then  setting  this  variable  can  be used to overcome this restriction.  It is interpreted as
                 follows: first a number (digits) is parsed that must be followed by  a  semicolon  ‘;’  and  an
                 extended  regular  expression.   Then  the latter is used to parse the first output line of the
                 spamfilter-rate hook, and, in case the evaluation  is  successful,  the  group  that  has  been
                 specified via the number is interpreted as a floating point scan score.

       ssl-ca-dir-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-dir-HOST, ssl-ca-dir, ssl-ca-file-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-file-HOST, ssl-ca-file
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-ca-file, tls-ca-dir.

       ssl-ca-flags-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-flags-HOST, ssl-ca-flags
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-ca-flags.

       ssl-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST, ssl-ca-no-defaults-HOST, ssl-ca-no-defaults
                 [Obsolete](Boolean)[Option] Predecessor of tls-ca-no-defaults.

       ssl-cert-USER@HOST, ssl-cert-HOST, ssl-cert
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the Certificate slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-cipher-list-USER@HOST, ssl-cipher-list-HOST, ssl-cipher-list
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the CipherString slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-config-file
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-file.

       ssl-config-module-USER@HOST, ssl-config-module-HOST, ssl-config-module
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-module.

       ssl-config-pairs-USER@HOST, ssl-config-pairs-HOST, ssl-config-pairs
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-crl-dir, ssl-crl-file
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file.

       ssl-curves-USER@HOST, ssl-curves-HOST, ssl-curves
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the Curves slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-features
                 [Obsolete][Option](Read-only) Predecessor of tls-features.

       ssl-key-USER@HOST, ssl-key-HOST, ssl-key
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the PrivateKey slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-method-USER@HOST, ssl-method-HOST, ssl-method
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the Protocol slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-protocol-USER@HOST, ssl-protocol-HOST, ssl-protocol
                 [Obsolete][Option] Please use the Protocol slot of tls-config-pairs.

       ssl-rand-file
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-rand-file.

       ssl-verify-USER@HOST, ssl-verify-HOST, ssl-verify
                 [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-verify.

       stealthmua
                 If  only  set  without  an  assigned  value,  then  this setting inhibits the generation of the
                 ‘Message-ID:’, ‘Content-ID:’ and ‘User-Agent:’ header fields that include obvious references to
                 S-nail.  There are two pitfalls associated  with  this:  First,  the  message  id  of  outgoing
                 messages  is  not  known anymore.  Second, an expert may still use the remaining information in
                 the header to track down the originating mail user agent.  If set to the value ‘noagent’,  then
                 the mentioned ‘Message-ID:’ and ‘Content-ID:’ suppression does not occur.

       system-mailrc
                 (Read-only)  The  compiled  in path of the system wide initialization file one of the “Resource
                 files”: s-nail.rc.

       termcap   ([Option]) This specifies a comma-separated list of Terminal Information Library  (libterminfo,
                 -lterminfo)  and/or  Termcap  Access  Library  (libtermcap,  -ltermcap)  capabilities  (see “On
                 terminal control and line editor”, escape commas with reverse solidus) to be used to  overwrite
                 or  define  entries.   Note  this variable will only be queried once at program startup and can
                 thus only be specified in resource files or on the command line.

                 String capabilities form ‘cap=value’ pairs and are expected unless noted  otherwise.   Numerics
                 have  to  be  notated  as ‘cap#number’ where the number is expected in normal decimal notation.
                 Finally, booleans do not have any value but indicate a true or  false  state  simply  by  being
                 defined  or not; this indeed means that S-nail does not support undefining an existing boolean.
                 String capability values will undergo some  expansions  before  use:  for  one  notations  like
                 ‘^LETTER’  stand  for  ‘control-LETTER’,  and  for  clarification  purposes ‘\E’ can be used to
                 specify ‘escape’ (the control notation ‘^[’ could lead  to  misreadings  when  a  left  bracket
                 follows, which it does for the standard CSI sequence); finally three letter octal sequences, as
                 in  ‘\061’,  are  supported.   To  specify  that a terminal supports 256-colours, and to define
                 sequences that home the cursor and produce an audible bell, one might write:

                       ? set termcap='Co#256,home=\E[H,bel=^G'

                 The following terminal capabilities are or may be meaningful for the operation of the  built-in
                 line editor or S-nail in general:

                 am        auto_right_margin:  boolean  which  indicates  if  the  right  margin  needs  special
                           treatment; the xenl capability is related, for more see COLUMNS.
                 clear or cl
                           clear_screen: clear the screen and home cursor.  (Will be simulated via ho plus cd.)
                 colors or Co
                           max_colors: numeric capability specifying the maximum number of colours.   Note  that
                           S-nail does not actually care about the terminal beside that, but always emits ANSI /
                           ISO 6429 escape sequences.
                 cr        carriage_return:  move  to the first column in the current row.  The default built-in
                           fallback is ‘\r’.
                 cub1 or le
                           cursor_left: move the cursor left one space (non-destructively).  The default  built-
                           in fallback is ‘\b’.
                 cuf1 or nd
                           cursor_right:  move  the  cursor  right  one  space (non-destructively).  The default
                           built-in fallback is ‘\E[C’, which is used by most terminals.  Less often occur ‘\EC’
                           and ‘\EOC’.
                 ed or cd  clr_eos: clear the screen.
                 el or ce  clr_eol: clear to the end of line.  (Will be simulated via  ch  plus  repetitions  of
                           space characters.)
                 home or ho
                           cursor_home: home cursor.
                 hpa or ch
                           column_address:  move  the cursor (to the given column parameter) in the current row.
                           (Will be simulated via cr plus nd.)
                 rmcup or te / smcup or ti
                           exit_ca_mode and enter_ca_mode, respectively: exit and enter the  alternative  screen
                           ca-mode,  effectively  turning  S-nail  into  a fullscreen application.  This must be
                           enabled explicitly by setting termcap-ca-mode.
                 smkx or ks / rmkx or ke
                           keypad_xmit and keypad_local, respectively: enable and disable the keypad.   This  is
                           always enabled if available, because it seems even keyboards without keypads generate
                           other  key  codes for, e.g., cursor keys in that case, and only if enabled we see the
                           codes that we are interested in.
                 xenl or xn
                           eat_newline_glitch: boolean which indicates whether a newline  written  in  the  last
                           column  of  an  auto_right_margin  indicating  terminal is ignored.  With it the full
                           terminal width is available even on autowrap terminals.

                 Many more capabilities which describe key-sequences are documented for bind.

       termcap-ca-mode
                 [Option] Allow usage of the exit_ca_mode and enter_ca_mode terminal capabilities, see  termcap.
                 Note  this variable will only be queried once at program startup and can thus only be specified
                 in resource files or on the command line.

       termcap-disable
                 [Option] Disable any interaction with a terminal control library.  If  set  only  some  generic
                 fallback  built-ins  and possibly the content of termcap describe the terminal to S-nail.  Note
                 this variable will only be queried once at program startup and can thus only  be  specified  in
                 resource files or on the command line.

       tls-ca-dir-USER@HOST, tls-ca-dir-HOST, tls-ca-dir, tls-ca-file-USER@HOST, tls-ca-file-HOST, tls-ca-file
                 [Option] Directory and file, respectively, for pools of trusted CA certificates in PEM (Privacy
                 Enhanced  Mail) format, for the purpose of verification of TLS server certificates.  Concurrent
                 use is possible, the file is loaded once needed first, the directory lookup is  performed  anew
                 as a last resort whenever necessary.  The CA certificate pool built into the TLS library can be
                 disabled  via  tls-ca-no-defaults,  further fine-tuning is possible via tls-ca-flags.  Note the
                 directory search variant requires the certificate files to adhere special filename conventions,
                 please see SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) and verify(1) (or c_rehash(1)).

       tls-ca-flags-USER@HOST, tls-ca-flags-HOST, tls-ca-flags
                 [Option] Can be used to fine-tune behaviour  of  the  X509  CA  certificate  storage,  and  the
                 certificate  verification that is used (also see tls-verify).  The value is expected to consist
                 of a comma-separated list of configuration directives, with any  intervening  whitespace  being
                 ignored.   The  directives directly map to flags that can be passed to X509_STORE_set_flags(3),
                 which are usually defined in a file openssl/x509_vfy.h, and the availability of  which  depends
                 on  the  used TLS library version: a directive without mapping is ignored (error log subject to
                 debug).  Directives currently understood (case-insensitively) include:

                 no-alt-chains
                           If the initial chain is not trusted, do not attempt to build  an  alternative  chain.
                           Setting  this  flag  will  make  OpenSSL certificate verification match that of older
                           OpenSSL versions, before automatic building and checking of  alternative  chains  has
                           been implemented; also see trusted-first.
                 no-check-time
                           Do not check certificate/CRL validity against current time.
                 partial-chain
                           By default partial, incomplete chains which cannot be verified up to the chain top, a
                           self-signed  root certificate, will not verify.  With this flag set, a chain succeeds
                           to verify if at least one  signing  certificate  of  the  chain  is  in  any  of  the
                           configured   trusted   stores   of   CA   certificates.    The  OpenSSL  manual  page
                           SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) gives some advise how to  manage  your  own  trusted
                           store of CA certificates.
                 strict    Disable workarounds for broken certificates.
                 trusted-first
                           Try  building a chain using issuers in the trusted store first to avoid problems with
                           server-sent legacy intermediate certificates.   Newer  versions  of  OpenSSL  support
                           alternative chain checking and enable it by default, resulting in the same behaviour;
                           also see no-alt-chains.

       tls-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST, tls-ca-no-defaults-HOST, tls-ca-no-defaults
                 (Boolean)[Option]  Do  not  load  the  default CA locations that are built into the used to TLS
                 library to verify TLS server certificates.

       tls-config-file
                 [Option]   If   this   variable   is   set   CONF_modules_load_file(3)   (if   announced    via
                 ‘+modules-load-file’ in tls-features) is used to allow resource file based configuration of the
                 TLS  library.   This  happens  once  the  library is used first, which may also be early during
                 startup (logged with verbose)!  If a non-empty value  is  given  then  the  given  file,  after
                 performing  “Filename  transformations”,  will  be  used  instead  of  the TLS libraries global
                 default, and it is an error if the file cannot be loaded.  The application name will always  be
                 passed as ‘s-nail’.  Some TLS libraries support application-specific configuration via resource
                 files loaded like this, please see tls-config-module.

       tls-config-module-USER@HOST, tls-config-module-HOST, tls-config-module
                 [Option]  If  file  based  application-specific configuration via tls-config-file is available,
                 announced as ‘+ctx-config’ by tls-features, indicating availability of SSL_CTX_config(3), then,
                 it becomes possible to use a central TLS configuration file for all programs, including s-nail,
                 e.g.:

                       # Register a configuration section for s-nail
                       s-nail = mailx_master
                       # The top configuration section creates a relation
                       # in between dynamic SSL configuration and an actual
                       # program specific configuration section
                       [mailx_master]
                       ssl_conf = mailx_tls_config
                       # Well that actual program specific configuration section
                       # now can map individual tls-config-module names to sections,
                       # e.g., tls-config-module=account_xy
                       [mailx_tls_config]
                       account_xy = mailx_account_xy
                       account_yz = mailx_account_yz
                       [mailx_account_xy]
                       MinProtocol = TLSv1.2
                       Curves=P-521
                       [mailx_account_yz]
                       CipherString = TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:
                       MinProtocol = TLSv1.1
                       Options = Bugs

       tls-config-pairs-USER@HOST, tls-config-pairs-HOST, tls-config-pairs
                 [Option] The value of this variable chain will be interpreted  as  a  comma-separated  list  of
                 directive/value  pairs.   Directives  and  values need to be separated by equals signs ‘=’, any
                 whitespace  surrounding  pair  members  is  removed.   Keys  are  (usually)   case-insensitive.
                 Different  to  when  placing  these  pairs in a tls-config-module section of a tls-config-file,
                 commas ‘,’ need to be escaped  with  a  reverse  solidus  ‘\’  when  included  in  pairs;  also
                 different:  if  the equals sign ‘=’ is preceded with an asterisk ‘*’ “Filename transformations”
                 will be performed on the value; it is an  error  if  these  fail.   Unless  proper  support  is
                 announced  by tls-features (‘+conf-ctx’) only the keys below are supported, otherwise the pairs
                 will be used directly as arguments to the function SSL_CONF_cmd(3).

                 Certificate   Filename of a TLS client certificate (chain) required by some servers.   Fallback
                               support  via  SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(3).   “Filename transformations”
                               are performed.  PrivateKey will be set to  the  same  value  if  not  initialized
                               explicitly.   Some  services support so-called ‘external’ authentication if a TLS
                               client certificate was successfully  presented  during  connection  establishment
                               (“connecting is authenticating”).
                 CipherString  A  list  of  ciphers  for TLS connections, see ciphers(1).  By default no list of
                               ciphers is set, resulting in a Protocol-specific list of  ciphers  (the  protocol
                               standards  define  lists  of acceptable ciphers; possibly cramped by the used TLS
                               library).  Fallback support via SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3).
                 Ciphersuites  A list of ciphers used for TLSv1.3 connections, see ciphers(1).   These  will  be
                               joined  onto  the  list  of ciphers from CipherString.  Available if tls-features
                               announces ‘+ctx-set-ciphersuites’, as necessary via SSL_CTX_set_ciphersuites(3).
                 Curves        A list of supported elliptic curves, if applicable.  By  default  no  curves  are
                               set.  Fallback support via SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list(3), if available.
                 MaxProtocol, MinProtocol
                               The  maximum  and  minimum  supported  TLS  versions, respectively.  Available if
                               tls-features    announces    ‘+ctx-set-maxmin-proto’,    as     necessary     via
                               SSL_CTX_set_max_proto_version(3)   and   SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3);  these
                               fallbacks use an internal parser which understands the strings ‘SSLv3’,  ‘TLSv1’,
                               ‘TLSv1.1’, ‘TLSv1.2’, ‘TLSv1.3’, and the special value ‘None’, which disables the
                               given limit.
                 Options       Various  flags  to  set.   Fallback via SSL_CTX_set_options(3), in which case any
                               other value but (exactly) ‘Bugs’ results in an error.
                 PrivateKey    Filename of the private key in PEM format of a TLS client certificate.  If unset,
                               the value of Certificate is  used.   “Filename  transformations”  are  performed.
                               Fallback via SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(3).
                 Protocol      The    used   TLS   protocol.    If   tls-features   announces   ‘+conf-ctx’   or
                               ‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto’ then using  MaxProtocol  and  MinProtocol  is  preferable.
                               Fallback   is   SSL_CTX_set_options(3),  driven  via  an  internal  parser  which
                               understands the strings ‘SSLv3’, ‘TLSv1’, ‘TLSv1.1’,  ‘TLSv1.2’,  ‘TLSv1.3’,  and
                               the  special  value  ‘ALL’.  Multiple protocols may be given as a comma-separated
                               list, any whitespace is ignored, an optional plus  sign  ‘+’  prefix  enables,  a
                               hyphen-minus ‘-’ prefix disables a protocol, so that ‘-ALL, TLSv1.2’ enables only
                               the TLSv1.2 protocol.

       tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file
                 [Option]  Specify  a directory / a file, respectively, that contains a CRL in PEM format to use
                 when verifying TLS server certificates.

       tls-features
                 [Option](Read-only) This expands to a comma-separated list of  the  TLS  library  identity  and
                 optional features.  Currently supported identities are ‘libressl’ (LibreSSL) , ‘libssl-0x10100’
                 (OpenSSL  v1.1.x  series)  and ‘libssl-0x10000’ (elder OpenSSL series, other clones).  Optional
                 features are preceded with a plus  sign  ‘+’  when  available,  and  with  a  hyphen-minus  ‘-’
                 otherwise.

                 Currently  known  features are ‘conf-ctx’ (tls-config-pairs), ‘ctx-config’ (tls-config-module),
                 ‘ctx-set-ciphersuites’  (Ciphersuites   slot   of   tls-config-pairs),   ‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto’
                 (tls-config-pairs), ‘modules-load-file’ (tls-config-file), and ‘tls-rand-file’ (tls-rand-file).

       tls-fingerprint-USER@HOST, tls-fingerprint-HOST, tls-fingerprint
                 [Option]  It is possible to replace the verification of the connection peer certificate against
                 the entire local pool of  CAs  (for  more  see  “Encrypted  network  communication”)  with  the
                 comparison against a precalculated certificate message digest, the so-called fingerprint, to be
                 specified  as  the used tls-fingerprint-digest.  This fingerprint can be calculated with, e.g.,
                 ‘tls fingerprint HOST’.

       tls-fingerprint-digest-USER@HOST, tls-fingerprint-digest-HOST, tls-fingerprint-digest
                 [Option] The message digest  to  be  used  when  creating  TLS  certificate  fingerprints,  the
                 defaults,  if available, in test order, being ‘BLAKE2s256’, ‘SHA256’.  For the complete list of
                 digest algorithms refer to smime-sign-digest.

       tls-rand-file
                 [Option] If tls-features announces ‘+tls-rand-file’ then this will be queried to  find  a  file
                 with random entropy data which can be used to seed the P(seudo)R(andom)N(umber)G(enerator), see
                 RAND_load_file(3).   The  default filename (RAND_file_name(3), normally ~/.rnd) will be used if
                 this variable is not set or empty, or if the “Filename transformations”  fail.   Shall  seeding
                 the  PRNG  have  been  successful,  RAND_write_file(3)  will  be  called to update the entropy.
                 Remarks: libraries which do not announce this feature seed the PRNG by other means.

       tls-verify-USER@HOST, tls-verify-HOST, tls-verify
                 [Option] Variable chain that sets the action to be performed if  an  error  occurs  during  TLS
                 server  certificate  validation  against  the  specified  or  default  trust stores tls-ca-dir,
                 tls-ca-file,  or  the  TLS   library   built-in   defaults   (unless   usage   disallowed   via
                 tls-ca-no-defaults),  and  as fine-tuned via tls-ca-flags.  Valid (case-insensitive) values are
                 ‘strict’ (fail and close connection immediately), ‘ask’ (ask whether to  continue  on  standard
                 input),  ‘warn’  (show  a  warning  and  continue),  ‘ignore’ (do not perform validation).  The
                 default is ‘ask’.

       toplines  If defined, gives the number of lines of a message to be displayed with  the  command  top;  if
                 unset,  the first five lines are printed, if set to 0 the variable screen is inspected.  If the
                 value is negative then its absolute value will be used for unsigned right shifting (see  vexpr)
                 the screen height.

       topsqueeze
                 (Boolean) If set then the top command series will strip adjacent empty lines and quotations.

       ttycharset
                 The  character set of the terminal S-nail operates on, and the one and only supported character
                 set that S-nail can use if no character set conversion capabilities have been compiled into it,
                 in which case it defaults to ISO-8859-1.  Otherwise it defaults to  UTF-8.   Sufficient  locale
                 support  provided the default will be preferably deduced from the locale environment if that is
                 set (e.g., LC_CTYPE, see  there  for  more);  runtime  locale  changes  will  be  reflected  by
                 ttycharset  except during the program startup phase and if -S had been used to freeze the given
                 value.  Refer to the section “Character sets” for the complete picture about character sets.

       typescript-mode
                 (Boolean) A special multiplex variable that disables all variables and settings which result in
                 behaviour that interferes with running S-nail  in  script(1),  e.g.,  it  sets  colour-disable,
                 line-editor-disable and (before startup completed only) termcap-disable.  Unsetting it does not
                 restore the former state of the covered settings.

       umask     For a safe-by-default policy the process file mode creation mask umask(2) will be set to ‘0077’
                 on  program startup after the resource files have been loaded, and unless this variable is set.
                 By assigning this an empty value the active setting will not be changed,  otherwise  the  given
                 value  will  be  made  the  new file mode creation mask.  Child processes inherit the file mode
                 creation mask of their parent.

       user-HOST, user
                 [v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a global fallback user name, used in case none  has  been
                 given in the protocol and account-specific URL.  This variable defaults to the name of the user
                 who runs S-nail.

       v15-compat
                 Enable  upward compatibility with S-nail version 15.0 in respect to which configuration options
                 are available and how they are handled.  If set to a non-empty value the command modifier  wysh
                 is  implied  and thus enforces “Shell-style argument quoting” over “Old-style argument quoting”
                 for all commands which support both.  This manual uses  [v15-compat]  and  [no  v15-compat]  to
                 refer to the new and the old way of doing things, respectively.

       verbose   (Boolean)  This  setting, also controllable via the command line option -v, causes S-nail to be
                 more verbose, e.g., it will display obsoletion  warnings  and  TLS  certificate  chains.   Even
                 though marked (Boolean) this option may be set up to three times in order to increase the level
                 of verbosity, higher levels show details of the actual message delivery, protocol conversations
                 and even variable lookups; a single unset verbose is sufficient to disable verbosity as such.

       version, version-date, version-hexnum, version-major, version-minor, version-update
                 (Read-only)  S-nail  version  information:  the  first  variable  is a string with the complete
                 version identification, the second the release date in ISO 8601  notation  without  time.   The
                 third  is  a 32-bit hexadecimal number with the upper 8 bits storing the major, followed by the
                 minor and update version numbers which occupy 12 bits each.  The latter three variables contain
                 only decimal digits: the major, minor and update version numbers.  The output  of  the  command
                 version will include this information.

       writebackedited
                 If this variable is set messages modified using the edit or visual commands are written back to
                 the  current  folder  when it is quit; it is only honoured for writable folders in MBOX format,
                 though.  Note that the editor will be pointed to the raw message content in  that  case,  i.e.,
                 neither  MIME decoding nor decryption will have been performed, and proper mbox-rfc4155 ‘From_’
                 quoting of newly added or edited content is also left as an exercise to the user.

ENVIRONMENT

       The term “environment variable” should be considered  an  indication  that  these  variables  are  either
       standardized  as  vivid  parts  of  process  environments, or that they are commonly found in there.  The
       process environment is inherited from the sh(1) once S-nail is started, and unless  otherwise  explicitly
       noted  handling of the following variables transparently integrates into that of the “INTERNAL VARIABLES”
       from S-nail's point of view.  This means that, e.g., they can be  managed  via  set  and  unset,  causing
       automatic program environment updates (to be inherited by newly created child processes).

       In  order  to  integrate  other  environment variables equally they need to be imported (linked) with the
       command environ.  This command can also be used to set and  unset  non-integrated  environment  variables
       from  scratch,  sufficient  system support provided.  The following example, applicable to a POSIX shell,
       sets the COLUMNS environment variable for S-nail only, and beforehand exports  the  EDITOR  in  order  to
       affect any further processing in the running shell:

             $ EDITOR="vim -u ${HOME}/.vimrc"
             $ export EDITOR
             $ COLUMNS=80 s-nail -R

       COLUMNS   The  user's preferred width in column positions for the terminal screen.  Queried and used once
                 on program startup in interactive or batch (-#) mode, actively managed for child processes  and
                 the  MLE  (see  “On  terminal  control  and line editor”) in interactive mode thereafter.  Non-
                 interactive mode always uses, and the fallback default is a compile-time constant,  by  default
                 80  columns.   If  in batch mode COLUMNS and LINES are both set but not both are usable (empty,
                 not a number, or 0) at program startup, then the real terminal screen size will  be  (tried  to
                 be)  determined  once.   (Normally  the sh(1) manages these variables, and unsets them for pipe
                 specifications etc.)

       DEAD      The name of the (mailbox) file to use for saving aborted messages if save is set; this defaults
                 to ~/dead.letter.  If the variable debug is set no output  will  be  generated,  otherwise  the
                 contents of the file will be replaced.

       EDITOR    Pathname  of the text editor to use for the edit command and ~e (see “COMMAND ESCAPES”); VISUAL
                 is used for a more display oriented editor.

       HOME      The user's home directory.  This  variable  is  only  used  when  it  resides  in  the  process
                 environment.  The calling user's home directory will be used instead if this directory does not
                 exist, is not accessible or cannot be read; it will always be used for the root user.  (No test
                 for  being writable is performed to allow usage by non-privileged users within read-only jails,
                 but dependent on the variable settings this directory is a  default  write  target,  e.g.,  for
                 DEAD, MBOX and more.)

       LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, LANG
                 [Option]  The  (names  in  lookup  order  of  the)  locale(7) (and / or see setlocale(3)) which
                 indicates the used “Character sets”.  Runtime changes trigger automatic updates of  the  entire
                 locale  system,  which  includes updating ttycharset (except during startup if the variable has
                 been frozen via -S).

       LINES     The user's preferred number of lines for the terminal screen.  The behaviour  is  as  described
                 for  COLUMNS,  yet  the  compile-time  constant  used in non-interactive mode and as a fallback
                 defaults to 24 (lines).

       LISTER    Pathname of the directory lister to  use  in  the  folders  command  when  operating  on  local
                 mailboxes.  Default is ls(1) (path search through SHELL).

       LOGNAME   Upon  startup S-nail will actively ensure that this variable refers to the name of the user who
                 runs S-nail, in order to be able to pass a verified name to any newly created child process.

       MAIL      Is used as the user's “primary system mailbox” unless inbox is set.  This is assumed to  be  an
                 absolute  pathname.   If  this  environmental fallback is also not set, a built-in compile-time
                 default is used.

       MAILCAPS  [Option] Overrides the default path search for “The Mailcap files”, which  is  defined  in  the
                 standard  RFC  1524  as  ‘~/.mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap’.  (‐
                 S-nail makes it a configuration option, however.)  Note this is not a search path, but  a  path
                 search.

       MAILRC    Is  used  as  a  startup file instead of ~/.mailrc if set.  In order to avoid side-effects from
                 configuration files scripts should either set this variable to /dev/null or the -: command line
                 option should be used.

       MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC
                 If this variable is set then reading of s-nail.rc (aka system-mailrc) at startup is  inhibited,
                 i.e.,  the  same  effect  is  achieved as if S-nail had been started up with the option -: (and
                 according argument) or -n.  This  variable  is  only  used  when  it  resides  in  the  process
                 environment.

       MBOX      The  name  of  the  user's “secondary mailbox” file.  A logical subset of the special “Filename
                 transformations” (also see file) are supported.  The default  is  ~/mbox.   Traditionally  this
                 MBOX  is  used  as  the  file to save messages from the “primary system mailbox” that have been
                 read.  Also see “Message states”.

       NETRC     [v15-compat][Option] This variable overrides the default location of the user's ~/.netrc file.

       PAGER     Pathname of the program to use for backing the command more, and when the crt variable enforces
                 usage of a pager for output.  The default paginator is more(1) (path search through SHELL).

                 S-nail inspects the contents of this variable: if its contains the string “less”  then  a  non-
                 existing environment variable LESS will be set to ‘Ri’, likewise for “lv” LV will optionally be
                 set to ‘-c’.  Alse see colour-pager.

       PATH      A  colon-separated list of directories that is searched by the shell when looking for commands,
                 e.g., ‘/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/local/bin’.

       POSIXLY_CORRECT
                 This variable is automatically looked for upon startup, see posix for more.

       SHELL     The shell to use for the commands  !,  shell,  the  ~!  “COMMAND  ESCAPES”  and  when  starting
                 subprocesses.  A default shell is used if this environment variable is not defined.

       SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH
                 Specifies  a  time  in  seconds  since  the  Unix epoch (1970-01-01) to be used in place of the
                 current time.  This variable is looked up upon program startup, and its existence  will  switch
                 S-nail to a reproducible mode (https://reproducible-builds.org) which uses deterministic random
                 numbers,  a  special  fixated  pseudo  LOGNAME  and  more.   This  operation  mode  is used for
                 development and by software packagers.  [v15 behaviour may differ] Currently an invalid setting
                 is only ignored, rather than causing a program abortion.

                       $ SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH=`date +%s` s-nail

       TERM      [Option] The terminal type for which output is to be prepared.  For extended  colour  and  font
                 control  please  refer  to  “Coloured  display”,  and for terminal management in general to “On
                 terminal control and line editor”.

       TMPDIR    Except for the root user this variable defines the directory for temporary  files  to  be  used
                 instead  of  /tmp  (or the given compile-time constant) if set, existent, accessible as well as
                 read- and writable.  This variable is only used when it resides in the process environment, but
                 S-nail will ensure at startup that this environment variable is updated  to  contain  a  usable
                 temporary directory.

       USER      Identical  to  LOGNAME (see there), but this variable is not standardized, should therefore not
                 be used, and is only corrected if already set.

       VISUAL    Pathname of the text editor to use for the  visual  command  and  ~v  (see “COMMAND  ESCAPES”);
                 EDITOR is used for a less display oriented editor.

FILES

       ~/.mailrc
                 User-specific  file  giving initial commands, one of the “Resource files”.  The actual value is
                 read from MAILRC.

       s-nail.rc
                 System wide initialization file, one of the “Resource files”.  The actual value  is  read  from
                 system-mailrc.

       ~/.mailcap
                 [Option] Personal MIME type handler definition file, see “The Mailcap files”.  This location is
                 part  of  the  RFC  1524  standard  search  path,  which  is  a configuration option and can be
                 overridden via MAILCAPS.

       /etc/mailcap
                 [Option] System wide MIME type handler definition file, see “The Mailcap files”.  This location
                 is part of the RFC 1524 standard search path, which  is  a  configuration  option  and  can  be
                 overridden via

       ~/mbox    The default value for MBOX.

       ~/.mime.types
                 Personal MIME types, see “The mime.types files”.

       /etc/mime.types
                 System wide MIME types, see “The mime.types files”.

       ~/.netrc  [v15-compat][Option]  The  default location of the user's .netrc file – the section “The .netrc
                 file” documents the file format.  The actually used path can be overridden via NETRC.

       /dev/null
                 The data sink null(4).

   Resource files
       Upon startup S-nail reads in several resource files, in order:

       s-nail.rc
                 System wide initialization file (system-mailrc).  Reading  of  this  file  can  be  suppressed,
                 either  by  using the -: (and according argument) or -n command line options, or by setting the
                 “ENVIRONMENT” variable MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC.

       ~/.mailrc
                 File giving initial commands.  A different file can be  chosen  by  setting  the  “ENVIRONMENT”
                 variable MAILRC.  Reading of this file can be suppressed with the -: command line option.

       mailx-extra-rc
                 Defines  a  startup  file to be read after all other resource files.  It can be used to specify
                 settings that are not understood by other mailx(1) implementations, for example.  This variable
                 is only honoured when defined in a resource file, e.g., it is one of the “INTERNAL VARIABLES”.

       The content of these files is interpreted as follows:

          The whitespace characters space, tabulator and newline, as well as those defined by the variable ifs,
           are removed from the beginning and end of input lines.
          Empty lines are ignored.
          Any other line is interpreted as a command.  It may be  spread  over  multiple  input  lines  if  the
           newline  character  is  “escaped” by placing a reverse solidus character ‘\’ as the last character of
           the line; whereas any leading whitespace of follow lines is ignored,  trailing  whitespace  before  a
           escaped newline remains in the input.
          If  the line (content) starts with the number sign ‘#’ then it is a comment-command and also ignored.
           (The comment-command is a real command, which does nothing, and  therefore  the  usual  follow  lines
           mechanism applies!)

       Unless  S-nail  is about to enter interactive mode syntax errors that occur while loading these files are
       treated as errors and cause program exit.  More files with syntactically equal content can  be  sourceed.
       The following, saved in a file, would be an examplary content:

              # This line is a comment command.  And y\
                 es, it is really continued here.
             set debug \
                 verbose
                 set editheaders

   The mime.types files
       As  stated  in  “HTML  mail and MIME attachments” S-nail needs to learn about MIME (Multipurpose Internet
       Mail Extensions) media types in order to classify message and attachment content.  One  source  for  them
       are   mime.types   files,   the   loading   of   which   can   be  controlled  by  setting  the  variable
       mimetypes-load-control.  Another is the command mimetype, which also offers access to S-nails  MIME  type
       cache.  mime.types files have the following syntax:

             type/subtype extension [extension ...]
             # E.g.: text/html html htm

       where  ‘type/subtype’  define the MIME media type, as standardized in RFC 2046: ‘type’ is used to declare
       the general type of data, while the ‘subtype’ specifies a specific format for that type of data.  One  or
       multiple filename ‘extension’s, separated by whitespace, can be bound to the media type format.  Comments
       may  be introduced anywhere on a line with a number sign ‘#’, causing the remaining line to be discarded.
       S-nail also supports an extended, non-portable syntax in especially crafted files, which  can  be  loaded
       via the alternative value syntax of mimetypes-load-control, and prepends an optional ‘type-marker’:

             [type-marker ]type/subtype extension [extension ...]

       The following type markers are supported:

       ?         Treat message parts with this content as plain text.
       ?t        The same as plain ?.
       ?h        Treat  message parts with this content as HTML tagsoup.  If the [Option]al HTML-tagsoup-to-text
                 converter is not available treat the content as plain text instead.
       ?H        Likewise ?h, but instead of falling back to plain text require an explicit content  handler  to
                 be defined.
       ?q        If  no  handler  can be found a text message is displayed which says so.  This can be annoying,
                 for example signatures serve a contextual purpose, their content is of no use by itself.   This
                 marker will avoid displaying the text message.

       Further  reading:  for sending messages: mimetype, mime-allow-text-controls, mimetypes-load-control.  For
       reading  etc.  messages:  “HTML  mail   and   MIME   attachments”,   “The   Mailcap   files”,   mimetype,
       mime-counter-evidence, mimetypes-load-control, pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE, pipe-EXTENSION.

   The Mailcap files
       This  feature is not available in v14.9.0, sorry! RFC 1524 defines a “User Agent Configuration Mechanism”
       which S-nail [Option]ally supports (see “HTML mail and MIME attachments”).  It defines a file  format  to
       be  used  to  inform mail user agent programs about the locally-installed facilities for handling various
       data formats, i.e., about commands and how they can  be  used  to  display,  edit  et  cetera  MIME  part
       contents,  as  well as a default path search that includes multiple possible locations of “mailcap” files
       and the MAILCAPS environment variable that can be used to overwrite that (repeating here that it is not a
       search path, but instead a path search specification).  Any existing files will be  loaded  in  sequence,
       appending any content to the list of MIME type handler directives.

       “Mailcap”  files  consist  of a set of newline separated entries.  Comment lines start with a number sign
       ‘#’ (in the first column!) and are ignored.   Empty  lines  are  also  ignored.   All  other  lines  form
       individual  entries  that  must  adhere  to  the  syntax  described below.  To extend a single entry (not
       comment) its line can be continued on follow lines if newline characters are “escaped” by preceding  them
       with  the  reverse solidus character ‘\’.  The standard does not specify how leading whitespace of follow
       lines is to be treated, therefore S-nail retains it.

       “Mailcap” entries consist of a number of semicolon ‘;’ separated fields,  and  the  reverse  solidus  ‘\’
       character  can  be  used to escape any following character including semicolon and itself.  The first two
       fields are mandatory and must occur in the specified order, the remaining fields  are  optional  and  may
       appear in any order.  Leading and trailing whitespace of content is ignored (removed).

       The  first field defines the MIME ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’ the entry is about to handle (case-insensitively, and no
       reverse solidus escaping is possible in this field).  If the subtype is specified as an asterisk ‘*’  the
       entry  is meant to match all subtypes of the named type, e.g., ‘audio/*’ would match any audio type.  The
       second field defines the shell command which shall be used to “display” MIME parts of the given type;  it
       is implicitly called the view command.

       For  data  “consuming”  shell  commands  message (MIME part) data is passed via standard input unless the
       given shell command includes one or more instances of the (unquoted) string ‘%s’,  in  which  case  these
       instances  will be replaced with a temporary filename and the data will have been stored in the file that
       is being pointed to.  Likewise, for data “producing” shell commands data is assumed to  be  generated  on
       standard  output  unless  the given command includes (one ore multiple) ‘%s’.  In any case any given ‘%s’
       format is replaced with a(n already) properly quoted filename.  Note that when a command makes use  of  a
       temporary file via ‘%s’ then S-nail will remove it again, as if the x-mailx-tmpfile, x-mailx-tmpfile-fill
       and x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink flags had been set; see below for more.

       The optional fields either define a shell command or an attribute (flag) value, the latter being a single
       word  and the former being a keyword naming the field followed by an equals sign ‘=’ succeeded by a shell
       command, and as usual for any “Mailcap” content any  whitespace  surrounding  the  equals  sign  will  be
       removed, too.  Optional fields include the following:

       compose   A  program that can be used to compose a new body or body part in the given format.  (Currently
                 unused.)

       composetyped
                 Similar to the compose field, but is to be used when the composing program needs to specify the
                 ‘Content-type:’ header field to be applied to the composed data.  (Currently unused.)

       edit      A program that can be used to edit a body  or  body  part  in  the  given  format.   (Currently
                 unused.)

       print     A  program  that  can  be used to print a message or body part in the given format.  (Currently
                 unused.)

       test      Specifies a program to be run to test some condition, e.g., the machine  architecture,  or  the
                 window  system  in  use,  to  determine whether or not this mailcap entry applies.  If the test
                 fails, a subsequent mailcap entry should be sought; also see x-mailx-test-once.

       needsterminal
                 This flag field indicates that the given shell command must be run on an interactive  terminal.
                 S-nail  will temporarily release the terminal to the given command in interactive mode, in non-
                 interactive mode this entry will be entirely ignored; this flag implies x-mailx-noquote.

       copiousoutput
                 A flag field which indicates that the output of the view command will be an extended stream  of
                 textual  output that can be (re)integrated into S-nail's normal visual display.  It is mutually
                 exclusive with needsterminal.

       textualnewlines
                 A flag field which indicates that this type of data is line-oriented and that,  if  encoded  in
                 ‘base64’,  all  newlines should be converted to canonical form (CRLF) before encoding, and will
                 be in that form after decoding.  (Currently unused.)

       nametemplate
                 This field gives a filename format, in which ‘%s’ will be replaced  by  a  random  string,  the
                 joined  combination  of which will be used as the filename denoted by MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY.
                 One could specify that a GIF file being passed to an image viewer should have a name ending  in
                 ‘.gif’  by using ‘nametemplate=%s.gif’.  Note that S-nail ignores the name template unless that
                 solely specifies a filename suffix that consists of (ASCII) alphabetic and numeric  characters,
                 the underscore and dot only.

       x11-bitmap
                 Names  a  file,  in  X11 bitmap (xbm) format, which points to an appropriate icon to be used to
                 visually denote the presence of this kind of data.  This field is not used by S-nail.

       description
                 A textual description that describes this type of data.

       x-mailx-even-if-not-interactive
                 An extension flag test field — by default handlers without copiousoutput are  entirely  ignored
                 in  non-interactive  mode, but if this flag is set then their use will be considered.  It is an
                 error if this flag is set for commands that use the flag needsterminal.

       x-mailx-noquote
                 An extension flag field that indicates that even a copiousoutput view command shall not be used
                 to generate message quotes (as it would be by default).

       x-mailx-async
                 Extension flag field that denotes that the given view command shall be executed asynchronously,
                 without blocking S-nail.  Cannot be used in conjunction with needsterminal; the standard output
                 of the command will go to /dev/null.

       x-mailx-test-once
                 Extension flag which denotes whether the given test command shall be evaluated  once  only  and
                 the  (boolean)  result  be  cached.  This is handy if some global unchanging condition is to be
                 queried, like “running under the X Window System”.

       x-mailx-tmpfile
                 Extension flag field that requests creation of a zero-sized temporary file, the name  of  which
                 is  to  be  placed in the environment variable MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY.  It is an error to use
                 this flag with commands that include a ‘%s’ format.

       x-mailx-tmpfile-fill
                 Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard input; if this flag is set
                 then the data will instead be written into the implied  x-mailx-tmpfile.   In  order  to  cause
                 deletion  of  the temporary file you will have to set x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink explicitly!  It is
                 an error to use this flag with commands that include a ‘%s’ format.

       x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink
                 Extension flag field that requests that the temporary file shall be deleted automatically  when
                 the  command loop is entered again at latest.  (Do not use this for asynchronous handlers.)  It
                 is an error to use this flag with commands that include a ‘%s’ format, or in  conjunction  with
                 x-mailx-async, or without also setting x-mailx-tmpfile or x-mailx-tmpfile-fill.

       x-mailx-tmpfile-keep
                 Using  the  string  ‘%s’  implies the three tmpfile related flags above, but if you want, e.g.,
                 x-mailx-async and deal with the temporary file yourself, you can add in this flag to forcefully
                 ignore x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink.

       The standard includes the possibility to define any number of additional entry fields, prefixed by  ‘x-’.
       Flag  fields  apply to the entire “Mailcap” entry — in some unusual cases, this may not be desirable, but
       differentiation can be accomplished via separate entries, taking advantage of the  fact  that  subsequent
       entries  are  searched  if  an  earlier one does not provide enough information.  E.g., if a view command
       needs to specify the needsterminal flag, but the compose command shall not, the following will  help  out
       the  latter  (with enabled debug or an increased verbose level S-nail will show information about handler
       evaluation):

             application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; needsterminal
             application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; compose=idraw %s

       In fields any occurrence of the format string ‘%t’ will be replaced by the ‘TYPE/SUBTYPE’  specification.
       Named  parameters  from  the ‘Content-type:’ field may be placed in the command execution line using ‘%{’
       followed by the parameter name and a closing ‘}’ character.  The entire  parameter  should  appear  as  a
       single command line argument, regardless of embedded spaces; thus:

             # Message
             Content-type:  multipart/mixed; boundary=42

             # Mailcap file
             multipart/*; /usr/local/bin/showmulti \
               %t %{boundary}  ;  composetyped  = /usr/local/bin/makemulti

             # Executed shell command
             /usr/local/bin/showmulti multipart/mixed 42

       Note  that  S-nail  does  not  support  handlers for multipart MIME parts as shown in this example (as of
       today).  S-nail does not support the additional formats ‘%n’ and ‘%F’.  An example file, also showing how
       to properly deal with the expansion of ‘%s’, which includes any quotes that are necessary to  make  it  a
       valid  shell  argument  by itself and thus will cause undesired behaviour when placed in additional user-
       provided quotes:

             # Comment line
             text/richtext; richtext %s; copiousoutput

             text/x-perl; perl -cWT %s

             application/pdf; \
               infile=%s\; \
                 trap "rm -f ${infile}" EXIT\; \
                 trap "exit 75" INT QUIT TERM\; \
                 mupdf %s; \
               x-mailx-async; x-mailx-tmpfile-keep

             application/*; echo "This is \"%t\" but \
                 is 50 \% Greek to me" \; < %s head -c 1024 | cat -vet; \
               copiousoutput; x-mailx-noquote

       Further  reading:  “HTML  mail  and  MIME  attachments”,  “The  mime.types  files”,  mimetype,  MAILCAPS,
       mime-counter-evidence, pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE, pipe-EXTENSION.

   The .netrc file
       The  .netrc  file  contains  user credentials for machine accounts.  The default location ~/.netrc may be
       overridden by the NETRC environment variable.  It is possible to load encrypted .netrc files by using  an
       appropriate value in netrc-pipe.

       The  file  consists  of  space,  tabulator  or newline separated tokens.  S-nail implements a parser that
       supports a superset of the original BSD syntax, but users should  nonetheless  be  aware  of  portability
       glitches of that file format, shall their .netrc be usable across multiple programs and platforms:

          BSD does not support single, but only double quotation marks, e.g., ‘password="pass with spaces"’.
          BSD  (only?)  supports  escaping  of  single  characters  via a reverse solidus (e.g., a space can be
           escaped via ‘\ ’), in- as well as outside of a quoted string.
          BSD does not require a final quotation mark of the last user input token.
          The original BSD (Berknet) parser also supported a format which allowed tokens to be  separated  with
           commas – whereas at least Hewlett-Packard still seems to support this syntax, S-nail does not!
          As  a non-portable extension some widely-used programs support shell-style comments: if an input line
           starts, after any amount of whitespace, with a number sign ‘#’, then the rest of the line is ignored.
          Whereas other programs may require that the .netrc file is accessible by only the user if it contains
           a password token for any other login than  “anonymous”,  S-nail  will  always  require  these  strict
           permissions.

       Of  the following list of supported tokens S-nail only uses (and caches) machine, login and password.  At
       runtime the command netrc can be used to control S-nail's .netrc cache.

       machine name
                 The hostname of the entries' machine, lowercase-normalized by S-nail before use.   Any  further
                 file content, until either end-of-file or the occurrence of another machine or a default first-
                 class token is bound (only related) to the machine name.

                 As  an  extension that should not be the cause of any worries S-nail supports a single wildcard
                 prefix for name:

                       machine *.example.com login USER password PASS
                       machine pop3.example.com login USER password PASS
                       machine smtp.example.com login USER password PASS

                 which would match ‘xy.example.com’ as well as ‘pop3.example.com’, but neither ‘example.com’ nor
                 ‘local.smtp.example.com’.   Note  that  in   the   example   neither   ‘pop3.example.com’   nor
                 ‘smtp.example.com’ will be matched by the wildcard, since the exact matches take precedence (it
                 is however faster to specify it the other way around).

       default   This  is  the same as machine except that it is a fallback entry that is used shall none of the
                 specified machines match; only one default token may be specified, and  it  must  be  the  last
                 first-class token.

       login name
                 The user name on the remote machine.

       password string
                 The user's password on the remote machine.

       account string
                 Supply an additional account password.  This is merely for FTP purposes.

       macdef name
                 Define  a  macro.   A  macro  is  defined  with the specified name; it is formed from all lines
                 beginning with the next line  and  continuing  until  a  blank  line  is  (consecutive  newline
                 characters  are)  encountered.   (Note  that  macdef  entries  cannot  be  utilized by multiple
                 machines, too, but must be defined following the machine they are intended to  be  used  with.)
                 If  a  macro  named init exists, it is automatically run as the last step of the login process.
                 This is merely for FTP purposes.

EXAMPLES

   An example configuration
             # This example assumes v15.0 compatibility mode
             set v15-compat

             # Request strict TLL transport layer security checks
             set tls-verify=strict

             # Where are the up-to-date TLS certificates?
             # (Since we manage up-to-date ones explicitly, do not use any,
             # possibly outdated, default certificates shipped with OpenSSL)
             #set tls-ca-dir=/etc/ssl/certs
             set tls-ca-file=/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt
             set tls-ca-no-defaults
             #set tls-ca-flags=partial-chain
             wysh set smime-ca-file="${tls-ca-file}" \
               smime-ca-no-defaults #smime-ca-flags="${tls-ca-flags}"

             # This could be outsourced to a central configuration file via
             # tls-config-file plus tls-config-module if the used library allows.
             # CipherString: explicitly define the list of ciphers, which may
             #   improve security, especially with protocols older than TLS v1.2.
             #   See ciphers(1).  Possibly best to only use tls-config-pairs-HOST
             #   (or -USER@HOST), as necessary, again..
             #   Note that TLSv1.3 uses Ciphersuites= instead, which will join
             #   with CipherString (if protocols older than v1.3 are allowed)
             # Curves: especially with TLSv1.3 curves selection may be desired.
             # MinProtocol,MaxProtocol: do not use protocols older than TLS v1.2.
             #   Change this only when the remote server does not support it:
             #   maybe use chain support via tls-config-pairs-HOST / -USER@HOST
             #   to define such explicit exceptions, then, e.g.,
             #     MinProtocol=TLSv1.1
             if [ "$tls-features" =% +ctx-set-maxmin-proto ]
               wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
                   CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
                   Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
                   MinProtocol=TLSv1.1'
             else
               wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
                   CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
                   Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
                   Protocol=-ALL\,+TLSv1.1 \, +TLSv1.2\, +TLSv1.3'
             endif

             # Essential setting: select allowed character sets
             set sendcharsets=utf-8,iso-8859-1

             # A very kind option: when replying to a message, first try to
             # use the same encoding that the original poster used herself!
             set reply-in-same-charset

             # When replying, do not merge From: and To: of the original message
             # into To:.  Instead old From: -> new To:, old To: -> merge Cc:.
             set recipients-in-cc

             # When sending messages, wait until the Mail-Transfer-Agent finishs.
             # Only like this you will be able to see errors reported through the
             # exit status of the MTA (including the built-in SMTP one)!
             set sendwait

             # Only use built-in MIME types, no mime.types(5) files
             set mimetypes-load-control

             # Default directory where we act in (relative to $HOME)
             set folder=mail
             # A leading "+" (often) means: under *folder*
             # *record* is used to save copies of sent messages
             set MBOX=+mbox.mbox DEAD=+dead.txt \
               record=+sent.mbox record-files record-resent

             # Make "file mymbox" and "file myrec" go to..
             shortcut mymbox %:+mbox.mbox myrec +sent.mbox

             # Not really optional, e.g., for S/MIME
             set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'

             # It may be necessary to set hostname and/or smtp-hostname
             # if the "SERVER" of mta and "domain" of from do not match.
             # The `urlencode' command can be used to encode USER and PASS
             set mta=(smtps?|submissions?)://[USER[:PASS]@]SERVER[:PORT] \
               smtp-auth=login/plain... \
               smtp-use-starttls

             # Never refuse to start into interactive mode, and more
             set emptystart \
               colour-pager crt= \
               followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes fullnames \
               history-file=+.s-nailhist history-size=-1 history-gabby \
               mime-counter-evidence=0b1111 \
               prompt='?\$?!\$!/\$^ERRNAME[\$account#\$mailbox-display]? ' \
               reply-to-honour=ask-yes \
               umask=

             # Only include the selected header fields when typing messages
             headerpick type retain from_ date from to cc subject \
               message-id mail-followup-to reply-to
             # ...when forwarding messages
             headerpick forward retain subject date from to cc
             # ...when saving message, etc.
             #headerpick save ignore ^Original-.*$ ^X-.*$

             # Some mailing lists
             mlist '@xyz-editor\.xyz$' '@xyzf\.xyz$'
             mlsubscribe '^xfans@xfans\.xyz$'

             # Handle a few file extensions (to store MBOX databases)
             filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
               gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c'  xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
               zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
               zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'

             # A real life example of a very huge free mail provider
             # Instead of directly placing content inside `account',
             # we `define' a macro: like that we can switch "accounts"
             # from within *on-compose-splice*, for example!
             define XooglX {
               set folder=~/spool/XooglX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
               set from='Your Name <address@examp.ple>'

               set pop3-no-apop-pop.gmXil.com
               shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.gmXil.com
               shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.gmXil.com
               # Or, entirely IMAP based setup
               #set folder=imaps://imap.gmail.com record="+[Gmail]/Sent Mail" \
               #   imap-cache=~/spool/cache

               set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@smtp.gmXil.com smtp-use-starttls
               # Alternatively:
               set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.gmail.com:465
             }
             account XooglX {
               \call XooglX
             }

             # Here is a pretty large one which does not allow sending mails
             # if there is a domain name mismatch on the SMTP protocol level,
             # which would bite us if the value of from does not match, e.g.,
             # for people who have a sXXXXeforge project and want to speak
             # with the mailing list under their project account (in from),
             # still sending the message through their normal mail provider
             define XandeX {
               set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
               set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'

               shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.yaXXex.com
               shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.yaXXex.com

               set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.yaXXex.com:465 \
                 hostname=yaXXex.com smtp-hostname=
             }
             account XandeX {
               \call Xandex
             }

             # Create some new commands so that, e.g., `ls /tmp' will..
             commandalias lls '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlrS'
             commandalias llS '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlS'

             set pipe-message/external-body='?* echo $MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL'

             # We do not support gpg(1) directly yet.  But simple --clearsign'd
             # message parts can be dealt with as follows:
             define V {
               localopts yes
               wysh set pipe-text/plain=$'?*#++=?\
                 < "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" awk \
                     -v TMPFILE="${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" \'\
                   BEGIN{done=0}\
                   /^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNED MESSAGE-----/,/^$/ {\
                     if(done++ != 0)\
                       next;\
                     print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
                     system("gpg --verify " TMPFILE " 2>&1");\
                     print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
                     print "";\
                     next;\
                   }\
                   /^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----/,\
                       /^-----END PGP SIGNATURE-----/{\
                     next;\
                   }\
                   {print}\
                 \''
                 print
             }
             commandalias V '\'call V

       When storing passwords in ~/.mailrc appropriate permissions should be set on this file with ‘$ chmod 0600
       ~/.mailrc’.  If the [Option]al netrc-lookup is available user credentials can be stored in the central ~/
       .netrc file instead; e.g., here is a different version of the example account that sets up SMTP and POP3:

             define XandeX {
               set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
               set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
               set netrc-lookup
               # Load an encrypted ~/.netrc by uncommenting the next line
               #set netrc-pipe='gpg -qd ~/.netrc.pgp'

               set mta=smtps://smtp.yXXXXx.ru:465 \
                   smtp-hostname= hostname=yXXXXx.com
               set pop3-keepalive=240 pop3-no-apop-pop.yXXXXx.ru
               commandalias xp fi pop3s://pop.yXXXXx.ru
             }
             account XandeX {
               \call XandeX
             }

       and, in the ~/.netrc file:

             machine *.yXXXXx.ru login USER password PASS

       This configuration should now work just fine:

             $ echo text | s-nail -dvv -AXandeX -s Subject user@exam.ple

   S/MIME step by step
       [Option] The first thing that is needed for “Signed and encrypted messages with  S/MIME”  is  a  personal
       certificate,  and  a  private key.  The certificate contains public information, in particular a name and
       email address(es), and the public key that can be used by others to encrypt messages for the  certificate
       holder  (the  owner of the private key), and to verify signed messages generated with that certificate('s
       private key).  Whereas the certificate is included in each signed message, the private key must  be  kept
       secret.   It  is used to decrypt messages that were previously encrypted with the public key, and to sign
       messages.

       For personal use it is recommended to get a S/MIME certificate from one of the major CAs on the Internet.
       Many CAs offer such certificates for free.  Usually offered is a combined certificate and private key  in
       PKCS#12  format  which S-nail does not accept directly.  To convert it to PEM format, the following shell
       command can be used; please read on for how to use these PEM files.

             $ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out certpem.pem -clcerts -nodes
             $ # Alternatively
             $ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out cert.pem -clcerts -nokeys
             $ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out key.pem -nocerts -nodes

       There is also https://www.CAcert.org which issues client and server  certificates  to  members  of  their
       community  for  free;  their root certificate (https://www.cacert.org/certs/root.crt) is often not in the
       default set of trusted CA root certificates, though,  which  means  their  root  certificate  has  to  be
       downloaded separately, and needs to be part of the S/MIME certificate validation chain by including it in
       smime-ca-dir  or  as  a vivid member of the smime-ca-file.  But let us take a step-by-step tour on how to
       setup S/MIME with a certificate from CAcert.org despite this situation!

       First of all you will have to become a  member  of  the  CAcert.org  community,  simply  by  registrating
       yourself  via the web interface.  Once you are, create and verify all email addresses you want to be able
       to create signed and encrypted messages for/with using the corresponding entries of  the  web  interface.
       Now  ready  to create S/MIME certificates, so let us create a new “client certificate”, ensure to include
       all email addresses that should be covered by the certificate in the following web form, and also to  use
       your name as the “common name”.

       Create a private key and a certificate request on your local computer (please see the manual pages of the
       used commands for more in-depth knowledge on what the used arguments etc. do):

             $ openssl req -nodes -newkey rsa:4096 -keyout key.pem -out creq.pem

       Afterwards  copy-and-paste  the content of “creq.pem” into the certificate-request (CSR) field of the web
       form on the CAcert.org website (you may need to unfold some “advanced options” to see  the  corresponding
       text  field).   This  last  step  will  ensure  that your private key (which never left your box) and the
       certificate belong together (through the public key that will find its way into the certificate  via  the
       certificate-request).   You are now ready and can create your CAcert certified certificate.  Download and
       store or copy-and-paste it as “pub.crt”.

       Yay.  In order to use your new S/MIME setup a combined private key/public key (certificate) file  has  to
       be created:

             $ cat key.pem pub.crt > ME@HERE.com.paired

       This  is  the  file  S-nail  will work with.  If you have created your private key with a passphrase then
       S-nail will ask you for it whenever a message is signed or decrypted,  unless  this  operation  has  been
       automated  as  described  in “Signed and encrypted messages with S/MIME”.  Set the following variables to
       henceforth use S/MIME (setting smime-ca-file is of interest for verification only):

             ? set smime-ca-file=ALL-TRUSTED-ROOT-CERTS-HERE \
                 smime-sign-cert=ME@HERE.com.paired \
                 smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
                 smime-sign

   Using CRLs with S/MIME or TLS
       [Option] Certification authorities (CAs) issue certificate revocation lists (CRLs) on  a  regular  basis.
       These  lists  contain  the serial numbers of certificates that have been declared invalid after they have
       been issued.  Such usually happens because the private key for  the  certificate  has  been  compromised,
       because the owner of the certificate has left the organization that is mentioned in the certificate, etc.
       To seriously use S/MIME or TLS verification, an up-to-date CRL is required for each trusted CA.  There is
       otherwise  no  method to distinguish between valid and invalidated certificates.  S-nail currently offers
       no mechanism to fetch CRLs, nor to access them on the Internet, so they have  to  be  retrieved  by  some
       external mechanism.

       S-nail accepts CRLs in PEM format only; CRLs in DER format must be converted, like, e.g.:

             $ openssl crl -inform DER -in crl.der -out crl.pem

       To  tell  S-nail  about  the  CRLs,  a directory that contains all CRL files (and no other files) must be
       created.  The smime-crl-dir or tls-crl-dir variables, respectively, must then be set  to  point  to  that
       directory.   After  that,  S-nail  requires  a  CRL  to  be  present for each CA that is used to verify a
       certificate.

FAQ

       In general it is a good idea to turn on debug (-d) and / or verbose (-v, twice)  if  something  does  not
       work well.  Very often a diagnostic message can be produced that leads to the problems' solution.

   S-nail shortly hangs on startup
       This  can  have two reasons, one is the necessity to wait for a file lock and cannot be helped, the other
       being that S-nail calls the function uname(2) in order to query the nodename of the  box  (sometimes  the
       real  one  is  needed  instead  of  the one represented by the internal variable hostname).  One may have
       varying success by ensuring that the real hostname and ‘localhost’ have entries in /etc/hosts,  or,  more
       generally,  that  the  name  service  is properly setup – and does hostname(1) return the expected value?
       Does this local hostname have a domain suffix?  RFC 6762 standardized  the  link-local  top-level  domain
       ‘.local’, try again after adding an (additional) entry with this extension.

   I cannot login to Google mail (via OAuth)
       Since  2014  some  free  service  providers  classify programs as “less secure” unless they use a special
       authentication method (OAuth 2.0) which was not standardized for non-HTTP protocol  authentication  token
       query until August 2015 (RFC 7628).

       Different  to  Kerberos  / GSSAPI, which is developed since the mid of the 1980s, where a user can easily
       create a local authentication ticket for her- and himself with the locally  installed  kinit(1)  program,
       that  protocol  has  no  such local part but instead requires a world-wide-web query to create or fetch a
       token; since there is no local cache this query would have to be performed whenever S-nail is invoked (in
       interactive sessions situation may differ).

       S-nail does not support OAuth.  Because of this it is necessary to declare S-nail a “less secure app” (on
       the providers account web page) in order to read and send mail.  However, it also seems possible to  take
       the following steps instead:

       1.   give the provider the number of a mobile phone,
       2.   enable “2-Step Verification”,
       3.   create an application specific password (16 characters), and
       4.   use  that  special  password instead of the real Google account password in S-nail (for more on that
            see the section “On URL syntax and credential lookup”).

   But, how about XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?
       Following up “I cannot login to Google  mail  (via  OAuth)”  one  OAuth-based  authentication  method  is
       available:  the  OAuth  2.0  bearer  token  usage  as standardized in RFC 6750, also known as XOAUTH2 and
       OAUTHBEARER, allows fetching a temporary access token via the web that can locally be used as a password.
       The protocol is simple and extendable, token updates or even password changes via a  simple  TLS  secured
       server  login  would  be  possible  in  theory,  but today a web browser and an external support tool are
       prerequisites for using this authentication method.  The token times out and must be  refreshed  via  the
       web  periodically;  in  Kerberos  /  GSSAPI  the local programs kinit(1) and kdestroy(1) offer user local
       control, the latter also while offline.

       Before being able to use OAUTHBEARER, some hurdles  must  be  taken.   Using  GMail  as  an  example,  an
       application  (a  simple  name)  needs  to  be registered, for which credentials need to be created.  This
       configuration step generates a “client ID” and a “client secret”.  These two strings  need  to  be  saved
       locally   in  a  secure  way.   For  GMail  these  initial  configuration  steps  can  be  performed  via
       https://developers.google.com/identity/protocols/OAuth2.  Thereafter access tokens can be requested,  the
       program  available  for  download  do  do  this  for  a GMail account is https://github.com/google/gmail-
       oauth2-tools/blob/master/python/oauth2.py:

             $ python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
               --client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
               --generate_oauth2_token
             To authorize token, visit this url and follow the directions:
               https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/auth?client_id=...
               Enter verification code: ...
               Refresh Token: ...
               Access Token: ...
               Access Token Expiration Seconds: 3600
             $ # The last three are the actual token responses.
             $ # To refresh the granted token:
             $ python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
               --client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
               --refresh-token=THE-REFRESH-TOKEN

       S-nail does not (yet) offer the possibility to (lazy) expand aka run shell commandos which  are  embedded
       in  variable content, or periodically run some command, therefore keeping an access token up-to-date from
       within it  can  only  be  performed  by  setting  the  hook  on-main-loop-tick,  or  (for  sending  only)
       on-compose-splice.   For  more  on  authentication  please  see the section “On URL syntax and credential
       lookup”.

   Not "defunctional", but the editor key does not work
       It can happen that the terminal library (see “On  terminal  control  and  line  editor”,  bind,  termcap)
       reports different codes than the terminal really sends, in which case S-nail will tell that a key binding
       is  functional,  but  will  not be able to recognize it because the received data does not match anything
       expected.  Especially without the [Option]al terminal capability library support one reason for this  may
       be  that  the  (possibly  even non-existing) keypad is not turned on and the resulting layout reports the
       keypad control codes for the normal keyboard keys.  The verbose listing of bindings will  show  the  byte
       sequences that are expected.

       To overcome the situation, use, e.g., the program cat(1), in conjunction with the command line option -v,
       if  available,  to see the byte sequences which are actually produced by keypresses, and use the variable
       termcap to make S-nail aware of them.  E.g., the terminal this is typed on produces some false sequences,
       here an example showing the shifted home key:

             ? set verbose
             ? bind*
             # 1B 5B=[ 31=1 3B=; 32=2 48=H
               bind base :kHOM z0
             ? x
             $ cat -v
             ^[[H
             $ s-nail -v -Stermcap='kHOM=\E[H'
             ? bind*
             # 1B 5B=[ 48=H
               bind base :kHOM z0

   Can S-nail git-send-email?
       Yes.  Put (at least parts of) the following in your ~/.gitconfig:

             [sendemail]
             smtpserver = /usr/bin/s-nail
             smtpserveroption = -t
             #smtpserveroption = -Sexpandaddr
             smtpserveroption = -Athe-account-you-need
             ##
             suppresscc = all
             suppressfrom = false
             assume8bitEncoding = UTF-8
             #to = /tmp/OUT
             confirm = always
             chainreplyto = true
             multiedit = false
             thread = true
             quiet = true
             annotate = true

       Patches can also be send directly, for example:

             $ git mail-patch HEAD^ |
               s-nail -Athe-account-you-need -t RECEIVER

   Howto handle stale dotlock files
       file sometimes fails to open MBOX mail databases because creation of “dotlock files” is impossible due to
       existing but unowned lock files.  S-nail does not offer an option to deal with those files, because it is
       considered a site policy what counts as unowned, and what not.  The site policy  is  usually  defined  by
       administrator(s),  and  expressed  in  the  configuration of a locally installed MTA (for example Postfix
       ‘stale_lock_time=500s’).  Therefore the suggestion:

             $ </dev/null s-nail -s 'MTA: be no frog, handle lock' $LOGNAME

       By sending a mail to yourself the local MTA can use its  normal  queue  mechanism  to  try  the  delivery
       multiple times, finally decide a lock file has become stale, and remove it.

IMAP CLIENT

       [Option]ally  there  is  IMAP  client  support  available.  This part of the program is obsolete and will
       vanish in v15 with the large MIME and I/O layer rewrite, because it uses old-style blocking I/O and makes
       excessive use of signal based long code jumps.  Support can hopefully be readded later based  on  a  new-
       style  I/O,  with  SysV  signal  handling.   In  fact  the IMAP support had already been removed from the
       codebase, but was reinstantiated on user demand: in effect the IMAP  code  is  at  the  level  of  S-nail
       v14.8.16 (with imapcodec being the sole exception), and should be treated with some care.

       IMAP  uses  the  ‘imap://’  and ‘imaps://’ protocol prefixes, and an IMAP-based folder may be used.  IMAP
       URLs (paths) undergo inspections and possible transformations before use (and the command  imapcodec  can
       be used to manually apply them to any given argument).  Hierarchy delimiters are normalized, a step which
       is  configurable  via  the imap-delim variable chain, but defaults to the first seen delimiter otherwise.
       S-nail supports internationalised IMAP names, and en- and decodes the names from and to the ttycharset as
       necessary and possible.  If a mailbox name is  expanded  (see  “Filename  transformations”)  to  an  IMAP
       mailbox,  all  names  that begin with `+' then refer to IMAP mailboxes below the folder target box, while
       folder names prefixed by `@' refer to folders below the hierarchy base, e.g.,  the  following  lists  all
       folders below the current one when in an IMAP mailbox: ‘folders @’.

       Note:  some  IMAP servers do not accept the creation of mailboxes in the hierarchy base, but require that
       they are created as subfolders of `INBOX' – with such servers a folder name of the form

             imaps://mylogin@imap.myisp.example/INBOX.

       should be used (the last character is the server's hierarchy  delimiter).   The  following  IMAP-specific
       commands exist:

       cache     Only applicable to cached IMAP mailboxes; takes a message list and reads the specified messages
                 into the IMAP cache.

       connect   If  operating in disconnected mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to online mode and connect to the
                 mail server while retaining the mailbox  status.   See  the  description  of  the  disconnected
                 variable for more information.

       disconnect
                 If operating in online mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to disconnected mode while retaining the
                 mailbox status.  See the description of the disconnected variable for more.  A list of messages
                 may  optionally  be  given  as  argument;  the respective messages are then read into the cache
                 before the connection is closed,  thus  ‘disco  *’  makes  the  entire  mailbox  available  for
                 disconnected use.

       imap      Sends  command  strings  directly  to  the current IMAP server.  S-nail operates always in IMAP
                 `selected state' on the current mailbox; commands that change  this  will  produce  undesirable
                 results and should be avoided.  Useful IMAP commands are:

                       create         Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument and creates it.

                       getquotaroot   (RFC 2087) Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument and prints the
                                      quotas  that  apply  to  the  mailbox.   Not all IMAP servers support this
                                      command.

                       namespace      (RFC 2342) Takes no arguments and  prints  the  Personal  Namespaces,  the
                                      Other User's Namespaces and the Shared Namespaces.  Each namespace type is
                                      printed in parentheses; if there are multiple namespaces of the same type,
                                      inner  parentheses  separate  them.   For  each  namespace  a prefix and a
                                      hierarchy separator is listed.  Not all IMAP servers support this command.

       imapcodec
                 Perform IMAP path transformations.  Supports vput (see “Command modifiers”),  and  manages  the
                 error  number  !.   The  first  argument specifies the operation: e[ncode] normalizes hierarchy
                 delimiters (see imap-delim) and  converts  the  strings  from  the  locale  ttycharset  to  the
                 internationalized variant used by IMAP, d[ecode] performs the reverse operation.  Encoding will
                 honour the (global) value of imap-delim.

       The following IMAP-specific internal variables exist:

       disconnected
                 (Boolean)  When  an  IMAP  mailbox  is  selected and this variable is set, no connection to the
                 server is initiated.  Instead,  data  is  obtained  from  the  local  cache  (see  imap-cache).
                 Mailboxes  that  are  not  present  in  the  cache and messages that have not yet entirely been
                 fetched from the server are not available; to fetch all messages in  a  mailbox  at  once,  the
                 command `copy * /dev/null' can be used while still in connected mode.  Changes that are made to
                 IMAP  mailboxes  in  disconnected mode are queued and committed later when a connection to that
                 server is made.  This procedure is not completely reliable since it cannot be  guaranteed  that
                 the  IMAP  unique  identifiers  (UIDs)  on the server still match the ones in the cache at that
                 time.  Data is saved to DEAD when this problem occurs.

       disconnected-USER@HOST
                 The specified account is handled as described for the disconnected variable  above,  but  other
                 accounts are not affected.

       imap-auth-USER@HOST, imap-auth
                 Sets  the  IMAP  authentication  method.   Supported  are  the  default  ‘login’,  [v15-compat]
                 ‘oauthbearer’  (see  “FAQ”  entry  “But,  how  about  XOAUTH2  /  OAUTHBEARER?”),  [v15-compat]
                 ‘external’  and  ‘externanon’  (for TLS secured connections which pass a client certificate via
                 tls-config-pairs), as well as the [Option]al ‘cram-md5’ and ‘gssapi’.  All methods need a  user
                 and a password except ‘gssapi’ and ‘external’, which only need the former.  ‘externanon’ solely
                 builds upon the credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go since
                 tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422, and fail if additional credentials are actually
                 passed.

       imap-cache
                 Enables  caching  of IMAP mailboxes.  The value of this variable must point to a directory that
                 is either existent or can be created by S-nail.  All contents of the cache can  be  deleted  by
                 S-nail at any time; it is not safe to make assumptions about them.

       imap-delim-USER@HOST, imap-delim-HOST, imap-delim
                 The  hierarchy  separator  used by the IMAP server.  Whenever an IMAP path is specified it will
                 undergo normalization.  One of the normalization steps  is  the  squeezing  and  adjustment  of
                 hierarchy  separators.   If  this variable is set, any occurrence of any character of the given
                 value that exists in the path will be replaced by the first member of the value; an empty value
                 will cause the default to be used, it is ‘/.’.  If not set, we will reuse the  first  hierarchy
                 separator character that is discovered in a user-given mailbox name.

       imap-keepalive-USER@HOST, imap-keepalive-HOST, imap-keepalive
                 IMAP  servers may close the connection after a period of inactivity; the standard requires this
                 to be at least 30 minutes, but practical experience may  vary.   Setting  this  variable  to  a
                 numeric  `value'  greater  than 0 causes a `NOOP' command to be sent each `value' seconds if no
                 other operation is performed.

       imap-list-depth
                 When retrieving the list of folders on an IMAP server, the folders command stops after  it  has
                 reached  a certain depth to avoid possible infinite loops.  The value of this variable sets the
                 maximum depth allowed.  The default is 2.  If the folder separator on the current  IMAP  server
                 is  a  slash  `/',  this  variable  has  no  effect and the folders command does not descend to
                 subfolders.

       imap-use-starttls-USER@HOST, imap-use-starttls-HOST, imap-use-starttls
                 Causes S-nail to issue a `STARTTLS' command to make an unencrypted IMAP session TLS  encrypted.
                 This  functionality  is not supported by all servers, and is not used if the session is already
                 encrypted by the IMAPS method.

SEE ALSO

       bogofilter(1), gpg(1), more(1), newaliases(1), openssl(1), sendmail(1), sh(1), spamassassin(1), iconv(3),
       setlocale(3), aliases(5), termcap(5), terminfo(5), locale(7),  mailaddr(7),  re_format(7)  (or regex(7)),
       mailwrapper(8), sendmail(8)

HISTORY

       M.  Douglas  McIlroy  writes  in  his  article  “A  Research  UNIX  Reader:  Annotated  Excerpts from the
       Programmer's Manual, 1971-1986” that a mail(1) command already appeared in First Edition Unix in 1971:

             Electronic mail was there from the start.  Never satisfied with its exact behavior, everybody
             touched it at one time or another: to assure the safety of simultaneous access, to improve privacy,
             to survive crashes, to exploit uucp, to screen out foreign freeloaders, or whatever.  Not until v7
             did the interface change (Thompson).  Later, as mail became global in its reach, Dave Presotto took
             charge and brought order to communications with a grab-bag of external networks (v8).

       BSD Mail, in large parts compatible with Unix mail, was written in 1978 by Kurt Shoens and  developed  as
       part of the BSD Unix distribution until 1995.  The common Unix and BSD denominator became standardized as
       mailx(1)  in  the  X/Open  Portability  Guide  Issue 2 (January 1987).  After the rise of Open Source BSD
       variants Mail saw continuous development in the individual code forks, noticeably by Christos  Zoulas  in
       NetBSD.   Based  upon  this  Nail, later Heirloom Mailx, was developed by Gunnar Ritter in the years 2000
       until 2008.  Since 2012 S-nail is maintained by Steffen Nurpmeso.  This man page  is  derived  from  “The
       Mail Reference Manual” that was originally written by Kurt Shoens.

       Electronic  mail  exchange  in  general is a concept even older.  The earliest well documented electronic
       mail system was part of the Compatible Time Sharing System (CTSS) at  MIT,  its  MAIL  command  had  been
       proposed  in  a staff planning memo at the end of 1964 and was implemented in mid-1965 when Tom Van Vleck
       and Noel Morris  wrote  the  necessary  code.   Similar  communication  programs  were  built  for  other
       timesharing  systems.  One of the most ambitious and influential was Murray Turoff's EMISARI.  Created in
       1971 for the United States Office of Emergency Preparedness, EMISARI combined private electronic messages
       with a chat system, public postings, voting, and a user directory.

       During the 1960s it was common to connect a large number of terminals  to  a  single,  central  computer.
       Connecting  two  computers together was relatively unusual.  This began to change with the development of
       the ARPANET, the ancestor of today's Internet.   In  1971  Ray  Tomlinson  adapted  the  SNDMSG  program,
       originally  developed  for  the  University  of California at Berkeley timesharing system, to give it the
       ability to transmit a message across the network into the mailbox of a user on a different computer.  For
       the first time it was necessary to  specify  the  recipient's  computer  as  well  as  an  account  name.
       Tomlinson decided that the underused commercial at ‘@’ would work to separate the two.

       Sending a message across the network was originally treated as a special instance of transmitting a file,
       and  so a MAIL command was included in RFC 385 on file transfer in 1972.  Because it was not always clear
       when or where a message had come from, RFC 561 in  1973  aimed  to  formalize  electronic  mail  headers,
       including  “from”, “date”, and “subject”.  In 1975 RFC 680 described fields to help with the transmission
       of messages to multiple users, including “to”, “cc”, and “bcc”.  In 1977 these features and  others  went
       from  best  practices  to  a binding standard in RFC 733.  Queen Elizabeth II of England became the first
       head of state to send electronic mail on March 26 1976 while  ceremonially  opening  a  building  in  the
       British Royal Signals and Radar Establishment (RSRE) in Malvern.

AUTHORS

       Kurt  Shoens,  Edward Wang, Keith Bostic, Christos Zoulas, Gunnar Ritter.  S-nail is developed by Steffen
       Nurpmeso <s-mailx@lists.sdaoden.eu>.

CAVEATS

       [v15 behaviour may differ] Interrupting an operation via SIGINT aka ‘control-C’ from anywhere else but  a
       command  prompt  is  very problematic and likely to leave the program in an undefined state: many library
       functions cannot deal with the siglongjmp(3) that this software (still)  performs;  even  though  efforts
       have  been  taken  to address this, no sooner but in v15 it will have been worked out: interruptions have
       not been disabled in order to allow forceful breakage of hanging network connections,  for  example  (all
       this is unrelated to ignore).

       The  SMTP  and  POP3 protocol support of S-nail is very basic.  Also, if it fails to contact its upstream
       SMTP server, it will not make further attempts to transfer the message at a later time (setting save  and
       sendwait  may be useful).  If this is a concern, it might be better to set up a local SMTP server that is
       capable of message queuing.

BUGS

       When a network-based mailbox is open, directly changing to another network-based mailbox of  a  different
       protocol (i.e., from POP3 to IMAP or vice versa) will cause a “deadlock”.

       After  deleting  some  message  of  a  POP3  mailbox  the header summary falsely claims that there are no
       messages to display, one needs to perform a scroll or dot movement to restore proper state.

       In ‘thread’ed sort mode a power user may encounter crashes very occasionally (this is may and very).

       Please report bugs to the contact-mail address, e.g., from within s-nail: ‘?  eval  mail  $contact-mail’.
       Including the verbose output of the command version may be helpful, e.g.,

             ? wysh set escape=! verbose; vput version xy; unset verbose;\
               eval mail $contact-mail
             Bug subject
             !I xy
             !.

       Information on the web at ‘$ s-nail -X 'echo $contact-web; x'’.

Debian                                           August 17, 2019                                       S-NAIL(1)